W27 Weekly!

DeletedUser

Guest
W27 Weekly: 23th August

Banner.png


[spoil]Zarin – Editor/Interview

Submissions: Maccano1

Eternal Light Extinguished
LA-G falls as the Coalition struggle against mounting Shadow pressure

I shall begin with the stats as always, they do not lie at least.

War stats as of 18:00 (Sunday)

Side 1:
Tribes: Shadow
Players:

Side 2:
Tribes: Nstlk* Dstlk* LA-G TK [IRON] FURY
Players:

Timeframe: 16/08/2009 18:00:00 to 23/08/2009 18:00:00

Total conquers:

Side 1: 366
Side 2: 294
Difference: 72

image.php


Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 212
Side 2: 16
Difference: 196

image.php


Points value of total conquers:

Side 1: 3,356,885
Side 2: 1,499,462
Difference: 1,857,423

image.php


Points value of total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 1,983,470
Side 2: 152,267
Difference: 1,831,203

image.php


Side 1:
Tribes: Shadow
Players:

Side 2:
Tribes: Nstlk* Dstlk*
Players:

Timeframe: 16/08/2009 18:00:00 to 23/08/2009 18:00:00

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 89
Side 2: 2
Difference: 87

image.php


Side 1:
Tribes: Shadow
Players:

Side 2:
Tribes: [IRON]
Players:

Timeframe: 16/08/2009 18:00:00 to 23/08/2009 18:00:00

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 6
Side 2: 4
Difference: 2

image.php


Side 1:
Tribes: Shadow
Players:

Side 2:
Tribes: TK
Players:

Timeframe: 16/08/2009 18:00:00 to 23/08/2009 18:00:00

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 86
Side 2: 6
Difference: 80

image.php


Side 1:
Tribes: Shadow
Players:

Side 2:
Tribes: LA-G
Players:

Timeframe: 16/08/2009 18:00:00 to 23/08/2009 18:00:00

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 8
Side 2: 0
Difference: 8

image.php


Side 1:
Tribes: Shadow
Players:

Side 2:
Tribes: FURY
Players:

Timeframe: 16/08/2009 18:00:00 to 23/08/2009 18:00:00

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 23
Side 2: 4
Difference: 19

image.php


There is no way of avoiding the fact that the Coalition has suffered a heavy defeat this week. The difference of almost 200 conquers is a indictment of the seemingly growing disparity between the two sides. Shadow has been victorious on every single front even if by small margins.

Unfortunately, the demise of LA-G and the subsequent dispersal of those members to other tribes has affected the stats negatively for Nstlk* in particular as they have taken in Coalition players whom they would have struggled to help even if they wanted to.

Even so, a reply of just 2 conquers is testament to a heavily weakened tribe in the wake of the formation of REF and the many weeks of war that they have endured. If there were hopes of regrouping after the admittance of some LA-G players to make a stronger Nstlk*, these must surely have been crushed by the loss of SnipeAlott, their largest player and gambitv, both to REF. With many large players in the area having already moved to REF, one must surely expect others to follow suit, leaving the less experienced and smaller players to fend for themselves.

Elsewhere, TK struggle again this week to account for their losses with a meagre six conquers. They also seem to show heavy losses from the very top of their membership , but these players have failed to make the conquers against Shadow which may have been expected in light of their group of large members. It seems that they have struggled with the mantra of leading by example and the tribe has suffered as a result. One would suppose that the only good thing that can be taken from this week is that TK made the most conquers against Shadow.

In the North, it has been a slow week, testament either to excellent defence, or mere apathy or even softer targets. Whatever the case, Shadow will take heart from a lead in the stats here, though the prophet of the North maintains his zeal. Let us hope that the stats for next week are far more interesting…

Chronic underdogs FURY enjoyed another decent week this time around compared with their beginnings. Despite an obvious disparity in conquers, the numbers are small and FURY are seeming to hold together surprisingly well considering the probable lack of experience among the membership.

Meanwhile, LA-G defied expectations of a miserable slide into obscurity and defeat with an unexpected merge into the various Coalition constituents. Unfortunately, this comes too late to prevent Shadow acquisition of valuable core territory and in the wake of the ravaging of their duke – ashiwwru12.

Shadow for their part have shown a strong front this week. With gains on every front and the disbandment of one of their enemies, this has been an excellent week which they shall build upon. It seems that the initial efforts of the Coalition have dwindled, highlighting their disadvantage in having such a low average size of member. While Shadow players can maintain assaults on their own, the Coalition must rely upon coordination between several members; should this not happen, then attacks can turn into incongruous messes.

What is perhaps most interesting is the fact that both sides are still heavily nobling other targets. The Coalition are far worse offenders, and one must seriously be wondering where all of these conquers are going; then again, it is more villages for Shadow to take and a simple war of attrition could be the order of the day. On the other hand, Shadow’s other conquers are at least of large villages, even if there are a significant number coming from internal noblings.

Whatever the case, it has been a strong showing for Shadow and a disappointing week for the Coalition. If this continues, then they simply will not be able to contend.​

KnightFall
Shadow extinguishes LA-G

Enjoy the headline while it lasts, it’s probably the best example of paronomasia that I’ll include in an article (it’s not even mine, but kudos to you if you know where I got it from).

Anyway, despite my expectation of LA-G’s demise to be as woeful as their rise, they made a surprising move in distributing their members among the other Coalition tribes. Of course, a tribe like LA-G doesn’t simply die, it lingers on, whether as the butt of many jokes; as an example of how to make a tribe or simply for the schadenfreude. Regardless, it is simply another chapter in W27 history coming to a close.

LA-G has often had a proud history, but it was always disproportionate. Despite looking strong on paper, few were prepared for the debacle of their war with ATTACK or their bathetic exit here. It is a classic example of how poor recruitment choice and inept leadership will ruin tribes and will no doubt earn a place in W27 legend as a synonym for failure.

It is an effort to note any real achievements, their placements in the rankings were ill deserved and they have had no notable military successes. Nevertheless, it is a nostalgic moment for W27 veterans who see this entity come to an end as anything vaguely meaningful.

I shall conclude simply by thanking those members who made LA-G what it was and note that not all should be tarnished with the same brush. You are an intrinsic part of W27 history and when the final history of this world is created (that’ll be me writing that I suppose) you will feature prominently.​

In Other News…

  • REF and Shadow continue light skirmishes, though neither side has admitted to any real war. Perhaps it is simply a case of attacking and hoping that the other will simply sweep it under the rug. Let’s hope at least that this is not all either side has to offer.​

Interview


Zarin
synister zero

Greetings Synister Zero

I am writing to as whether you might be interested in partaking in an interview for the W27 Weekly. I assume you are familiar with the format as of late, and you evidently have plenty to say about the conflict, so this could be a very interesting video indeed. You are welcome to be as outspoken and sensationalist as ever, because that will inevitably make for a good interview.

Zarin


Sure, it’s great to be able to talk with you over a medium other than the forums.

Well let us begin with a friendly question which would be: why do you call yourself Synister Zero?

The reason I call myself Synister Zero is because it best descibes my personality in my interaction with others. A stranger on the street would most likely describe me as a Synister character yet mysterious in my demeanor

Interesting, I suppose you are sinister too due to your prophecies. So how did you come to Tribal Wars?

To be honest I cant remember, I first played tw about 1.5 - 2 years ago quit and then returned about 9 months ago.

Ah, so which was you first world and how did you get on?

Either 6 or 7, back then I played tribalhugs and learned from my past mistakes, I must have found this game either in an advertisment or while doing a search for browser based games.

Were you rimmed, or did you quit?

I quit right before I was rimmed, the rimming was inevitable.

Fair enough. Did you play any worlds between that one and W27?

World 27 is my third world, right before I joined this one I played on world 13.

A popular choice, did that go any better for you?

I was still playing tribal hugs on world 13 as well, I did however get the basic down about balanced villages and no to mix them so its all a learning experience in the end.

Naturally, naturally; we all have to learn somewhere. So why did you suddenly return for W27?

I remebered all the fun I had interacting with others on the interal tribe forums, thats the main reason I keep coming back.

Was there any particular reason you chose W27, or was it simpy the newest world at the time?

It just happened to be the newest world, interestingly enough I happened to be locked into a tribe with Ash when I joined.

Oh right, what did you think of ash?

I considered him the same as the rest of the tribe I was lock into, just an annoying useless illiterate newb clown who thought he could boss people around.


Your opinion I suppose, I shall not argue it. What did you think of the whole tribe lock idea?

At first it angered me befor forced to stay in a tribe with people I didnt respect or like but as time went on I began enjoy playing solo and gained experience from crushing everyone around me who were allso forced to play solo without help from their tribes. I managed to go from playing tribal hugs to a strong offensive player as a result of the tribe lock.

Finally there are some positives about the lock. So, broadly speaking, how did you come to end up in [IRON], I assume you are not there by the grace of your prophecy making?

Thats a story in itsself which I will simplefy as much as possible. After YGI merged into nstlk, I was originally thinking of joining up with Shadow but I never got around to asking for an invite nor did they seem to beleave me a prospect worthy of going out of their to entice me to join them. I shortly after joined up with nstlk as the rest of YGI did and left them the day they declared war on Shadow ( ATTACK at the time). The only two options left in my regions were K25PG and *EPIC. I chose K25PG which would later merge with SORRY! to become [IRON].

What did you think of YGI??

They were my cake and icecream, I dont blame macca for trying to bring back those days of glory. Never had I been more proud to be a member of any tribe than when I was a member of YGI. We had everything you could ask for in a tribe great members, 100% activity, Leadership you would gladly follow to the pits of hell if asked to.

So then, what went wrong?

We merged into Nstlk and everything we stood for was lost. We became just another average tribe, what was special about us just didnt seem to be their anymore.

Then why did the merge happen?

I was just a member YGI and not part of the leadership so I dont know what went on behind the scenes at the highest levels, thier is allway something going on their. The offical reason given to the members was to create a tribe strong enough to defeat ATTACK.

Why then did you leave Nstlk* before the war (with ATTACK)?

To be honest I thought they were a bunch of douches, Not only did they declare war on YGI my tribe at the time but ATTACK as well, both tribes being their ally at the time of the declaration. To make things worse random topics kept poping up about how they kicked YGI ass and how we stood no chance of winning. Both reason dont leave much room for trust building exercises. Take note though the current incarnation of nstlk isnt run by tacops or what ever the master spy was named and the rest of the original leadership.

Interesting; do think that the tribe was strong enough to take on ATTACK (i.e. sans the merge with ~AOW~)?

I didnt really care if they were strong enough to take ATTACK on or vice versa. As long as the two superpowers of w27 were caught in total equalibrium long enough what they did was irrelevent to the rest of the world, allmsot as if they didnt exist at all.

So you took advantage of this and moved to a different tribe: K25PG, the in between period if you will. How and why did you come to that particular tribe?

My PA spaniard and myself had a deep history with this tribe. For month the two of us terrorized this tribe to know end, we took villages from them with total impunity, crushed all attempts to oppose us. To them we must have been the boogymen. The one thing that stood out to myself as we assailed them is that they didnt give up or quit, they preserved and became so much stronger when most tribes would have fallen. That is the reason I chose them because when things get tough and all chances of victory seem impossible I know they wont stop fighting.

What did you see for the future of K25PG?

I saw great potential in them, an instrument which I could mold into a weapon to use against the winner of the Great war between Nstlk and Shadow. Everything I did was to prepare them for the inevitable was which has come to pass. For the most part part they couldnt see the immenent threat the lurked to their south. Nstlk who were k25pgs allies at the time, I knew they would betray us when the time was right as they had done to every ally they ever had. Shadow would pretend to be rightous and honorable and wipe all the tribes out one by one. I knew all of this from the start and prepared for it, months and months of planning . the War involving K25Pg and their ally SORRY! vs *Epic just seemed like two job tribes picking on a smaller tribe but in reality it was to gain a stronghold in k35 in order to safeguard the main continent and to have a platform to launch our nukes at shadow when the time was right. No one to my knowledge could see what we were planning in Shadow besides frombie, he seem right through our agressive acts from the start. everyone else just seen it as a random act of two newb tribes trying to gain some attention. I had seen all of this plus so much more in k25pg's future when i decided to join them.
All of this is part of our worlds history and should be shared. their are so many events transpiring in w27 past present and future that only a few people actually have knowledge of.


Naturally, this is why I ask, to reveal the intricacies of the politics

The war against *Epic went very well, but do you think that your tribes would have been better served by attacking a stronger tribe to give them more experience?


Possibly but killing off *EPIC just completed to many objectives in preparing us for this war that it had to be done as soon as possible.

And one would assume that the merge to create [IRON] made excellent sense. Had you been impressed by SORRY! or did you merely need more members?

The merge of the two tribes had allrdy been set in motion befor I joined, all that remained was the details of the merging. who would be in what position of authority and such.

Indeed, so what role did you take up in the tribe?

No comment.

That’s a shame, but never mind.

Did you expect Nstlk* to put up more of a fight?


I expected the balance to shift eventually and made plans accordingly.

I assume you won’t be commenting there either, so we’ll move on. How did the Coalition come to be?

Through talks amongst the leaders of the tribes about a common enemy and how best to deal with said enemy.

I suppose the biggest question is: did you leave it too late, would it have been better to form the Coalition a littler earlier?

Its not to late but without a doubt declaring just when the fighting had began in k45 would have been more effective.

What do you think of Shadow, now that you are at war; did you under-estimate them or over-estimate them?

Neither, I knew that the tribe that gained the lead during the war between Shadow and nstlk would be without a doubt be most challenging endever I have ever faced in timeline of playing tw to date. The trick is to know how to fight an enemy who cant be beaten through conquest and at the same time can defeat your through conquest if given enough time.

I take it then that you still believe that you will win

I dont believe we will win, I know we will win.

Is that due to your prophecy?

More like a trump card.

Interesting, I take it you won't be commenting

Well if i told you what it was then I could guarantee that as things are we would not win this war.

How novel, please excuse me if I am not in the least worried by this trump card of yours. Well, I shall not delve into your plans, but I shall ask you simply for your opinion on how the war is progressing.

So far the war is still in its early stages and will last at a minimum 6-9 months befor any decisive progress is scene. At this time it is clear that Shadow is holding their owne and getting the upperhand over the coalition everywhere besides the north east and west where Nstlk and [iron] are holding their owne and even pushing Shadow back with solid planning and a number of "Miracles. Overall though it is still much to early to be declaring either side the inevitable winner through facts and logic when their is so much fight left in the warring factions.

So you are not concerned by the recent stats showing a significant lead for Shadow?

The stats are completely irrelevent, Their has never been a clear case in w27 where a major tribe was every destroyed through conquest. What kills tribes in this world is internal strife. Shadow will not destroy the coalition through war neither will the coalition destroy Shadow. What will win this war will be perserverance.

I would agree, and this concept has been demonstrated, but would you not agree that a significant disparity in conquers can cause internal strife due to its effects on the morale of the tribe?

If a tribe has good leadership a situation such as that should only make them stronger and build closer bonds. cases where a tribe falls apart demonstrates a great ineptitude in a tribes leadership.

Indeed, but such leaders are few and far between.

[IRON] has such leaders and from what I can see Shadow allso has such leaders.

Then of concern should be your allies who may not benefit from such ostensibly strong leadership; if they fall, do you think that [IRON] has the ability to stand alone?

No tribe has the ability to stand alone against shadow at this time. The reason for the coalition is because the leadership of all of these tribes came to that realization.

Of course, let us move on. What are your thoughts on REF?

REF huh, I have nothing but respect for their members as most of them were my old tribe mates back in the days of YGI? as a tribe in the political sense they are a great potential enemy that could give [Iron] problems in the future and have further weakened the absolute power structure in the north and further divided the power held by certain tribes in the north into more factions. They could allso become potential allies who could help fight off Shadow.

What do you see in store for a) yourself b) [IRON] c) Shadow d) REF e) the rest of the world?

A) What happens to me as an individual playing on this world is of no consqeuence

B) I can see [IRON] becoming a superpower in the post "Shadow Wars" geopolitical world. Their main ojective at this point is to gain as much fighting experience and learn to cordinate their attacks befor the real fighting begins. When I say real fighting I mean this childrens game in the north we are playing with shadow will be nothing compared to when we crush the north and attempt to take shadows core.

C) I can see Shadow being pushing pushed back and a line drawn across the map.

D) As for Reformation I cant tell what their ultimate objective is nor do I wish to to make any type of unfounded accusations toward them.

E) For the rest of the world I see their isolated territories falling to Shadow befor they Draw a line at their main cluster and begin to push shadow back.


Let us talk about your prophecy if we might. How did this prophecy of yours come about?

They are the words of those who shape worlds.

I suppose your cryptic answers seem to you to grant you ethereal wisdom.

not so much, you wont understand because you dont believe in the prophecy

Do you seriously believe in it?

Why would I not? The words of the prophecy ring true for all to see day after day.

In your opinion; there are many who believe that it is done in jest. What if you are wrong?

Such silly questions Zarin, Do you really believe that k35 and k36 will not fall under the total dominance of [IRON]. Through the actions of my lords the world shapers We have allrdy become the second most powerful tribe of w27 and the premier power in the north now that nstlk has broken up into two trbes. Name one thing that I have said that would happen that hasnt?

That is not the point though, is it? The prophecy has not yet been fulfilled and just because events may seem to be heading in that direction is by no means an indication that the prophecy will come to pass. I merely asked a hypothetical question, I did not ask whether it would happen.

Could we at least have the full version of the prophecy?


No; for others to know the entire prophecy would make any further continueation of this world irrelevent for everyone - whats the point of playing a game if you know who is going to win and who is going to lose befor you even start

That assumes that people believe the prophecy and take it to mean what you do.

People can choose to believe in what they want, doesnt change the fact that it can kill them regardless of if they believe in it or not.

True enough, but not every prophecy ever made has come true and even if yours did, you may have simply misinterpreted it. You suggested that the North would fall and [IRON] would become the premier northern power. That does not mean that Shadow will not conquer everything else and does not mean that [IRON] will retain said power. I sense that you are still committed and I am still sceptical, so we shall move on once more.

If Shadow is defeated, how do you think that it will come about?


Shadow can not be defeated in the traditional sense. The only way to end shadow is from within. We may be able to cut off a leg or an arm but bringing the beast down through combat is an allmost impossible task as anyone can see. The same can be said about the coalition and if Shadow thinks otherwise they are surely ignorant.

If Shadow were to fall, what would you predict for the future of the world (everyone has their theories I am sure).

I wont go into great detail but I will say their will be a new treaty drafted which would enact a one month peace agreement between all members of the coalition after which all diplomatic stats would be reset. The point of which would be to once again bring balance to a broken world thus saving world 27.

I dont actually see shadow becoming completely extinct, just critically wounded. The remnant of Shadow would reform under a new name as well.


And who do you think would come out on top of such a situation in the end?

As I have stated earlier in the interview true balance would be restored to W27. Some tribe may come out of the war slightly stronger than others but nothing to traumatic.

Do you feel that Shadow has ‘ruined’ W27? Indeed, what are your thoughts on Shadow?

I dont feel that Shadow have ruined W27, they are only an essential part of the current scenario nothing more nothing less. I dont much have personal feeling about Shadow, it’s largely irrelevant.

Of course; so then, what is your favourite part of TW?

My favorite part of tw without a doubt is all the hatemail I receive from everyone. Nothing motivates me more to log in everyday than the thought of another human thinking me worthy enough to empart a large portion of their hatred and malice toward myself in the form of a congragation of random illiterate non sensical banter.

Who is your favourite forum personality?

My favorite forum personality has to be Lord of Bones. Not only is LoB A complete tool but a complete tool who makes everyone else look vastly more intelligent everytime he posts.

Is there a current player on W27 that you would like to fight?

Their is no one on tribal wars who I wish to fight. I dont actually see people when I play just multicolored dots some who I allow to grow others who must to hampered and a select few who must be crushed.

If Shadow wins the war against the Coalition, do you think that REF and whoever is left can stand against them?

Can Ref defeat Shadow if the coalition falls? is that a joke or something? Shadow will crush Reformation beneath their boots like a bug 1 vs 1. I cant believe I was asked such a stupid question.

Woah, I was just asking the stock questions.

Will you be returning to another world of Tribal Wars after W27 or packing it in?


I will most likely take a brake from tw for a few months befor once again returning.

Do you think Shadow deserves to win W27?

I will answere that question like this, If Shadow falls then they deserved to fall. If Shadow conquers the entire world then they deserved to. In this world you get what you deserve nothing more nothing less.

It is a good answer; I think that wraps things up. It was a pleasure, thank you for your time. Good luck with the war.

Thank you Zarin, it was a pleasure; good luck to you too.

Thoughts for the week

A few words on the vicissitudes of the week and TW in general


My thanks to maccano1 here who has fulfilled the criterion of being related to TW for once instead of my ramblings.

The Death of the Fake

Over a couple of conversations over a number of worlds it’s come to my attention that many players no longer really understand what faking really is. A couple of recent attacks against my accounts and some that I sit have shown that faking seems to be almost a lost art.

I was recently asked when setting up a recent attack, why I didn’t just rely on fake scripts to send fakes. This question perplexed me for a while, as I’d never really thought about it seriously, however after a conversation with the player I was able to show him why scripts aren’t particularly great at the job that they are meant to do; it was my realisation with the advent of scripts that have the ability to save us allot of time, many players (especially the newer ones who have grown up exclusively using scripts) don’t really understand what faking players is really meant to do, and that just running a script a couple hundred times doesn’t really provide adequate cover if you are planning on attacking targets with a large amount of nobles and nukes.

The whole idea behind a fake attack is that they are meant to mask attacks that are being sent at a player in an attempt to significantly deter a player from supporting the villages that are the real targets of the planned attack, they do this by confusing a player and hopefully drawing support to other targets, which makes the real target more vulnerable than if the fakes had not been sent. Unfortunately fake scripts do not realistically have this effect. Fake scripts (or at least the ones that I have seen knocking around) choose a random village from a pre-selected set of villages and send a single ram (or whatever troop input that you’ve chosen), while this does up a players attack counter, there is very little else that the attack does; because the attack is an isolated attack and not part of a series, anybody with any amount of experience and nouce will recognise it and either move troops (in case it’s a random nuke) or worse ignore it. Now I’m not saying that fake scripts don’t have their uses, used in conjunction with effective faking, they can add pressure to players and significantly improve the chance of attacks being successful, however their use as the exclusive mode of faking is severely ineffective when it comes to fighting anyone of experience.

Now not all players will do this, newer players who haven’t had the dubious pleasure of being attacked often may panic purely at a swarm of attacks and scream for support to all of their villages purely by seeing a mass of attacks. However if there are experienced heads in the tribe they are often able to calm the player down and show them how to navigate these attacks, analyse what the attacks are, and diagnose what is actually getting attacked by nobles and what actually needs support and what can be ignored. While some players are impervious to this brand of common sense it does help many players see what is there and subsequently navigate the attacks and any subsequent attacks with minimum losses to their village count.

The crooks of the problem is that many players on offense do not really see the need to change the way they attack, often finding that in the early/mid game, that players are that inexperienced that fake scripts are successful, and it isn’t until they come up against someone with a bit of skill (or someone who’s being tutored by someone with a bit of experience) that this ceases to work. This leads to a situation which we have today, where many players no longer understand what faking really should be, because they simply haven’t had to rely on anything more than a fake script and will enough to press it a couple hundred times.

So the question is where does this leave us now? Will there be a situation where real faking slowly fades out as the older worlds wind down, or will this skill slowly permeate the newer worlds as players become more experienced after finding that fake scripts are inadequate? I guess only time will tell.​

Stats

Top Ten Tribes
1 Shadow 54.315.314 62.681.989 64 979.406 6400 9.794
2 [IRON] 13.896.380 16.873.410 79 213.587 2001 8.432
3 Nstlk* 13.499.323 15.690.653 74 212.036 1803 8.703
4 REF 12.872.112 12.872.112 13 990.162 1314 9.796
5 TK 11.798.862 12.396.356 57 217.480 1471 8.427
6 *TKP* 6.898.933 7.102.000 49 144.939 911 7.796
7 FURY 4.757.104 5.022.367 61 82.334 645 7.787
8 SAM 2.619.371 2.619.371 24 109.140 390 6.716
9 Dstlk* 2.132.215 2.144.562 50 42.891 311 6.896
10 SoD 1.608.112 1.762.978 84 20.988 333 5.294

Top Ten Players
1 theSleepwalker REF 2.661.222 260 10235
2 ftw97 Shadow 2.490.378 253 9843
3 Carthon II Shadow 2.404.113 248 9694
4 gerick6 Shadow 2.280.633 224 10181
5 mikestuntz Shadow 2.267.991 224 10125
6 Zarin Shadow 2.106.189 209 10077
7 Mande1992 Shadow 2.029.287 207 9803
8 BrobFellshank Shadow 1.997.461 200 9987
9 filphillip Shadow 1.936.349 203 9539
10 toby7304 Shadow 1.862.188 188 9905

[/spoil]​
 
Last edited by a moderator:

DeletedUser

Guest
W27 Weekly: 30th August

Banner.png


[spoil]Zarin – Editor/Interview

Foreshadowing Victory
Coalition overwhelmed by Shadow pressure yet again

I shall begin with the stats as always, they do not lie at least.

War stats as of 19:00

Side 1:
Tribes: Shadow
Players:

Side 2:
Tribes: Nstlk* Dstlk* TK [IRON] FURY
Players:

Timeframe: Last week

Total conquers:

Side 1: 380
Side 2: 268
Difference: 112

image.php


Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 243
Side 2: 18
Difference: 225

image.php


Points value of total conquers:

Side 1: 3,409,317
Side 2: 1,710,790
Difference: 1,698,527

image.php


Points value of total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 2,167,330
Side 2: 163,151
Difference: 2,004,179

image.php


Side 1:
Tribes: Shadow
Players:

Side 2:
Tribes: Nstlk* Dstlk*
Players:

Timeframe: Last week

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 75
Side 2: 1
Difference: 74

image.php


Side 1:
Tribes: Shadow
Players:

Side 2:
Tribes: [IRON]
Players:

Timeframe: Last week

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 44
Side 2: 14
Difference: 30

image.php


Side 1:
Tribes: Shadow
Players:

Side 2:
Tribes: TK
Players:

Timeframe: Last week

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 80
Side 2: 1
Difference: 79

image.php


Side 1:
Tribes: Shadow
Players:

Side 2:
Tribes: FURY
Players:

Timeframe: Last week

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 44
Side 2: 2
Difference: 42

image.php


I’d like to say that the Coalition are fighting the good fight, but Tribal Wars is no fairytale world. Surely the Coalition leaders must be wondering how to save this situation before it becomes irreversible. Indeed, one does wonder if the situation is reparable given the shocking disparity in conquers which has been maintained this week. A difference of 225 villages is no small number, especially on such a small world and when last week was similar.

80% of people know that you can use statistics to prove anything, so let us look through this week’s gallery of statistics and examine where the weaknesses of the Coalition lie.

We come firstly to the Stalkers. With Dstlk* having mostly merged into TK, it is Nstlk* who are accounting for the losses, but by Nstlk* one means the LA-G refugees who have flooded it. One whole conquer for them this week while Shadow lays down 75. It is a far cry from the old days of Nstlk* and a worrying sign of just how far they have fallen; one might even suggest that Nstlk* is spent. While the top members, out of desire for self-preservation, have moved on; the remaining players wallow in inactivity and apathy, waiting to be picked off by Shadow. The only rather comedic positive of this whole affair is that they have not been the worst tribe this week.

That dubious honour goes of course to TK. Chronic inactivity seems to be the problem there, ever the spectre of W27’s wars. Shadow have simply shut TK out of this war early on and they have given up. Positives: a conquer; that’s all and they held it for less than 7 hours. The Dstlk* merge will not change anything; members who flee up there will not find Shadow any weaker in that area. Indeed the perennial opinion on TK these days seems to be that they were overestimated in the beginning. What does one see for the future of TK? If they are not careful they will simply conquer no villages at all and simply wait to be nobled out. One might even go as far to say that they, as Nstlk* seem to be, are a spent entity.

There are some positive areas though. FURY again shame some of their larger counterparts by making as many conquers as Nstlk* and TK put together as well as losing far less. Unfortunately, the positives stop there. FURY too have declined this week; and whatever way you look at it, they have still lost many villages to Shadow. Those losses are of course amplified when it is a smaller tribe and with less experienced members, the spectre of defeatism can so easily slip in.

Even in the North, the Coalition’s saving grace (or is that swan song?), [IRON], has been thoroughly beaten this week. This is the worst week for them since the war began, due in no small part to Lord of Bones’s destruction of Willettskillz. This could well be a sign of things to come or it could merely be a temporary blip for [IRON]. Whatever the case, they have lost a capable leader and this success could give Shadow some much needed initiative up North.

So what of Shadow then? Well their main enemy in this war now must surely be complacency. TK and the Stalkers are beginning to look hollow and FURY, although defending admirably have consistently failed to threaten Shadow on that front. With the war progressing well on all other fronts, [IRON] could very well find themselves taking on the majority of Shadow’s resources. The aim of the Coalition was to overwhelm Shadow with numerical superiority before each was removed individually, but Sun Tzu will attest to the impotency of numerical advantage. With a blatant lack of coordination between the constituent tribes, it may feel as if each one is taking on Shadow alone and thus the war in such a state cannot be won.​

In Other News…

  • REF and Shadow enjoy a relative peace for a week, and neither side has committed to war yet.​


  • Dstlk* merge with TK

  • We say farewell to willettskillz, one of the dukes of [IRON]. He was a highly capable leader and this comes as a blow to [IRON] who will miss him greatly no doubt. Good luck to him.

Interview


We have heard much from the non-Shadow side of things recently, so I decided to catch with how things were inside the Shadow camp and in particular how things are going in the North. We also have some nostalgia for those who remember Feb.13, to hopefully shed some different light on the history of the world. Without further ado, the interview:​

Zarin
Deciphered

Why do you call yourself Deciphered?

Deciphered seemed a fitting name for such a game as TW. It relies on being able to outwit and decipher what your opponents are doing in both attack and diplomacy, ergo Deciphered was the choice. It was also one of the first things that popped into my head.

Fair enough, you actually have a thoughtful reason for your name, rare indeed I suppose.

So how did you come across TW if I might ask?


I used to play Travian, a similar browser to Tribal Wars. I then soon learned about TW from the forums in the various alliances I would join and was persuaded by a certain Zarin to give it a go. I haven't turned back since.

Glad to hear it; Travian isn't a popular word around here and let's face it, TW was always better.

So where did you start (world wise)?


I began in W16 where I learned the ropes. I grew to about 200k due to help from certain tribe members who taught me most of what I now know. Of course I was still a noob back then but quickly caught on due to my past experiences in other similar browser games.

Well, W16 is a popular origin for players on W27. Did you play any other worlds before W27?

I dabbled in W26 alongside yourself but found myself under heavy attack from an excellent player even before I had my second village. I had missed my chance to become a respectable player on that world and looked for the next world to come along.

Yeah, that wasn't a good world for either of us. So you joined W27 simply because it was the next world, or did the tribe lock hold particular interest?

Both. I saw W27 as a good opportunity to be part of something different. The tribe-lock had never been attempted before and it sure has had an impact. Also I was keen to get back playing ASAP so jumped into W27 as soon as it was announced.

How was your tribe for those three months?

I was part of The Valkyries. Things were going well for the first month whilst a certain Sarasaurus lead us (very similar to Ephette). However she soon quit and leadership fell into the clammy hands of Scar Symmetry and Syklov. Both were good guys but didn't keep the tribe as alive as it had been. Everyone went on to do their own things and I often forgot and the tribe until, once a week, that symbol would unexpectedly appear - 90% of the time it would be someone posting in the 'Count to 1000!' thread.

Much to my surprise we made it to 1000 on the 12th of Feb.


That’s a decent achievement. Aside from yourself are there any large/successful players still around from that tribe?

None at all to my knowledge.

So what did you think of the tribe lock; will it be repeated?

The tribe lock was an interesting concept and was theoretically strong. It allowed the more experienced players to dominate their surroundings and make respectable PAs. The days following February 13th were the most interesting and diplomatic times many players would ever have seen. Merges, NAPs, immediate declarations...you name it. However I do not think it will ever be repeated, not on .net worlds anyway. It has made a small world with a small bunch of active players, Innogame's turnover for W27 will be negligable. They are a business at the end of the day.

Great answer.

So what happened to your tribe and yourself on Feb.13?


Well I had formed a pre-made weeks before D-day. It was originally meant to be a strong and compact K46 tribe. Noteable players included filphillip, labrat167, BDRC and eaglesrrules. However, in a bid for more power, I decided to merge with Feb.13 (formed by puccagb06). I soon found myself leading the tribe with the infamous Not For Sale. Things were going well and we decided it would be a good idea to hit Shadow (ATTACK at the time).

Why exactly did you chose that moment to hit ATTACK?

We, as many other tribes have since realised, saw that ATTACK would grow out of control should they be left any longer. We were, literally, the jam in the middle of the ATTACK donut and would soon be disposed of should we boble narbs instead of take decisive action. When ATTACK and LA-G were firmly locking non-existed horns (from LA-G's side anyway) we saw an opportunity.

Your declaration whilst ATTACK was at war with another tribe earned you animosity among ATTACK members for 'ambushing' them, it was thought of as a dishonourable move. What are your thoughts on this; would you have merely described it as sensible?

Its a grey area. Sure it wasn't 100% clean but, as you say, it seemed 'sensible'. Who knows if another decent opportunity to attack them would come along. Either way, it wasn't as though the LA-G war was using all of their resources was it?

As John Lyly would say "The rules of fair play do not apply in love and war".


That old chestnut. Do you think that Feb.13 would have had the ability to dominate the world as ATTACK came to do if they had won?

I would say no. The key to ATTACK's successes have lain in their commitment and drive, mainly inspired by their tight leadership and their other devoted tribe-mates. It was clear that Feb.13 didn't have this. Feb.13 never won the war so it is hard to say whether they were made of the right stuff to go on.

It’s like asking how many Frenchmen it takes to win a war. No-one knows as it has never happened.


How did the war go on a personal level?

It went exceptionally average. I was mainly trying to break the Northern Sector up, not to much success.

Not much else to say, I suppose silence says it all?


True enough, there were no huge breakthroughs from either side.

What happened in the aftermath?


Players split up into various tribes and did mostly housekeeping. Bored, 4fun and C46 were such tribes. I ended up in C46.

Were you surprised that ATTACK did not finish you off?

I was slightly surprised. However, ATTACK had plenty of other things on their plate. I know Albrew was keen to rim us all, but that's Albrew for you.

Indeed. I suppose you got your wish of a compact K46 tribe in the end; ironic isn't it?

Indeed it is. And yet again I then joined a larger tribe for kicks, guess I didn't learn the first time.

When Nstlk* declared on ATTACK, did the old Feb13 remnants want to fight ATTACK again?

I can only speak for those I was in close contact with (i.e. Not 4fun). Most of us were pretty sick of fighting ATTACK at that time and didn't see what would change this time round. I, specifically, didn't want to help Nstlk* as they had refused to help us (Feb.13) originally.

Interesting, do you think with hindsight this was a wise decision (if you had not ended up in Shadow)?

I believe it was. We could have caused ATTACK a bit of a headache by piping up against them again, but things have turned out quite nicely as it is.

That's true. What was the plan with C46?

It was generally seen as a failsafe to gather the respected players in K46 under one banner. BDRC lead it and just kept diplomacy to a minimum. It was exactly what some of us needed.

Fair enough. So how does the duke of Feb13 come to end up in ATTACK?

Funny one that isn't it? I'm still not 100% sure myself but maybe it was written. Dirtfish had impressed me during the war and we were innocently saying how we had hoped we were working TOGETHER, rather than against each other. It got me thinking and it seemed more and more realistic as the days passed. The only thing stopping me would have been Albrew, who then conveniently quit.

Well, it's always amusing how these things turn out

Did you face a certain animosity from ATTACK players or was it more mutual respect?


I felt a mixed response during my first few days in ATTACK. Although some were pleased to see me others kept things to themselves and kept me at an arms-length, and I don't blame them for that. However this was the time of the ATTACK/AOW merge and it seemed I wasn't top of the agenda. So I just slipped into the Shadows (excuse the paronomasia) and went about business as usual.

Well, we did end up in the same tribe as it finally transpired; it was a good time for ATTACK (soon to be renamed Shadow).

What did your ex-C46 tribemates think of you joining ATTACK?


By this time there were only 3/4 active members who were left in C46. Labrat had joined me and left behind were only the old Bored members (Grimlock, LordKhal and Jquint) and also filphillip - who has joined Shadow since

I believe that the old Bored members were not too pleased as they were the main promoters in favour of joining with Nstlk* against ATTACK. However I'm sure they got over it, they are L33T after all.


What did you think of ATTACK from the inside?

My respect for the tribe grew exponentially. I was in awe at the commitment from every tribe member and the efficiency of the war machine. Within the first few days I knew I had made the right decision.

So what did you think of the ~AOW~ merge when it came just a few days afterward?

I saw it as a sensible move that was inevitably going to happen. It helped players gain more support due and enabled increased coordination, I was all for it.

Do you think that Bored and 4Fun ‘declared’ too late?

Yes, they 'should' have joined Nstlk* right from Day 1.

Could Nstlk* + Feb.13 remnants (+ T-GR) have beaten ATTACK + ~AOW~?

If they joined at the right time, in one or 2 tribes and under strong leadership then yes. They would have needed to hurt ATTACK early on and not allow the merge with AOW to settle as easily as it did.

But realistically, at that time there were too many conflicting aims from said tribes. A united offensive that I talk of would have been unlikely - hence it didn't occur.


It certainly would have been an interesting war.

When they did 'declare', how was it fighting old friends?


'Old friends' isn't a phrase I would use. Most of the members left were the ones who either didn't contribute to Feb.13 or I had never had much contact with. So, it made no difference - I had new loyalties

Well you certainly helped to dispatch them rather readily.

Onto the main event: the Coalition war. What were your first thoughts when the Coalition declared?


'About time too'

Do you think that Shadow underestimated/overestimated the Coalition and vice versa?

I believe both sides had a certain amount of mutual respect for what had to be done. Perhaps TK were overestimated and FURY underestimated but I cannot speak for every player in Shadow. As for the coalition, I think they thought it would be easier and sheer numbers would win the war. Perhaps none of them have studied the publishings of Sun Tzu:

"In war, numbers alone confer no advantage. Do not advance relying on sheer military power."


What about [IRON]; did they conform to your expectations?

Yes and no. I knew they'd be the biggest threat to Shadow primarily because of our supposed 'weakness' up North. However when we say 'weakness', its mainly relative to our prowess in the rest of the world. Still, I remain unimpressed by what they throw at us.

Do you think [IRON]'s prophecy of taking K35 and K36 will come true?

Well they already are the largest tribes in said continents. I assume the 'prophecy' refers to pushing Shadow out of these areas...so no. IRON will never make major gains against Shadow in the North at their current rate

How is the war going on a personal level?

Things have been developing nicely for me. I set myself several goals at the start of the war and designated a time (in weeks) in which they should be completed. This has helped me stay on track and given me something to aim for. Several objectives have been completed (such as the clearance of several central K46 players), and I'm on schedule.

How do you see the world progressing?

I see a continued domination from Shadow. I don't think it will be all over as soon as some think though. As I mentioned in my brief article for the weekly 2 weeks ago, 'The War to end all wars' never lives up to the title. There will be a new challenge for Shadow at every corner, and it will be several months before they will be unchallenged. However, I do not foresee the emergence of any other power and it remains to the Shadow players to fulfill the dream.

So you do not think REF will pose any problems?

No. People forget it is just Nstlk* under a new name, just smaller.

Indeed, it is certainly something to remember

What do you see in store for the members of the Coalition, how long would you give each one?


TK - Will remain around for about a month, but participate in no real offensive action. Will be continually nobled and incur heavy losses to Shadow and show everyone else how not to play this game. [1 month]

IRON - Will continue to hang above Shadow's Northern Sector for awhile until it becomes clear that their lack of large 'base' players does not deserve them to be a top tribe (although it doesn't take much to be one nowadays) [6 months]

FURY - They will start to lose their larger players to the Shadow war machine and make no real ground on the offense. Their remote location will continue to haunt them. [2 months]

Nstlk* - Their time in this world is coming to an end and will slide down that exponential downhill curve. [3 months]


Interesting predictions, we’ll see how right you are.

In your opinion, what are the strengths and weaknesses of each side (REF/Coalition/Shadow) at the moment, and what should each be doing?


Strengths:
REF - Small and compact with active and, some, experienced players
Coalition - Always going to exist due to player count.
Shadow - War tested, diverse player base and a strong leadership

Weaknesses:
REF - Still contain weak players and have little map influence
Coalition - Mainly made up of inexperienced players who lack activity. Lack a strong, united leadership
Shadow - May suffer from drop-outs as accounts get larger and conflict with RL more and more. Face many fronts.

What they should be doing:
REF - Look to unite with IRON to provide a strong leadership and widen their influence.
Coalition - They need to re-assess their goals and start working together. Some sort of merger for the active players. A strong leadership is then needed.
Shadow - Continue to keep up the conquers and force players into submission. They need to get more central players into front-line positions to provide more breakthroughs.


What is your favourite part of TW?

My favourite part of tribal wars is the diplomacy between tribes and also the chance to form friendships with your brothers-in-arms. Where else can you enjoy a voice chat with people from Britain, Taiwan, Australia, America and Canada as part of your daily routine?

Who is your favourite forum personality?

Zarin. He continues to put hard work into The Weekly on a weekly basis (funny one, I know). Furthermore he has to put up listening to the ramblings of players like me as I give my opinions on said subjects. We can all learn from him.

Is there a player on W27 that you would like to fight?

There is no-one specific that I would like to fight. I think each player presents you with new problems to overcome. But now you mention it I would enjoy having a one on one fight with either yourself or Mande1992. Purely because I know of both of your skills and think it would be a closely run affair from which I could learn more about the game.

Well, maybe at some point, I wouldn't like to put money on either of those conflicts.

Do you think Shadow deserves to win W27?


Shadow deserve to win W27 the day they do. Of course we do not know what may happen a few months down the line; they may fall apart and be shown their true colours by a resolute offensive from the Scythian Allied Militia - in which case they don't deserve the victory.

If Shadow were to fall, what would you predict for the future of the world?

I will not elaborate into some long and dull prediction, but I suspect the world to last a lot longer than we foresee it to right now. Things would probably be more balanced and hopefully more new players would join.

And, after W27, will you be returning to TW?

I am yet to decide what my future in TW will be. I need to see how things go in RL over the next few months and whether or not this will be my last world. Ask me again when W27 ends.

Thoughts for the Week
A few words on the vicissitudes of the week and TW in general

It’s back to me this week and I present some thoughts on ethos in this game. Firstly, we have to consider what one means by one’s ethos. Strictly speaking, the Ancient Greek word means custom or habit as well the essence of what makes something up. More widely, we have taken it to mean the character or belief system of a person or persons. This is what I shall examine today, our approach to the game in our choices and beliefs; in particular, we look at the ethe surrounding tribes.

So where do we start? Well let us consider the very simple paradigm of this game: it is a battle for supremacy where each player must band together with others for the sake of mutual self-aggrandisement. At heart, each player is part of a tribe because they, correctly, believe that said tribe will provide protection and support to that player and thus it will further the interests of the player. As soon as the tribe can no longer offer the player this service and/or a better tribe comes along which it is feasible to join, this player will leave unless there are other mitigating circumstances; for example, relationships with tribe members. It may seem like an ugly truth, but if you consider for a moment your reasons for joining a tribe, what would they be?

Was it motivated by a fear of destruction from said tribe? If so, you have no intrinsic desire to help the tribe selflessly, you seek merely to work for the purpose of keeping your place within the tribe out of desire for self-preservation. You will do what is asked of you because there exists a caveat of destruction for non-compliance.

Was it motivated by impotence? A player cannot fight beyond their means and thus joining a tribe enables each player to have, at their disposal, a vast array of resources to better enact objectives. In this situation you must persuade tribemates of the benefits of lending resources to your campaign. This is not for the pupose of successful tribal expansion, but to settle old scores or pursue selfish objectives.

Was it motivated by relationships with other players? One might join because one’s friends already are part of said tribe. But are we joining solely because we like these people, or does it comfort us knowing that we have tribemates that we can trust and will work for us? Or are they simply good players that we have befriended along the way whom we expect to bring the tribe glory which we would share in.

Was it motivated by a desire for glory? How often are the top tribe on a server beset by a multitude of invitations from players who want a free ride to glory? All these players have to do is help where they can, and generally suck up to the larger players.

Dark isn’t it? You might think it horrifyingly cynical, but read it again and compare it to your own experiences. Why did you really join your tribe? Why do you need a tribe? Do we, at the end of the day, simply join tribes for our own ends and never look back? Perhaps you are still holding to a belief that you are a good tribemate, that you are prepared to give something back; but does that not represent a rather intrinsic ‘quid pro quo’ situation that is the foundation upon which our enterprises are built?

Hypothesise if you will upon those players in your tribe who are asking for support as we speak. Why are you offering support? Do you really care about their plight, or are you more concerned with the ramifications for the entire tribe? You see, if they should fall, it will not be long before the enemy are at your gates. Indeed, do you offer support simply because you feel obligated under de facto codes of duty, or even simply because you expect such a service in return?

It begs the question of selfless acts for the tribe. There may exist those players in a tribe who seem keen to do anything to help the tribe; consider them if you might. The rewards for them may seem disproportionate to the work put in, but you respect them don’t you? They are held in great esteem among the tribe, they earn the respect of members and they are the ones who are remembered. That is their reward and it is, to them, worth the work that they put in.

Each tribe merely represents an alignment of interests for a group of players who wish to accomplish their own goals more readily through the use of others. Teamwork is enacted, not through a duty to a higher code, but simply on the mandate of avarice. The unfortunate truth of any action is that there is a selfish desire at the root of it. Don’t believe me? Then try doing a selfless act for your tribe; you won’t be able to, I guarantee it.​

Stats

Top Ten Tribes
1 Shadow 56.751.427 65.318.451 63 1.036.801 6667 9.797
2 REF 14.256.781 14.256.781 14 1.018.342 1449 9.839
3 [IRON] 14.143.685 17.574.411 84 209.219 2085 8.429
4 Nstlk* 11.915.902 13.870.277 71 195.356 1594 8.702
5 TK 10.148.444 10.588.762 66 160.436 1270 8.338
6 *TKP* 7.492.369 7.744.981 49 158.061 957 8.093
7 FURY 4.677.342 4.881.718 57 85.644 626 7.798
8 SAM 3.041.834 3.041.834 25 121.673 446 6.820
9 EX 1.879.579 1.879.579 15 125.305 244 7.703
10 SoD 1.741.317 1.873.178 80 23.415 334 5.608

Top Ten Players
1 theSleepwalker REF 2.671.829 260 10276
2 ftw97 Shadow 2.505.885 255 9827
3 Carthon II Shadow 2.436.307 253 9630
4 gerick6 Shadow 2.350.540 231 10175
5 mikestuntz Shadow 2.332.296 230 10140
6 Zarin Shadow 2.201.493 218 10099
7 BrobFellshank Shadow 2.100.718 209 10051
8 Mande1992 Shadow 2.094.770 214 9789
9 filphillip Shadow 2.065.401 216 9562
10 toby7304 Shadow 1.961.142 198 9905

[/spoil]​
 
Last edited by a moderator:

DeletedUser

Guest
W27 Weekly: 06th September

Banner.png


[spoil]Zarin – Editor/Interview

What’s in a name?
You can take the player out of TK, but you can’t take the TK out of the player

It is a line from one of the most famous scenes of Shakespeare and the quotation itself applies here. You’ll see some new names in the stats, some empty areas on the maps and that TK have fallen spectacularly. Unfortunately we must also remember another line from that scene: “That which we call a rose By any other word would smell as sweet.” It is apparent here as this is simply a renaming measure, they are still the same group of players, the same ‘quality’, the same ‘perseverence’, sans the alleged inactives and noobs I suppose.

I talk of course about NOS (and UNI to a lesser extent). For those unaware NOS is merely a reheated version of TK with less players and a few new ones here and there. UNI (formerly EX) is more of a hodgepodge of Nstlk*/Dstlk* refugees and general riff-raff. Shadow has not gained any more enemies here, they have merely been renamed. As for TK, they have dwindled and are struggling to remain in the top ten. As a power, the name of TK has now faded, to be replaced by NOS.

What does this mean for the war? Well NOS and Shadow are in the same situation as TK and Shadow used to be, so no changes there. UNI are too far away to bother Shadow, but are a member of the Coalition as declared by their duke (despite his apparent unwillingness to do so), so they will be added to stats as well.​

Swift as a Shadow
The jaws of Shadow do devour up W27

My impromptu Shakespearian theme continues (kudos to you if you know which play those two quotations are from/based upon) with the news that Shadow, unsurprisingly, continues its domination of the statistics. Without much further ado about anything, we have the stats:​

War stats as of: ~15:00

Side 1:
Tribes: Shadow
Players:

Side 2:
Tribes: Nstlk* [IRON] TK NOS UNI FURY
Players:

Timeframe: Last week

Total conquers:

Side 1: 331
Side 2: 346
Difference: 15

image.php


Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 191
Side 2: 15
Difference: 176

image.php


Points value of total conquers:

Side 1: 3,011,601
Side 2: 2,274,891
Difference: 736,710

image.php


Points value of total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 1,678,231
Side 2: 129,125
Difference: 1,549,106

image.php


Nstlk*

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 89
Side 2: 1
Difference: 88

image.php


[IRON]

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 18
Side 2: 7
Difference: 11

image.php


TK

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 23
Side 2: 1
Difference: 22

image.php


NOS

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 21
Side 2: 0
Difference: 21

image.php


UNI

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 3
Side 2: 2
Difference: 1

image.php


FURY

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 37
Side 2: 4
Difference: 33

image.php


For yet another week running, Shadow dominates in the war stats. Measure for measure, they have defeated their opponents on every front. The once stalwart [IRON] have slipped in recent times and despite a relatively solid showing, they have still fallen behind. The tempest of the Coalition seems to have abated and the merges and manoeuvres thereof have done nothing to prevent Shadow’s domination.

This week’s comedy of errors is Nstlk* who manage just a single conquer yet again whilst suffering grievous losses in return. I suppose that congratulations are in order for lord bilious who took their only village from Shadow (and held it for just over a day). The membership page is a colourful collage with red and yellow abound and it seems that Nstlk* has gone the same way as TK; their top members quietly disassociating themselves with the tribe and moving (to REF) while the rest are left to be nobled in a rather callous war of attrition.

TK and NOS are no better off for whatever business has transpired with new tribes and the like. TK embarrassed NOS this week by actually getting a conquer(!) while NOS, despite their supposed consolidation have failed to gain anything this week. Admittedly, there may be some inaccuracies in the stats, but the clear message is that the labour of TK is lost and that NOS is much ado about nothing.

The Coalition’s bastion of [IRON] have also succumbed to Shadow pressure in the North. Admittedly the stats are by no means severe and there is no reason to suspect that [IRON] are in trouble yet. Indeed, you can see this conflict as you like it really, but clearly [IRON] cannot continue like this. All’s well that ends well for Shadow and with conquers moving in their favour, things could indeed end well here too.

UNI for their part made little impact despite holding an impressive ratio. Unfortunately for them, it is simply too great a deficit to be overturned by their work alone, but they have at least done well to take villages from Shadow; a concept which others are struggling with.

Lastly, we come to FURY. 4 conquers has got to be good compared to the showing elsewhere so congratulations might be in order had they not lost some 37 villages. For such a small tribe it is by no means a poor showing per se, not when compared to their allies at least. And don’t get me wrong, consistency is good, but consistently losing villages is not.

It seems that the midsummer dream of the Coalition is waning as Shadow pressure continues to batter them. Shadow continues relentlessly in its pursuit that is beginning to look more likely by the day as Coalition forces are depleted. Where next for the Coalition? It is a question for their leaders, but they simply cannot continue like this if they hope to defeat or even deny Shadow.​

In Other News…
  • REF and Shadow skirmish again, but still nothing official from either side.​

Interview

Zarin
willettskillz

Why do you call yourself willettskillz?

Well that question has an easy answer. my name is Tom Willett and and i couldn't think of a username. at the time i thought that willettskillz made me sound cool. now i kind of think its a bit noobish but i stuck with it through most worlds

Fair enough, some of us may yet end up doing the reverse and changing our real names to those of our TW ones.

Where did you begin on TW?


as many new players do, i started on many worlds. from 12-20 i player for about 2 months until my time was too spread so i quit most but stuck to 12 and 20 where i lead my own tribes (quite poorly i might add)

So how are these tribes doing/did these tribes do, in the grand scheme of things?

haha well my world 20 tribe fell first after i quit that world a few months later. they were nobled and recruited by a tribe (3DoM if i recall correctly) and then a few of the players i lead in my tribe went on to merge 3DoM and another tribe together to become ranked 3rd in the world (as of about 2 months ago)

my world 12 tribe was made of mostly friends and we all quit in due time except a few who are now morale bashers for the #1 ranked tribe


Well leading a tribe is no mean feat I suppose.

So why then did you come to W27 in particular?


i came to world 27 (after trying to quit TW and failing) for the simple fact that my friends and i wanted to play together on the newest world. unfortunately we were too lazy to read the world's special rules and never ended up uniting under 1 tribe together. most of my friends quit immidietly due to the frustration of the rules but i decided that i wanted to stick it out and see what happened

Indeed, quitting TW is never an easy thing. What did you think of the tribe lock?

the tribe lock was odd and in my opinion very unsuccesful but please allow me to backtrack for 1 moment. my last statement is actually incorrect. i started world 27 under a different name but quit and started under willettskillz in the hopes of joining a friends tribe. i ended up with grimlock-, though so that attempt was not futile. we were not great friends but i like to think that he had a level of respet for me.

but to answer your question. tribe lock was a good idea but never had a chance of working because in TW (as in most other online games) the best and brightest join together. tribe lock made this an annoyance for the best and brightest, thus the mass quitting



Were there any positives to the tribe lock in your opinion?

some positives (for me atleast) was the ability to make friends i high places. i like to think that im an easy person to get along with so i felt no need to make enemies in the beggining. this was (as in Lord of Bones's words) "a way to gather information" later on in the game

Good, nice to see some positives. Do you think that it will be repeated?

i hope not. it was a nice thought but TW is a game of community and a structured society inside a tribe (for most people) so sticking some 'elite' players with 'noobs' ruins the social part of the game for most people. as in real life, clicks are formed through personalities and egos. this means that people need to choose what they think of other people, not be forced to be in a tribe with them

Good answer, it's nice to see some thoughtful opinions on the subject.

So how did your tribe get on for the first 3 months?


well quite sad as most did. after the voting activity died and left only 4 players who posted on the forums. that would be grimlock-, the other duke, (forgot her name) the baron, and myself. i did not request a position of rank as i felt that i would be leading no one. in reality barons were the bottom of the totem pole when only leadership was active. we all quickly left when tribe lock ended

Many tribes went the same way; what did you do on Feb.13?

i woke up, ate breakfast, took a shower...oh, you mean TW wise? well i posted a goodbye letter in the forums (which i assume no one read) and went tribeless for a few weeks

Did you have a plan in mind at all?

not really. not until a friend i had made in the area suggested that we start a tribe for only dominating players on K36

This was SORRY! presumably.

in theory. we underwent a few name changes and ended on SORRY!

What was SORRY! up to whilst the major wars were going on?

if you are reffering to the ATTACK vs.LA-G war and ATTACK vs. Feb.13 war then mostly recruiting and i was combing K36 for some fine baron chooses

As a tribe, do you think that SORRY! alone could have become anything major?

unfortunately no. even as SORRY! and K25PG were seperate tribes we still fought as one. it took a combined strength from both K25PG and SORRY! to take down *epic in the time that i had wanted SORRY! to do it alone. in honesty i believe that SORRY! was a joke to the major powers of the world. shadow (in particular Lord of Bones) enjoyed toying with us.

To many it seemed that the war with *epic was an incredibly one sided affair and yet you suggest that SORRY! might have struggled.

well no, there was no struggle on SORRY!'s side but i knew that SORRY! wasn't going to be a major power by itself unless we had good activity in the war. unfortunately, overall activity was SORRY!'s weak point. if you were to go back and look, i think that K25PG enoblments were a fair but higher than SORRY!'s were.

I suppose I have to ask about the merge, was it simply a sensible move with many other large tribes forming?

the merge between SORRY! and K25PG was influenced, mostly, by shadow. we knew that shadow controlled our area and knew that leaving the possiblities to fight between us would not help our pricarious situation. the leadership of both K25PG and SORRY! were close. our tribes shared most all forums together. we were essentially 1 tribe. in my opinion SORRY! lacked activity and K25PG lacked real solid goals and policies. after our merge i attempted (and like to think succeded) in startening up the tribe. we all got along very well and bonded quickly. the *epic war was mostly a bonding exercise and a way to unify our area under either our flag or shadow's. i realized that this would cause tention between shadow and us but at the time that is what i intended to do.

Why did you call yourselves [IRON]?

well after the merge between K25PG and SORRY! (and i will admit K25PG was the dominate tribe in the merge) together we held K25, K26, K37, and half of K36. obviously, we were no longer a K25 based tribe. we decided (quite easily) on [IRON]; Imperial Republic of the North. we felt that we were going to be a, if not the, dominate tribe in the north so we felt it a fitting name.

What was the plan with [IRON] whilst the Shadow/Nstlk* war was going on?

mostly a large of conversations about joining or not. nstlk* (not meaning to let out any secrets here) were a bit pushy about us helping them. im sure that you saw a letter sent out by them to all other large tribes in the hope to form 1 super tribe of every non shadow member? well, that didn't help them. [IRON] saw them as desperate and we relized they didn't have a chance. we then began to ready for war (although we were not planning on being the declaring side at the time)

Do you regret not helping then?

personally, i do not. they declared the war and allowed themselves to be beaten down. even as allies with them it was not our duty to save them. although i think that if we had the current coalitions support then we would have acted.

Is that not part of what it means to be an ally?

maybe to others but not to me. what i meant to say earlier is that they expected us to jump in without much prior notice. at the beggining of the war i personally contacted a few nstlk* officials for information and such and i was "shrugged off" they didn't seem to want or need help. but once they started to loose i was supposed to ready [IRON] and be able to help them fight the largest entity on W27? thats not what an ally does to another so we decided that it wasn't in our best interests as a tribe to help them. im sure others may disagree but it was not a personal choice of mine (though i would have made it) it was the council's majority's decision.

Let's put the question of regret another way: is there a time at which you think it would have been better to join against ATTACK/Shadow?

of course i do. the beggining of the nstlk* war was probably our best chance. that would have essentially have made the world down to north vs. south and given fairly even lines. but no one could tell the future, we didn't know how nstlk* would fair and to be honest, they kept us out of it. i was intersted in finding ways to help but like i said earlier, i was shrugged off.

Did [IRON] ever consider attacking Nstlk* instead?

in an attempt to gain ground on a falling tribe? no, not really. nstlk* may have ignored me but they never attempted to hurt [IRON]. in an alliance i draw the line at attacking them when their down. its honorless and i know that some say honor is worth nothing in online games, i beg to differ. i had real friends in nstlk* i wasn't about to send [IRON] after them.

That is good at least.

So how did the Coalition come to be?


i don't exactly remember. i had close contact with katmandu (the diplomat of TK) and he seemed to be likeminded to myself. honestly i cannot remember details so i cannot give them to you but i believe it worked out through myself and katmandu contacting other leaders for their opinions on the war.

Can you recall how willing the other leaders were to form the Coalition?

well i myself was not 100% for it at the time that i contacted other leaders. katmandu was for it. the FURY leader was for it but i think that their council as a whole was against it because we had some arguements about it. nstlk* leader, of course, was pushing for it. LA-G was definetly ready to get some revenge but as the war proved, they weren't ready to fight. as you can imagine, our forums were throught with arguements and ideas and it made some things quite a mess

Was there any form of planning between the Coalition in the early days?

only a secret date between 1 representative of each tribe. unfortunately, as we at [IRON] summised, other tribes waited to announce the war even a day or 2 after it started. planning between tribes, like information of coordinated attacks was not shared as the coalition did not trust all of the other tribes that they were siding with in this war.

So, even members of the Coalition did not even trust each other?

some did not. although with that many people is was not sensible to trust everyone. i worked around trust issues by attempting to begin a relationship with the heads of each tribe.

In your opinion, what are the strengths and weaknesses of each side (REF/Coalition/Shadow) at the moment, and what should each be doing?

REF's strenth is its experience in a small amount of players which will work wonders for coordinating a big attack (if they plan on doing one anytime soon) their weakness, i think, lies in their size. they contol little of the map and in my opinion, definetly not enough alone to worry shadow. i think that REF's best option would be too do a little more recruiting in the north (i.e. top [IRON] members and a few of nstlk* leftovers or to create and mantain a strong alliance with [IRON] and then move to a merge. this would (for the most part) unite the north's best players and most likely create a strong, intelligent leadership to lead some of [IRON]'s "noobs".

The Coalition (and yes i will admit it) has become complaciant (for the most part) with losing the war to shadow. in honesty, the Coalition was too large to be motivated for the war and this, i think is the Coalitions biggest weakness apart from inexperienced players and i can attest from personal experience that even though cirrculars were sent and posts were made, many did not know of the war until a few weeks after it had started. i do not know if this upsetting fact falls to the feat of the leader's of each individual tribe or if the members did not bother to read their mails or check the forums but all i know is that when i see a cirrcular that is entitled "WAR" i read it. the Coalition had the strength of numbers but this, as most everbody knows, is not enough to beat shadow. now, the Colaition's only strength seems to be a few players like synister zero and umbada of [IRON] that seem to have a never ending hunger of fighting shadow. in my opinion, the Coaltion's leaders need to come together to plan an op and hit shadow on every border. then defend for a while, while rebuilding troops and planning another. this should be repeated until shadow can find a way to stop it.

Shadow's greatest weakness in my opinion is the fact that they border an enemy on almost every side of the world. in other wars of theirs like ATTACK vs. nstlk* (before the rest of the Coalition joined the war) they had a confined border and the rest of the tribe stacked their frontline with a seemingly never ending supply of troops. now, that is not so easy (though is still be done from the south to a certain extent). shadow's biggest advantage is their strong leadership and great sense of pride in their tribe. ask anyone in shadow and im sure that they have little bad to say about ephette or mande and their leadership skills. Lord of Bones, i think, is a great example of a prideful shadow member. his never ending confidence in shadow frustrates many of us rooting for the Coalition. shadow, should continue on as they are. i see nothing else that they could better do in this war, or at all in the world for that matter. they are a well oiled war machine.


So how do you think that the Coalition is doing at the moment?

i would say quite poorly. it was aparent to me that some tribes would not be able to hold their ground but TK and [IRON] were my greatest hopes. TK, aparently, have fallen flat on their faces. [IRON], on the other hand seems to be doing the best (and i am proud of it) but recently have had some set backs (mostly pertaining to me quitting and being nobled by Lord of Bones). all in all, im not happy with the coalition thus far.

What, in your opinion, should be done/should have been done with regards to the Coalition?

thats a hard one...well i guess obviously the coalition should have been formed earlier. at this time i don't have much to say on what should or shouldn't be done except maybe the coalition should pursue a head commander of the coalition and start to formulate a plan to get TK ready for a longer fight because at the moment, they won't last long.

Do you still think that there is a chance for a counter offensive?

of course there is. with the right leadership, direction, and planning shadow could be taking a huge hit within days. but as many have said, leadership, direction, and planning are a short coming in the coalition as a whole.

Do you think that the Coalition will sort things out before it is too late?

the coalition as a whole, no. i think that [IRON] and REF are the most likely to last through more than 6 months.

Indeed, what are your thoughts on REF?

REF is a good strong tribe but their position and timing in this world cannot benefit themselves. in my opinion they can not win the world, they shouldn't side with the coalition, and they shouldn't NAP with shadow. they should fight everyone and just have fun.

And after that, what do you see for the future of the world?

more shadow dominance. maybe a few shadow members getting bored and creating a tribe to run rampants for fun before they leave. nothing too special. the world is coming to a close.

Do you think Shadow deserves to win W27?

i think that many members of [IRON] and the Coalition would have thought that i would answer this question differntly but i cannot. i will be completely honest when i say, shadow deserves to win this world if the coalition doesn't start fighting back on a higher level. though many will say that not enough serious challeneges were presented and defeated for them to win W27, i say, is that really their fault? is it their fault that the coalition was not formed earlier? is it their fault that tribal hugs ran ramapnt on W27? i don't think so.

What is your favourite part of TW?

my favorite part of TW is certainly the sociality of the game. i find it interesting in seeing many people of different backgrounds and areas bonding over a game. sometimes i feal like i can trust my TW friends more than my friends in RL as they usually do not have other motives as many people that i know in RL do.

Who is your favourite forum personality?

my favorite forum personality is truely macano1. he has a lightened tone to his writings but knows how to show eloquence when he wants to. he writes in an understandable context and usually has only intelligent things to say.

Is there a player on W27 that you would like to fight?

until about 1 week ago, my answer would have been "nobody in particular comes to mind" but now i must say Lord of Bones. it was unfortunate that i had a sitter at the time of his op on me but i would like to think that if i was on i would have defended myself a fair bit better than was done. he holds (if i am correct) 12 of my old villages. this kind of leaves me with a sour taste in my mouth as i walk away from TW. sort of like unfinished bussiness. but, Lord of Bones still holds my respect.

So will you be returning to Tribal Wars?

unfortunately i hope not but its not the first time that i have tried to quit. it will most likely fail and be back next summer.

Quitting cold turkey is very difficult as many will attest to. If you should never return, what would you say that you have gained from TW?

oh definetly. TW was an escape from real life and i found many great friends here. if i do not return i will definetly keep in touch with many of them through other means

I think that's everything; thank you for your time. Good luck with things.

well i must say it was a pleasant suprise to be recognized in the weekly. thank you very much.

Thoughts for the Week
A few words on the vicissitudes of the week and TW in general

This week’s thought will be a little more optimistic than the previous one. We shall examine a rather interesting question in the form of: what do we gain from playing Tribal Wars? After all, we can spend excessive amounts of time and money playing this game, have we not considered the gains from TW?

How many of us have been confronted with the question of the point of this game, either from ourselves or from another person. We can find ourselves questioning the output of TW in relation to our input and whether it was worth it. Some of us have been here for quite some time, but I wonder for how many this is motivated by a perceived value in the game and for how many the question has simply been ignored.

I expect many of you will run first to the intrinsic alibi for the gaming industry when this question is bandied about and that is of course the fact that this games entertains us. We gain something to amuse ourselves with and its immersive qualities and depth give us something to while away our time; an opiate if you will. Admittedly you may wish to examine that in two ways, you may feel that it is a good use of your time, an escape, a distraction, perhaps it is the stalwart cornerstone of your day. On the other hand, you may feel that it is addictive and a pointless waste of time that you should probably have quit months ago. And maybe it’s both. In the end we have gained the opportunity to immerse ourselves within a game for our enjoyment and enjoyment is a key bounty of playing this game.

But, that is not perhaps the most interesting part to think about. Indeed there are hundreds of other ways to while away time and many of them will probably produce money instead of haemorrhaging it. Thus, we must think of the other ways in which TW has impacted us and what the gains have been. For this, I shall use my own examples when I asked myself the very same question and the reasons that have been added in its wake.

I suppose we begin with the most endemic reason of its value in keeping us entertained and endowing vague purpose to our days. In an uncertain world, TW can all too easily become the bedrock of daily regime. How many of us set aside TW time in the morning? How many of us have a specific time slot for it? We like routine really and TW gives us just that; heck it might even be the main reason for oneself getting up in the morning. But it’s not the modern grindstone of jobs, but the casual custodian against boredom. Indeed, what else would you do in those short breaks? It’s a time consumer, but in an intriguing fashion. For many it is our means of escape, time set aside not to be fettered by the stresses of life. In the most basic sense, TW is an opiate.

So we have escapism and integrity in this game; enjoyment too. But what else do we get from it, a lot of other activities could offer those. I have played many MMORPG style games in my time and few, if any, demand such strong relationships between players and unintentionally encourage so much social interaction among players, particularly externally, away from the game. The mandate of the game is the creation of tribes and the ethos is concerned with one’s role within a tribe for its aggrandisement. In order to do that, we have to work hard with other players, and through this drive toward compassion, we develop strong bonds with our tribemates. In turn, we gain a lot of friends from this game; how many tribes have external chat rooms and organise other interests outside of the tribe? Everything from general advice on anything to teams for other video games can be found within the people you meet.

Maybe, it’s something to do with the constant nature of the game, your account is always active and every player is sent through a constant and intensive experience in which there will be times when we need tribemates to help us through. Because we cannot simply sign out of our account until the next weekend, each player is demanded to have a decent level of watch on their account every day and this means that as the game becomes routine, tribemates become part of it too. There will always be others around and this sort of community spirit is an excellent catalyst for relationships. Ok, so you will probably never meet these people, but you’ll probably see them everyday, you’re there come the highs and lows and sometimes, oddly, we feel that, in some ways, we know the people we meet on TW better than those we know in real life. In much the same way as mutual trauma bonds people, so too do the intensive demands of this game bond us and that is very unique to TW. In short, we gain a group of excellent and like-minded friends away from any degree of social constraint to have a good time with.

Moreover, Tribal Wars is a strategy game and within that, it is based in a combat mechanic which is reasonably predictable. Thus, it demands strategic thinking and is rigorous its demand for logical and accurate calculation. You will find that many players who possess an affinity at this game are good at other logical and strategic games and it can improve those sorts of skills. It’s the same reason why you might have been encouraged to play chess as these skills are cognitive development. On top of that, there is also a stipulation for good people skills with regards to working in tribes and this is again something that will be developed during your time on TW.

So what else can we gain? Well, I have a few very trivial things, and ones which may not be wholly unique to TW, but ones which I have gained from this game. For example, being confronted by scripts for many months will eventually give you some greater understanding than you did have about computing and can encourage an interest in it. This game has taught me a bit about JavaScript and plenty about ‘Excel’. Indeed, even being confronted by a computer every day will increase proficiency with it (improvements in typing ability for example) and TW presents a fun way to learn. I also know of those who play/have played worlds in other languages in order to help there understanding of those languages so TW can be good for your education. Within that, TW is a way of keeping the brain active, particularly when in combat situations and doing the temporal calculations in one’s head is good practise too.

I have perhaps only scratched the surface, but it is something to think about the next time the question comes around. The spectral question of whether your time could have been better spent is a far more difficult one and is a very vague and subjective idea; it depends on what matters most to you. Perhaps though, that’s irrelevant; does it really matter what we gain from TW if we are here primarily to have fun?​

Stats

Top Ten Tribes
1 Shadow 59.311.679 67.322.603 63 1.068.613 6849 9.830
2 REF 15.143.435 15.143.435 16 946.465 1545 9.802
3 [IRON] 14.988.865 19.277.961 90 214.200 2268 8.500
4 Nstlk* 9.784.662 10.452.413 60 174.207 1208 8.653
5 *TKP* 8.009.977 8.269.071 49 168.757 1026 8.060
6 NOS 7.093.711 7.157.593 48 149.117 882 8.115
7 FURY 4.352.965 4.415.854 47 93.954 555 7.956
8 SAM 3.500.208 3.500.208 32 109.382 508 6.890
9 UNI 2.720.192 2.720.192 23 118.269 360 7.556
10 TK 1.921.129 1.921.129 9 213.459 219 8.772

Top Ten Players
1 theSleepwalker REF 2.653.189 263 10088
2 ftw97 Shadow 2.600.905 265 9815
3 Carthon II Shadow 2.556.017 266 9609
4 gerick6 Shadow 2.468.056 243 10157
5 mikestuntz Shadow 2.463.467 242 10180
6 Zarin Shadow 2.283.839 226 10105
7 BrobFellshank Shadow 2.227.255 222 10033
8 Mande1992 Shadow 2.163.143 221 9788
9 filphillip Shadow 2.108.754 219 9629
10 toby7304 Shadow 2.062.534 208 9916

[/spoil]​
 
Last edited by a moderator:

DeletedUser

Guest
W27 Weekly: 13th September

Banner.png


[spoil]Zarin – Editor/Interview

Machina Ex Deo
Shadow dominates stats as Coalition struggles

War stats as of: ~15:30

Side 1:
Tribes: Shadow
Players:

Side 2:
Tribes: Nstlk* [IRON] TK NOS FURY UNI
Players:

Timeframe: Last week

Total conquers:

Side 1: 278
Side 2: 313
Difference: 35

image.php


Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 149
Side 2: 8
Difference: 141

image.php


Points value of total conquers:

Side 1: 2,492,988
Side 2: 1,820,710
Difference: 672,278

image.php


Points value of total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 1,317,179
Side 2: 64,163
Difference: 1,253,016

image.php


Nstlk*

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 60
Side 2: 0
Difference: 60

image.php


[IRON]

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 17
Side 2: 5
Difference: 12

image.php


TK

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 4
Side 2: 0
Difference: 4

image.php


NOS

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 24
Side 2: 1
Difference: 23

image.php


UNI

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 8
Side 2: 0
Difference: 8

image.php


FURY

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 36
Side 2: 2
Difference: 34

image.php


What do you want me to say? That there is hope for the Coalition, that this is simply a blip, a transient glitch? That there remains feasible opposition to the dominion of Shadow? I am not sure whether I can. Week after week, Shadow decisively out-nobles its opponents without faltering. Is this it, is this all the Coalition has to offer? What do we see when we look down the stats?

Nstlk* are shamed by failing to conquer even a single enemy village; not one. The days of an even war fought just by Nstlk* seem long ago indeed. The only positive that one could conceivably draw here is that they didn’t lose more than 60 villages - that’s all.

TK, NOS, and UNI all had quintessential weeks. Fewer conquers may have been conceded than Nstlk*, but they fared little better on the offensive with just one between them. One wonders where all of their new villages are coming from, but we do perhaps know the answer: internal and barbarian conquers. It is no way to conduct a war and will cost them.

FURY fared relatively better on the offensive, but that was not difficult I would suppose; making twice as many conquers as Nstlk*, TK, NOS and UNI combined. However, they suffered larger losses than most of their counterparts and they have failed to make up for their own failures, let alone those of their allies.

[IRON] performed best out of the Coalition, though they fall significantly short of Shadow again this week, reflecting an ostensible change in initiative between the two sides which will no doubt come as a crushing blow to hopes for the prophecy if it continues.

What is there to say about Shadow? This author sees telling superiority on all fronts and a distinct lack of initiative from their opponents. This could lead to the spectre of complacency and underestimation which would prove detrimental if the Coalition decided to act coherently, but that seems to be far from their agenda. It will take divine intervention indeed to stop them at this rate and I am not Euripides when it comes to that sort of thing.​

In Other News…
  • You may be thinking: what about REF? Well, REF and Shadow are at it again, and it’s looking a little more interesting this week:

    Side 1:
    Tribes: Shadow
    Players:

    Side 2:
    Tribes: REF
    Players:

    Timeframe: Last week

    Total conquers:

    Side 1: 277
    Side 2: 26
    Difference: 251

    image.php


    Total conquers against opposite side:

    Side 1: 20
    Side 2: 8
    Difference: 12

    image.php


    Points value of total conquers:

    Side 1: 2,482,827
    Side 2: 219,341
    Difference: 2,263,486

    image.php


    Points value of total conquers against opposite side:

    Side 1: 188,779
    Side 2: 71,278
    Difference: 117,501

    image.php


    Make of this what you will, but nobody can deny that REF have been quiet this past week.

    In Other News...
    • Carthon II takes the top spot this week, congratulations to him on some excellent work.​

    Thoughts for the Week
    A few words on the vicissitudes of the week and TW in general

    This week we look at perhaps the most important aspect of TW and that is our tribemates, why they are and what they are. One of the best things about this game (probably) is the communities that you meet and come to know over time. Often you will spend months working alongside these people, forming close and enduring friendships that can extend beyond the game. Thrust into an often uncompromising environment, we must take it upon ourselves to help and trust others.

    Many people have commended the social aspect of the game above all else, and this seems a very endemic view on the game. For many of us, it is our tribemates (and opponents) who make the game what it is and the reason we are still playing. I did say that we only play for ourselves, but it is our tribemates who give the game its soul, the ineffable spice that places this just that little bit further beyond just a game in so many cases.

    How many tribes do you know with external areas? How many have chatrooms? How many of you have met people in real life that you know from this game? I know people who have fallen in love through their time together within this game: that is the potential for our interaction with those around us. But it doesn’t have to be anything quite so grand. The fundamental machinations of the game inspire an astounding and enduring community spirit that can turn tribes into a family. There have no doubt been times when real life issues have become entwined in TW and is testament to the virtue of those communities that no longer do our tribemates become purely for the purpose of the game, but there for us as people as well.

    So why is it that Tribal Wars is such a catalyst for good relationships? Well, as I mentioned last week, I would posit it that this is down to the imperative for trust between players and for the intrinsic ethos of working as a team. We are bound by common goals and common opponents, bonded within a harsh environment and it is only through hard work together that a tribe will prevail. That is why players stick together, because they have given themselves to something that much greater than themselves together and that mutual trust and mutual experience is a powerful thing indeed.

    Perhaps it is that meagre realisation of one’s own inferiority when compared to a tribe that first encourages us to join, but over time is that what holds us there? We may all join for similar reasons, but when we are thrust into working with people we have never met to ensure our very survival, that is when these relationships are forged. That mutual reliance is special indeed, and difficult to create in real life without extreme situations.

    And inevitably, there will be times when we must rely more on that community than it does on us. It is those times that we are shown the true depth of the ineffable volumes of friendship among our tribe. And inevitably there are times when real life events do impinge on the game. It is perhaps in those times that you are taught the true understanding of what it means to work as part of team, to trust others, to rely upon them and to be relied upon.

    And sometimes, it is along the road in a game like this that, among the rocky vicissitudes of the game, the rough machinations of attack and defence, of bureaucracy and management, that you will find the precious gems in the people you meet. Because, that’s what really matters: not the villages; not the points; not even the winning and losing; but the people you play with, the soul of your experience. In ten years time, you won’t care whether you got nobled out, or pulled together and won the game, but you will care about the friends you still keep and the lessons that you learned. That’s what this game is about in so many ways: the experience and the players; neither the feeble accolades of points and ranks nor the ignominy of defeat.

    Take a look around you, see how many people you know, how many friends you have made and how many good times you have had together, as well as how many bad. Think about what they’ve taught you along the way and what is really responsible for your enjoyment of the game. That’s all it is, just a game; but the people around you are very real indeed. Don’t take them for granted, because they’re the greatest thing you can take from this game.​

    Stats

    Top Ten Tribes
    1 Shadow 61.495.532 69.451.996 62 1.120.193 7063 9.833
    2 [IRON] 15.484.792 19.343.771 86 224.928 2276 8.499
    3 REF 15.197.329 15.197.329 16 949.833 1547 9.824
    4 Nstlk* 9.192.845 9.503.935 54 175.999 1108 8.578
    5 *TKP* 8.444.452 8.547.160 44 194.254 1048 8.156
    6 NOS 7.479.015 7.627.562 53 143.916 942 8.097
    7 SAM 4.226.804 4.226.804 33 128.085 611 6.918
    8 FURY 4.223.551 4.247.323 45 94.385 533 7.969
    9 UNI 3.397.389 3.397.389 28 121.335 448 7.583
    10 SoD 2.064.674 2.181.380 66 33.051 345 6.323

    Top Ten Players
    1 Carthon II Shadow 2.670.957 279 9573
    2 theSleepwalker REF 2.659.363 264 10073
    3 ftw97 Shadow 2.634.623 268 9831
    4 mikestuntz Shadow 2.563.197 252 10171
    5 gerick6 Shadow 2.529.497 248 10200
    6 Zarin Shadow 2.396.755 237 10113
    7 BrobFellshank Shadow 2.347.337 233 10074
    8 Mande1992 Shadow 2.225.286 228 9760
    9 toby7304 Shadow 2.198.111 222 9901
    10 filphillip Shadow 2.123.592 219 9697

    My sincerest apologies for the lack of interview, but my time has been constrained this last week and thus I could not facilitate it. However, I shall endeavour to make up for it, with not just one, but two great interviews next week!​

    [/spoil]
 
Last edited by a moderator:

DeletedUser

Guest
W27 Weekly: 20th September

Banner.png


[spoil]Zarin – Editor/Interview

Coalition Contrive to Counter Conquers
Too little too late from the Coalition?

War stats as of: ~17:00

Side 1:
Tribes: Shadow
Players:

Side 2:
Tribes: Nstlk* [IRON] NOS TK UNI FURY
Players:

Timeframe: Last week

Total conquers:

Side 1: 314
Side 2: 322
Difference: 8

image.php


Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 129
Side 2: 33
Difference: 96

image.php


Points value of total conquers:

Side 1: 2,900,755
Side 2: 2,052,273
Difference: 848,482

image.php


Points value of total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 1,177,081
Side 2: 314,310
Difference: 862,771

image.php


Nstlk*

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 26
Side 2: 0
Difference: 26

image.php


[IRON]

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 34
Side 2: 33
Difference: 1

image.php


TK

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 5
Side 2: 0
Difference: 5

image.php


NOS

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 28
Side 2: 0
Difference: 28

image.php


UNI

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 5
Side 2: 0
Difference: 5

image.php


FURY

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 31
Side 2: 0
Difference: 31

image.php


This week has certainly been an interesting one for the war. The immediate things that spring to mind are of course the resilience of [IRON] and the general lack of Shadow conquers against the Coalition. But, before you can start using words like Stalingrad, let’s actually have a look at what has been going on.

So, an ostensible parity in [IRON] and Shadow conquers; yup I didn’t expect it either (elderly readers should take this slowly, it is startling reading).What’s perhaps more astounding is that many of these conquers actually came from active players and were retained! I know, I know, you are looking on TWStats, I recall a certain Livy quotation for this moment – “In war the outcome corresponds less to expectations than any other case whatsoever.” Disingenuousness aside, [IRON] has made a concerted effort this week to actually attack Shadow and it has paid dividends and one is reminded of what may well be referred to as the good old days when [IRON] pulled the Coalition’s weight.

Unfortunately, before we hail a new era in the conflict we must remember a few things. Firstly, Shadow still edged out [IRON] in conquers, which not only nullifies their effect, but actually means that [IRON] still lose this week. Secondly, we shall also remember that some of these conquers, on both sides, were retakes and thus the stats display a more significant conflict than the one happening. Thirdly, this situation is likely to mean one thing: less complacency from Shadow and more resources to that front which will no doubt result in [IRON] suffering the brunt of Shadow’s attacks. Finally, no other member of the Coalition got any conquers, so parity means that Shadow can simply consolidate in other areas.

Let’s not detract totally from this, but the Coalition might as well be renamed [IRON] + useless friends. [IRON] may even wish to leave in order to make some better stats for themselves. If this was the axe of destruction or whatever balderdash they were threatening, it hasn’t worked. I suppose, all in all, it’s at least a worthy effort from [IRON], so well tried to you.

Elsewhere, what can I say? Nothing, not one conquer was made against Shadow. It’s not just worrying, it’s shameful. [IRON] can’t bail you out at this rate and Shadow is not going to let up. It may be a little early to condemn the Coalition as over, but certain constituents do not seem to be contributing.​

The Flower and the Phoenix
Shadow and REF finally get an article

REF seem to have been largely left out of the war with Shadow and as a consequence, the news itself. Often it has been the case that the sentiment of ‘what about REF?’ springs to mind when writing the news, but they have been rather quiet. Official words about war have been non-existent from either side, but one would assume that it is safe to at least aver that they are fighting as the stats demonstrate:​

Side 1:
Tribes: Shadow
Players:

Side 2:
Tribes: REF
Players:

Timeframe: Last week

Total conquers:

Side 1: 308
Side 2: 49
Difference: 259

image.php


Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 64
Side 2: 3
Difference: 61

image.php


Points value of total conquers:

Side 1: 2,848,626
Side 2: 389,235
Difference: 2,459,391

image.php


Points value of total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 609,979
Side 2: 26,284
Difference: 583,695

image.php


Well, it certainly will not make for auspicious reading for the Coalition. Certainly in view of the current state of affairs in REF, it is not looking good at all following the exits of prominent players and some inactivity, always a tough blow with such a small tribe.

We can also see where the rest of Shadow’s conquers went and this does seem to demonstrate a shift in focus with REF now also part of the Shadow agenda. Is it too early to even start to write off REF? Well, non-Shadow players must be hoping so and this author would reason that it is. Fortunately for Shadow, what seemed to be a tough obstacle has been thoroughly dashed this week and it will surely reinforce hopes of victory for them.​

In Other News…

  • ftw97 returns to the top, and looks to be building a lead, whilst theSleepwalker continues to sleep for the moment.​


  • There are whisperings of *TKP* being involved in a war, or about to be.

  • The W27 community forms an impromptu skype chat. All are welcome! Relevant thread is here.

Interview

Zarin
Carthon II

Well, we begin with an interesting question in your name; why are you called Carthon II and who was Carthon I?

Carthon was the name I had played under in Travian, with some success, so I wanted to keep it. Carthon was already claimed, so I used my imagination and came up with Carthon II. I do not know the original Carthon.

Where did your TW story start? How did that go?

W27 is my first world. I had heard about the game from a friend and decided to give it a try. I happened into W27 because it was the next world opening. So far, the adventure has been great.

What did you think of the tribe lock?

I believe tribelock was an enormous stroke of luck for me, it provided me time to learn the game. As the tribes were all spread out, it also forced players to be independent. My early tribemates were helpful in teaching me the finer points of the game and directing me to some of the terrific guides that are out there. That being said, I do believe the Tribe lock was too long and tribes should have been grouped closer together.

What was your first tribe like?

Like most tribes, it was full of inactivity and complainers. It did, however, posses a core of active, helpful players and leaders who tried their best! In fact, my original tribe, LITE, is still around; It is now known as TKP.

Do you think that the tribe lock will ever be repeated? How could it be improved?

I really do not know. I would applaud any effort to improve the game, even if the results didn't live up to expectations. In my opinion, a shorter tribe lock and one where locked tribes were closer to eachother would be a definite improvement. The W27 tribe lock didn't force tribes to form, it rather forced players to be more independent.

How did you come to join ATTACK?

The best and most experienced player in my original tribe was Ojibweman, and it is to him I owe most of my accomplishments on this world. Not only did he take me under his wing and teach me a lot about how to play TW, he also introduced me to Ephette, duchess of Attack. I had many a conversation with Ephette about the tribe she was trying to build and the way to play the game. Needless to say, I was impressed and my joining ATTACK was a fait accompli a month before tribe lock was lifted.

How did the LA-G/ATTACK war go for you?

It was almost over before it started. Myself & a few more new tribemates were busy with an operation on Zeee81 and were a couple days behind in launching on LA-G. By the time I was moving on LA-G, they disintegrated.

Did you expect more from LA-G during the war?

Definitely. Although this was my first world, I had seen much more from individual players. I was amazed by the number of players who abandoned their tribe at the first sight of trouble or quit the world at the first bump in the road.

How did the Feb.13/ATTACK war go for you?

I was about as far away from Feb.13 as any player in the Tribe. It provided great training for long distance noblings that are now the standard in these world-wide wars. Starting in K65, I have made progressive leaps all over the map. While not a stratagy, it has certainly led itself to my advantage when the Coaliton formed & declared.

Do you think that they had a chance of winning?

Absolutely. While I never believed Attack was at risk to lose the war, Feb.13 vs. Attack was a battle akin to two heavyweights standing toe to toe and slugging it out. Ultimately, I believe leadership and resolve were the deciding factor in Attack's favor.

And finally, the war with Nstlk*; how was that for you?

Once again, I was largely insulated away from the front lines in this war. I was able to send support to tribemates and participate in long distance operations. I have taken 30+ villages from Nstlk*, they are but a shell of the Tribe that declared on Attack. The heart of Nstlk* has left this world or resides in REF.

If ~AOW~ had joined Nstlk* instead, do you think that the war would have gone the other way?

It would certainly be a different world & it might have swung the pendulum the other way. My world would have been turned upside down. My insulated world would have been transformed to the front lines. Mande92 & other AOW members had villages intermingled with mine in K64. It would have been quite the fight. My defense would not have been available for my tribemates. In all probability, it would have switched the roles of Nstlk* & Shadow in terms of size & prominence. Had the AOW members influenced and improved Nstlk* as they did to Attack, I would probably be part of a Coalition. Thankfully, AOW joined with Attack and made us whole!

How was albrew as a leader?

With Albrew5 it was the good, the bad, & the ugly as a leader. On one regard, he was exactly what a young attack needed. He was a Warrior, active, aggressive, skilled, and willing to lead and teach. In my opinion, he deserves a lot of the credit, with Lord of Bones, in transforming Attack from a good tribe into a War Machine. Others have since assumed that mantle and continue what those players started. The Bad, with Albrew5, was some of his political/diplomatic tactics. Extremely opinionated and forceful, he often caused more problems than he solved. His unwillingness to compromise and infighting pushed Attack to the brink of disolution at times. The Ugly, was how he left. He was in law school and studying for his exams when he left. We all know how RL often pulls us away, but to abandon his tribe as Nstlk* declared and just deleting his account was self-serving. He deserved a better legacy. (My opinion, this may rankle a few).

What are your thoughts on the Coalition?

Right idea, awful timing. They are carrying too much dead weight to be a cohesive fighting force. Unless something unforseen happens, I think it is a case of too little too late for the coalition as it is currently constituted.

How is the war against the Coalition going for you?

Great. After months & months of wars multiple Ks away, I finally had some close targets. I've captured 60 or so villages. It can be a little difficult staying organized, but it is a target rich environment.

What are your thoughts on REF?

Nice concept and I have a lot of respect for a number of their players, but it is basically Nstlk* REFormed. I haven't looked that close, but I don't think there is a player in REF who wasn't already listed as an enemy at some point.

What do you see in store for a) Yourself b) Shadow c) the rest of the world?

a) I am going to do what got me to this point, keep plugging along. TW is still a happy diversion for me
b) As long as the leadership stay in place, Shadow will continue it's march to conquer the world. It's only goal from Day 1!
c)At the end of the day, TW is but a game. Everyone needs to find there own joy in the game. For some it may be a valiant, yet futile struggle, against a monolithic opponent. For others it may be to form the best tribe possible or a small localized war. Other still may just strize to learn the game. Whatever your goals, I hope everyone rembers to have some fun.


In your opinion, what are the strengths and weaknesses of each side, and what should they do to win?

SHADOW- Has size, coordination and experience in their favor. Their achilles heel is the small number of members. The natural attrition that all tribes face has a greater impact on Shadow than any other tribe. Morale penalties are also a minor issue!

Coalition- More players, cheaper nobles could enable to grow quicker than Shadow. Less affected by attrition or war losses. As for disadvantages, they are all spread out, it takes maassive coordination to plan an operation. Fewer large players. Inexperience.


How did you come to be so highly ranked?

Good Activity early. Good advice & mentor in the form of Ojibweman. I had a quick start on this world and pressed my advantage, developed some nice PA's with whom I worked well and when I joined Attack it only magnified these advantages. Finally, it would be consistency. I keep doing the same things that have made me successful.

You briefly overtook ftw97, do you see any chance of that happening in the future?

That would depend more on ftw97. I overtook him because he slowed down. My progress is a steady one and generally maintains the same rate. If players slow or falter I have passed them by. ftw97 is a superior player and deserves to be the #1 rank. Despite my profile, I am not that caught up in the point totals. If I were, my village build would be much higher. I want villages, full of troops and conquers for my tribe. I'm sure ftw97 would agree, the ranking is just icing on the cake!

Why do you think that Shadow has reached such a prominent position in the world?

Outstanding leadership and resolve. A large portion of the leadership in our tribe comes from the rank and file members. It is a great group all pulling in the same direction. There are many a selfless player who do what needs doing without being asked. Couple that with fair, dedicated leaders and success will follow.

What’s your greatest regret on W27?

So many good players have abandoned the world

What is your favourite part of TW?

The diversion it provides from RL. The escapism.

Who is your favourite forum personality?

If I had to choose one it would be a toss up between Macca, I appreciate his even handed view, or that Zarin fellow. He's a bit long-winded at times, but who doesn't love a pleasant breeze. Anyone who can channel Shakespeare while writing a weekly about a fantasy world deserves some sort of award!

Is there a player on W27 that you would like to fight?

I'd love to have an opponent close who was approximately my size. Other than that, I 'll take the opponents as they come. On a selfish note, I wouldn't mind attacking some of the knucklheads on the public forums, irrespective of tribe. (And no, I won't say who.)

If Shadow wins the war, do you think that the world will be over?

If the war ends with a defeated coalition, rather than it just scattering to reform, the world would be over in my opinion.

Do you think Shadow deserves to win W27?

I believe that any tribe that could eliminate any legitimate opposition in the entire world deserves to win the world. If Shadow can accomplish that, then I believe we deserve to "win". I also believe that everyone has to find their own "victory" in TW. For many, that may not include being in the last tribe standing. If Shadow wins the world, it doesn't mean everyone not in shadow has lost.

What will you do after this world is done; will Carthon II be returning to Tribal Wars?

I think the road stretches on for a while yet, but when W27 ends, I will probably take a break, but I do envision myself returning to TW time & again.

Thoughts for the Week
A few words on the vicissitudes of the week and TW in general

Where do we go this week? Well, following a rather interesting discussion on the subject within the game, I have decided this week, to compose my thoughts on the verisimilitudes of fate. More specifically, what effect the smallest examples of chance can do.

Well, luck was certainly important on this world; we had no choice about how things fell in the early days and this ultimately our fate for the rest of the world. Some of you may have ended up in nice areas, whereas others were stuck in competitive zones, or rubbish tribes. Could we have changed this? Well, it all depends on when we joined the world as to where we were placed, and is thus not something that we can influence even if we wanted to. Would waiting a minute longer have improved our chances? Well, we can throw these types of questions around all day, but that’s life I suppose if you ended up in an area which was not conducive to your growth.

So what about after that? Well, in those first weeks as you try to rapidly grow, it is always a tentative time of mutual fear between players. You can do everything right and still be caught out, so take heart if you were. So what was it that made your neighbour decide to go for you and happen to catch your army in the village? Perhaps they dared to do it and attack a larger player, and they just happened to be in the right place at the right time, or they knew through various means, information about you which led to your demise. Can it be avoided? Well, that’s almost a void question when it comes to that, you could have sent your troops out to land exactly when you next check in so that you won’t lose them; you could have attacked the other player first, but does one dare to do such a thing?

So can we always be undone by the capricious whims of TW, whatever we do? Let’s go back to that situation early on. You have built an early offensive force for raiding and farming ad looking for your first conquer. You are heading offline, so you set an alarm for a time when your troops arrive back, to be ready for them and send them back out, a turnaround time of <5 seconds. This is a faultless game, there’s nothing wrong here; it could not be played any better, not sending the troops out falls to the same problem. So what if an enemy sends a nuke to land a second after your troops return by total fluke? One cannot shift troops out again that fast and even through faultless play we have been undone by the actions of another. It’s disappointing, but sadly unavoidable.

So whose fault is it? Well it certainly wasn’t yours; there was nothing you could do. Was it the fault of the aggressor? Well, they had no idea what they were doing. So, it’s just one of those moments when chance conspires against you? Well, not really. If we consider why the attack was sent at that time it is simply the result of that player’s geographical location and the various demands of their environment which meant that they sent the attack at that time. Their decision to attack you was no doubt based on a myriad of factors, but it was not random. Each decision made is the result of a serious of cognitive processes.

But does that alter the fact that you couldn’t change it? Of course not; you were just in the wrong place at the wrong time. Admittedly you may have been a tempting target for some reason, but such a thing is based off of the assumptions of the attacker. However hard you tried, you couldn’t change it. So where else does this happen? Well probably the most fundamental aspect of the combat game is the luck mechanic. This was designed to make the game less predictable with regards to the very set nature of the combat. Without an incredibly complex analysis of exactly how this is calculated, there’s nothing you can do and it’s yet another aspect of those things that we can’t change. Loyalty reductions on nobles fall into exactly the same category.

So this raises the main issue here. The grand question of ‘what if?’. How often have we wondered about the alternatives to the results and how they might affect us, how that extra luck, or extra loyalty percentages might have completely changed the game. What if we had started across the other side of the world, would you be playing now? Would you have met different people? Formed different relationships? Had different experiences? Not overslept because you had that alarm in the middle of the night?

When you consider it, how different could your life had been if you had spent just a few more moments in bed before you decided to enlist in this world, if you had waited a touch longer? Is that the beauty of life or the innumerate fathoms of chance? For how long can we wonder about how different things could have been?

I think what might really get you, is if you think about the major changes which TW has wrought, how different could life be on the whims on the smallest of choices? Have the smallest ‘random’ acts of TW changed your life? Have the decisions of others sent you in entirely new directions?​

Stats

Top Ten Tribes
1 Shadow 63.774.710 71.474.268 61 1.171.709 7272 9.829
2 [IRON] 16.849.151 21.071.717 84 250.854 2442 8.629
3 REF 12.594.053 12.594.053 14 899.575 1282 9.824
4 Nstlk* 8.994.510 9.130.727 50 182.615 1055 8.655
5 *TKP* 8.736.834 8.880.874 45 197.353 1091 8.140
6 NOS 7.390.392 7.531.009 53 142.095 923 8.159
7 SAM 4.499.454 4.499.454 32 140.608 651 6.912
8 FURY 4.136.302 4.141.532 42 98.608 522 7.934
9 UNI 3.143.467 3.143.467 24 130.978 415 7.575
10 Trade 2.468.980 2.468.980 10 246.898 292 8.455

Top Ten Players
1 ftw97 Shadow 2.841.275 289 9831
2 Carthon II Shadow 2.742.796 287 9557
3 gerick6 Shadow 2.704.923 265 10207
4 mikestuntz Shadow 2.668.744 262 10186
5 theSleepwalker REF 2.659.129 264 10072
6 BrobFellshank Shadow 2.507.252 248 10110
7 Zarin Shadow 2.504.487 247 10140
8 Mande1992 Shadow 2.349.100 240 9788
9 toby7304 Shadow 2.310.671 234 9875
10 filphillip Shadow 2.176.154 223 9759

I can't get graphics to load for the stats, apologies for that, I'll try again tomorrow, but this will have to do for the moment. I also did not manage to finish the second interview, but that's life. There will be two next week though hopefully!​

[/spoil]​
 
Last edited by a moderator:

DeletedUser

Guest
W27 Weekly: 27th September

Banner.png


[spoil]Zarin – Editor/Interview

Coalition Carelessness or Shadow Supremacy?
Coalition utterly dominated by Shadow

War stats as of 17:30

Side 1:
Tribes: Shadow
Players:

Side 2:
Tribes: Nstlk* [IRON] TK NOS UNI FURY
Players:

Timeframe: Last week

Total conquers:

Side 1: 296
Side 2: 297
Difference: 1

image.php


Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 152
Side 2: 7
Difference: 145

image.php


Points value of total conquers:

Side 1: 2,648,213
Side 2: 1,762,194
Difference: 886,019

image.php


Points value of total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 1,354,025
Side 2: 67,087
Difference: 1,286,938

image.php


Nstlk*

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 17
Side 2: 0
Difference: 17

image.php


[IRON]

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 58
Side 2: 5
Difference: 53

image.php


TK

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 6
Side 2: 0
Difference: 6

image.php


NOS

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 49
Side 2: 2
Difference: 47

image.php


UNI

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 5
Side 2: 0
Difference: 5

image.php


FURY

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 17
Side 2: 0
Difference: 17

image.php


It’s been an utterly disappointing effort from the Coalition this week. Managing just 7 conquers, they were severely punished by 152 from Shadow this time and their plight serves to demonstrate the perceived dire straights which they find themselves in. They only narrowly nudged ahead of Shadow in total conquers, which engenders the obvious question of where all of these conquers are coming from. One must guess that barbs and internals are the answer there, because it isn’t Shadow.

Even Coalition mascot [IRON] has failed completely this week to replicate their recent successes. One does wonder what the story would be like if they could maintain these assaults against Shadow. This week, however, they have been utterly dominated. 58 conquers from Shadow is impressive, considering their usual record against them, though we must remember that many of these will have come from LordKhal who seems absent from our midst. His demise can only strengthen what was supposed as the weakest area of Shadow and it seems that the opportunity for [IRON] in that area has almost completely waned. Regardless of the providence of their losses, 5 against Shadow is truly disappointing; perhaps the absence of any more Lord of Bones villages is hurting these numbers. Whatever the case, from the supposed strongest member of the Coalition, this is shocking indeed.

The only other tribe to get conquers, NOS, can hardly boast anything better. An alarming deficit there too and it seems that this TK reshuffle has failed to remove the ineptitude there. With the loss of a couple larger of players to REF, things may not be quite so peachy in the NOS camp. TK themselves escaped quite such a beating due to their lack of villages, but could offer nothing in return to Shadow, so nothing to celebrate there.

UNI and Nstlk* boast no conquers against Shadow and have simply haemorrhaged villages to Shadow without any presumed resistance. I suppose their relatively small losses are the only favourable aspect. It is a shocking tale indeed. And FURY, well what can I say? You’ve let me down this week by not actually conquering any Shadow villages, it’s a real shame.

Positives for the Coalition: it could actually be worse, that’s all. Neatives: morale seems atrocious and they have probably made more conquers against each other than they have against Shadow

As for Shadow, it’s been an excellent week. A telling superiority in the stats this week will surely have done much to assuage any concerns during recent weeks that the Coalition might be fighting back. All they have to do is keep it up and keep the tribe together and this world is theirs.​

The Light in the Shadow
It’s a train

You might have thought of REF as some sort of catalyst on this world, you might have hailed them as the Coalition’s nepenthe or even the eventual victors here. No such luck I am afraid, they have become a most disappointing show as the recent stas will demonstrate:​

Side 1:
Tribes: Shadow
Players:

Side 2:
Tribes: REF
Players:

Timeframe: Last week

Total conquers:

Side 1: 296
Side 2: 25
Difference: 271

image.php


Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 26
Side 2: 1
Difference: 25

image.php


Points value of total conquers:

Side 1: 2,648,213
Side 2: 220,226
Difference: 2,427,987

image.php


Points value of total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 247,295
Side 2: 11,543
Difference: 235,752

image.php


Not only are Shadow utterly dominating here, but the REF membership is a catalogue of inactivity and apathy. Perhaps it is the curse of the brightest of Shadow’s enemies to be the first to realise their plight. Whatever the case, REF have been unimpressive at best and an utter sham as worst.​

In Other News…

  • gerick6 takes the top spot, so congratulations to him, it’s no mean feat I’ll assure you. It has certainly been moving around rather a lot among the very top, so it will be interesting to see who is the first to the 3 mil mark.​


  • LordKhal appears to have left us. We shall certainly miss him, it’s another lost from the community. Good luck to him and that offer of an interview still stands if you are reading this.

Interview


I decided that we might move things off of the beaten track this week and talk to somebody different this week. Without further ado, I introduce Tyr Hades:

Zarin
Tyr Hades

I always like to get things from a different perspective, so I thought, why not interview our new mod. How does that sound to you?

I don't see why not, although I can assure you that I am not a very interesting individual.

Why do you call yourself Tyr Hades?

When I was in school, I was always a big fan of mythology. Hades is a fairly well known individual, the Greek god of the underworld. While his name was well known, there weren't very many stories directly related to him, so he was still a bit of a mystery. Tyr was the Norse god of combat, glory, and victory. He was known for his extreme bravery, and portrayed as a one handed man after losing his other hand in a display of bravery. His story always fascinated me, as did most of the Norse pantheon, and I have been using the name Tyr online for nearly 6 years.

If you had to describe yourself in 5 words, what would they be?

Overrated. Sarcastic. Calculating. Humorous. Overrated. I believe that about sums it up.

How did you come to TW?

I followed a friend over from another game I used to play. Ironically enough, the main reason I joined my first world was to spy on a tribe.

Which worlds have you played?

I have played so many different worlds that it's not even funny, but my most notable worlds have been W2, W8, W16, W21, W24, and W41.

How did these go?

I gained a small bit of notoriety on a few of them for different reasons. On W2 I was more a forum personality than anything as second in command of one of the XiG branches and later in ESL, on W8 I was one of the more well known BLOC barons, of CEG, REL, then later CLOROX. On W21 I was co-duke of Sexy!, a promising tribe until half our members got banned for some... illicit pictures in our tribal forum. On W41 I was a member of MaccyD until the tribe disbanded and I decided to leave the game.

Which was your most successful TW world?

I would have to say that I was most well known on W8 as one of the original BLOC barons. I was one of the original CEG barons that assisted with installing longtime duke RossWP, before moving to REL as a baron. I had to leave the game for a few months due to my job, then came back and took over an account in CLOROX that I grew to around 170 villages before deleting along with much of the rest of the tribe. W8 was fun, but also boring due to the large number or barbarian villages all over the map. My most favorite world would have to be W2, where I was second in command of one of the mighty XiG tribes.

How did you come to be a part of the TW team?

Basically I became friendly with a few of the moderators at that time, then casually mentioned to one that I wouldn't mind becoming a mod. The next time I was on the IRC channel Lord Haste messaged me and asked me if I seriously wanted to join.

Why did you decide to become a moderator?

Boredom mainly. I had a lot of free time.

What is being a mod actually like?

It's really not much different from being a regular player, albeit with a bit of added responsibility.

What has being a mod gained you?

Haha, well, I've gained a few more good friends on the mod team (even though Pulsar hates me, but she'd deny it), that and premium when I used to play in game. Also several headaches, but let's not go there. :icon_wink:

What do you think that TW teaches us, and more specifically, what has it taught you?

In my mind, TW teaches us cooperation and patience more than anything else. We must be able to work with people that we really don't know in order to be truly successful, and without patience you won't get very far.

As for me: no matter how sad or noobish I think a person is, there is always somebody worse out there.


What do you enjoy most about the game itself?

Without a doubt, the camaraderie. I have some friends that I have met through TW that I would love the opportunity to meet up with in RL if it weren't for the geographic difficulties. My way of looking at it is this : If we are able to work so seamlessly with somebody that we have never met except over the internet, how well would we be able to cooperate in person at a project? It's almost amazing to think about putting the cooperation of some tribes together. Take W8 CLOROX for example. At one point we had nearly 250 people from around the world working effortlessly towards a common goal, and seemingly unstoppable. If you could harness that productivity and put it to use in a real life scenario, the possibilities are endless.

What makes a good community in TW?

Respect. That's all that's really needed. Even if you can't stand somebody in game or in the forums, and even if your tribe has been warring their's since time immemorial, if you show respect, it will be returned in time.

I commented upon community spirit and how it pervades the game, what are you thoughts on this?

Community spirit is very important. We are all here for the same base reason of enjoyment, so from the beginning we all have something in common. Being hostile towards people shows nothing more than either immaturity or a lack of self confidence.

Why do you think that TW is so successful?

Tribalwars brings something different to the table in the way it was designed. The creators didn't look at it as a way to make money. Instead they designed a game that they themselves would enjoy playing, and that makes all the difference.

What do you think of the W27 community? What were your first impressions?

Quiet. Very, very quiet. It worries me. :icon_wink:

How might this community be improved?

Well, no community will ever be perfect as things can always be improved. The first step I think would likely be to create interest in the global forums and get more people posting.

Which forum personality has made the greatest impression upon you thus far and is it good or bad?

Inside W27 I haven't had enough interaction to make a call there myself, but overall from my entire time in the forums I would probably have to say Uritel. He was my duke on W8, and we had a very similar sense of humor, with the ability to use humor as a vehicle to get a point across.

What do you think of the W27 Weekly?

I think that it's a great addition to the forums. Any time there is a player that is willing to go above and beyond what the average poster would do it is greatly appreciated by people who don't have the time to do all the research involved themselves.

From what you have seen of the world, do you expect Shadow to win?

I honestly don't think a world on TW.net will be won so to speak for a long time. TW on W1 was close at one point although I haven't checked in on that lately, CLOROX on W8 was thought to have but they fell, there is always CTRL on W10 and DNY on W12, but tribes with that sort of firepower are few and far between. I won't claim to be well versed on the current in game situation with W27, but if Shadow can win the world anytime soon, I would be extremely impressed.

How would you describe the ethos amongst the upper echelons of TW?

I won't claim to be a part of the upper echelons myself, but I will admit to being acquainted with many that are there. To be honest, I highly doubt that a tribe with an all star lineup of established players will ever last. We tried on W41 with MaccyD, a lineup studded with W1 and W2 players, along with a lot of talent from later worlds. I was just along to bring laughs. There were too many egos. To me, that is the biggest vice of the upper ranks. Other than that, there isn't much difference character wise from the top to the bottom.

What is your favourite colour?

Well, I would say black, but as it isn't a true "color" so to speak, I'll have to go with orange.

Thoughts for the Week
A few words on the vicissitudes of the week and TW in general

A massive thanks to Silverwolf here for taking on the mantle of this section for the week. Hope you enjoy it folks.

The Fairness of Shadow and War

“All’s Fair in Love and War” (Francis Edward Smedley)

It has been mentioned several times this week that the war, between Shadow and the fast collapsing Coalition, is not fair. Therefore in this article I would like to examine the fairness and of this war and compare it to some real situations.

One of the ideas put forward by 2 players whom I shall not name here, one of whom is well known to these forums and the W27 community in general; was that the war was unfair because of Shadow’s huge size and the large amount of skilled players Shadow has.

As a Shadow player I was, in both situations, rather inclined to laugh. Why should Shadow care that because it’s bigger and better that it’s not fair? Answer: what do you mean unfair?

Every player began with the same advantages and disadvantages. We built ourselves up – with help in some cases – using our superior leadership team which, like the rest of the tribe; had a constant and single goal which we have forged for throughout our existence.

Now that we are very close to obtaining that goal, victory over World 27; those that belong (and have belonged) to the tribes fighting a losing battle come to us basically crying foul. I think this quote sums it up:

"Just because you're losing doesn't mean the rules should be changed to make it fair to you"(Silverwolf008)

Did King Leonidas 1 of Sparta whine when the Persian Army marched on the 300 of Thermopylae? Did General Gaius Suetonius Paulinus of Rome cry foul when Boudicca’s barbarian hordes, 10-23 times the size of his forces, attacked him?

You claim that this is war is not fair; you claim this because we are bigger, stronger, have many skilled players and have taken complete dominance in this World. This has nothing to do with fair. There is no such thing as ‘fair’ in war, to think otherwise is naïve.

Allow me to remind you of who declared on Shadow. Did Feb.13 not declare on ATTACK? Did Nstlk* not declare on ATTACK? Did the Coalition not band together and plot in the daylight for fear of the Shadows? Did the Coalition not declare on Shadow?

If you find yourself thinking: ‘Yes Feb.13 did declare ATTACK; Yes Nstlk* did declare on ATTACK and Yes the Coalition did declare on Shadow’ then you are correct. Shadow has declared on one tribe, that being LA-G. Since then we have constantly been in a state of war. Regardless of whether our individual opponents actually lasted for the duration of the battles we have fought is negligible. We have fought war after war, as coward after coward declared on us in a bid to capitalise on our perceived weakness after the ending of each of our wars.

If you, opponents of Shadow, still see yourselves as wronged and unfairly advantaged then I have a suggestion for you: grow up. You are being beaten and your losses are devastating. Victory after glorious victory is being had by Shadow.

We haven’t had a free ride; we’ve fought from day one. If we’ve had it easy at any moment that is an indictment of your tribes and their members, not of Shadow having a ‘free ride’.

It seems to me that the reason why we are being accused of being unfair is because of the frustrations born of losing to us constantly. I don’t want to be cruel or mean but I suggest that those of you frustrated by Shadow’s dominance get used to it. As someone who has been in a similar enough position to you I can certainly empathise but I can’t sympathise with your reactions.​

By Silverwolf008
Calling It How It Is

Stats

Top Ten Tribes
1 Shadow 65.840.490 72.661.053 58 1.252.777 7380 9.846
2 [IRON] 16.983.848 21.279.388 79 269.359 2457 8.661
3 REF 13.174.967 13.174.967 16 823.435 1352 9.745
4 *TKP* 9.045.164 9.104.650 43 211.736 1104 8.247
5 Nstlk* 8.522.954 8.597.001 49 175.449 992 8.666
6 NOS 6.317.785 6.406.931 50 128.139 787 8.141
7 SAM 4.697.463 4.697.463 30 156.582 660 7.117
8 FURY 3.751.987 3.751.987 40 93.800 474 7.916
9 UNI 2.989.082 2.989.082 22 135.867 395 7.567
10 Trade 2.589.342 2.589.342 13 199.180 309 8.380

Top Ten Players
1 gerick6 Shadow 2.894.993 285 10158
2 ftw97 Shadow 2.863.648 292 9807
3 Carthon II Shadow 2.828.915 296 9557
4 mikestuntz Shadow 2.695.893 264 10212
5 theSleepwalker REF 2.613.593 261 10014
6 Zarin Shadow 2.594.460 255 10174
7 BrobFellshank Shadow 2.572.807 254 10129
8 Mande1992 Shadow 2.459.962 251 9801
9 toby7304 Shadow 2.415.095 245 9858
10 filphillip Shadow 2.294.410 235 9763

Before you complain that there was only one interview, I am aware of this for those of you who keep badgering me. I’ll have to take it as an indictment about how much you enjoy the Weekly rather than a pedantic tendency; two will be posted at some point.​

[/spoil]​
 
Last edited by a moderator:

DeletedUser

Guest
W27 Weekly: 04th October

Banner.png


[spoil]Zarin – Editor/Interview

REF hath no fury
Membership re-shuffle among Shadow opponents

It seems best to outline the recent changes which W27 has been subjected to. While Shadow remains unchanged by recent events, their closest opponent has been significantly strengthened through a merge with REF.

As we have recently seen, REF have struggled to uphold their ethos in the face of internal problems and perennial inactivity/apathy. Therefore, they have seen fit to merge with [IRON] to create a tribe of no small size, and a reasonable opponent to Shadow.

However, before we suggest that the war is even looking like changing slightly, we must remember that the same opponents still remain, and that valuable members have been lost from REF. Even so, [IRON] hold a very comfortable position and are doing exactly what the Coalition should have done; with a much larger membership, support and coordination are more widely available and thus this new tribe could well present Shadow with a tougher front.

Elsewhere, the Coalition itself seems to be a forgotten idea; [IRON] accounts for a massive proportion of the points, and few of the losses; UNI have left and other tribes are slowly falling into obscurity. It does seem that from now on, the battle between [IRON] and Shadow will decide the fate of the world.​

Requiem for Resistance
Stats convey disparity among Coalition

Until the Coalition is officially disbanded, we shall continue to lump these stats together, but [IRON]/Shadow is the only one that you need to be interested in really. UNI will not be included.​

Side 1:
Tribes: Shadow
Players:

Side 2:
Tribes: [IRON] Nstlk* TK NOS FURY
Players:

Timeframe: 27/09/2009 16:00:00 to 04/10/2009 16:00:00

Total conquers:

Side 1: 319
Side 2: 237
Difference: 82

image.php


Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 146
Side 2: 12
Difference: 134

image.php


Points value of total conquers:

Side 1: 2,873,391
Side 2: 1,464,007
Difference: 1,409,384

image.php


Points value of total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 1,312,116
Side 2: 107,906
Difference: 1,204,210

image.php



Nstlk*

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 52
Side 2: 0
Difference: 52

image.php


[IRON]

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 21
Side 2: 11
Difference: 10

image.php


TK

b]Total conquers against opposite side:[/b]

Side 1: 14
Side 2: 0
Difference: 14

image.php


NOS

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 21
Side 2: 1
Difference: 20

image.php


FURY

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 38
Side 2: 0
Difference: 38

image.php


It’s another of Shadow’s weeks, success on every front:

REF

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 26
Side 2: 1
Difference: 25

image.php


What does it mean for the world? Well I could say that it is very much up to the reader what they think of the stats this week; I know that the figures are very much a significant representation of the conflict, but we should not underestimate perhaps the change among forces arrayed against them. [IRON], in quintessential form, are reluctant to give any quarter, while their allies crumble under the onslaught.

Admittedly, few if any can say that they see [IRON] being victorious, but do their failed ambitions necessarily mean victory for Shadow should it come to pass, or is the resistance to Shadow now sturdy enough to prolong the conflict and induce significant attrition among Shadow? I think it is what will decide this world and not the prowess of [IRON]; the conquest of Shadow is by now an insurmountable challenge without serious upheaval to them.

Elsewhere, it’s a sorry state of affairs; a single conquer between the rest while their losses spiral past a hundred. Nstlk* is a sliver of its former glory, a relic of a different time that few would believe now. NOS and TK, that band of Eastern players is struggling to make any sort of impact and FURY have simply stuttered completely.

All in all, it’s a case of what will happen once Shadow finishes with the smaller opponents. Whilst we may look to the new [IRON] to put up serious competition, they have only been tested against part of the Shadow machine; we must consider what will happen when it really is a one on one battle between the two, but I am afraid that we shall have to wait a little longer for that one.​

In Other News…

  • left]We unfortunately say goodbye to maccano1 this week. He was a great guy and highly regarded on this forum, as well as being one brave enough to try and change the world which he did succeed in doing. Good luck to him, and to his father.

  • UNI leaves the Coalition[/left]

Interview


Well, with Nstlk*’s catastrophic fall from grace, I decided to interview their current duke: Samurai Kiwi

Zarin
Samurai Kiwi

Why do you call yourself samurai kiwi?

Mixture of my kiwi origins and my japanese partner

Why did you come to TW?

it looked interesting when i saw the advertisment almost 2 years ago

Which was your first world?

World 10

How did that go?

Still going, fairly good id say, 7.1 mil acct, in the 2nd ranked tribe at war with the first

Why did you come to W27?

felt like a new world with similar settings to w10

What did you think of the tribe lock?

interesting change, was a bit frustrating tho

What was your first tribe like?

it was actually fairly decent, got voted into the council early on, but eventually the inactivity of this world won out

What role did you serve in Nstlk*?

Started out as a baron and when the others quit i moved up to duke to help griff out, ended up head duke for the majority of the time, tried to pass on some experience to other members.

What was Nstlk* like, in better times?

Back in the good old days it was great, good comarderie amongst the tribemates, lots of communication and fun

Who, out of the Nstlk* members who have left, do you miss the most?

that would have to be tressoro, her new attitude to the game was always a laugh as we coached her through the early days. sparkosss was good too

What do you see for the future of Nstlk*?

fairly bleak, most have lost the faith

Did you expect Nstlk* to fare better in the war with ATTACK?

I always knew that it was going to be a long hard battle but yes i felt that it would go much better than it has. And initially the war was going well, we were holding our own at least and even pushing our way into k53

What went wrong?

The biggest thing that went wrong was we had tressoro, sparkoss, olaf and true zalfer all quit within a few days of each other, 3 of them were council members and the largest members in the tribe, the worse part about it was that they deleted instead of passing the sit to someone. This gave shadow a million barbs to target ad get easy access to our K's. It also disheartened the tribe a great deal.

Were you surprised that ~AOW~ sided with ATTACK?

Not really, more dissapointed than anything, just made us have to focus on 2 fronts

What do you think of Shadow?

well organised and co-ordinated tribe

What do you think of the Coalition?

hard question as i dont want to piss them off but in all honesty, they joined way to late, nstlk* were fighting shadow hard for ages and doing ok, but when we asked for help they delayed for a few months before joining in, by that time it was to late for us

What do you think of REF?

just another tribe who used to be part of us but got scared of war

Why didn't you leave for REF?

it never interested me that much, no desire to join a bunch of players who left when the war got to hard for them and they werent prepared to put in the work required to help solve it.

What is [IRON] like?

ive only been here a few days but they are very active and much more organised than the last dying days of stalkers, its nice to be in a tribe where the forum keeps saying new post, etc

Do they have what it takes to stop Shadow? Why?

Yes they do tho it will take a long time. mainly because they are organised and active by earlier reports, only time will tell but yes they can win, doesnt mean they will tho

If you could fight one player on W27, who would it be and why?

Saint luke, because hes constantly attacking my tribe, disregarding our diplomatic situation over small mis-understandings that could be sorted out peacefully like adults. but i still try to honour our allies and naps to protect the greater tribe

Do you think that Shadow will win W27?

it will take something amazing for them not to, but that doesnt mean that the rest of us will just roll over and give it to them

Will you return after W27?

i imagine world 10 will still be going, and yes i think ill come back to play another world, if the mrs doesnt kill the computer first (she hates this game)

Who is your favourite forum personality?

i hardly ever look at the tw forum, in stalkers forum it was 4knife RO, now its fairly quiet

What as TW taught you? What have you gained from it?

Patience, and friends

What's your greatest regret on W27?

my greatest regret is not being able to talk tresorro and sparkosss out of quitting, i tried hard but failed, olaf and true zalfer had no choice but to leave but the other 2 were the key ones. with them we could have won or at least been it a MUCH stronger position than we are in now

What have you enjoyed most about this world?

simple answer, the friends that ive made from stalker and a few others. council in stalkers became quite a tight bunch, i still talk to most of them daily on skype

How do you think Shadow would fare on W10 for example?

the same situation as this world on w10 would result in shadow most likely losing the war, the ability to support members from other tribes would make it much more difficult for them to stand up to the coalition. local support would be easier to come by and shadow would need to use more nukes per vil, shame we arnt on w10 :p

Stats

Top Ten Tribes
1 Shadow 68.971.032 75.400.992 56 1.346.446 7668 9.833
2 [IRON] 25.942.009 33.962.591 92 369.159 3768 9.013
3 *TKP* 10.468.930 10.488.157 42 249.718 1227 8.548
4 NOS 5.860.835 5.969.403 52 114.796 752 7.938
5 SAM 4.956.745 4.956.745 29 170.922 682 7.268
6 REF 4.252.608 4.252.608 7 607.515 430 9.890
7 FURY 3.673.962 3.705.563 48 77.199 469 7.901
8 UNI 3.274.095 3.274.095 22 148.823 421 7.777
9 Trade 2.761.272 2.761.272 12 230.106 336 8.218
10 SoD 2.198.048 2.275.284 58 39.229 327 6.958

Top Ten Players
1 gerick6 Shadow 3.034.068 299 10147
2 Carthon II Shadow 2.949.703 308 9577
3 ftw97 Shadow 2.912.580 296 9840
4 mikestuntz Shadow 2.797.491 274 10210
5 Zarin Shadow 2.755.609 270 10206
6 BrobFellshank Shadow 2.698.722 266 10146
7 Mande1992 Shadow 2.581.791 263 9817
8 toby7304 Shadow 2.552.107 258 9892
9 filphillip Shadow 2.355.364 242 9733
10 theSleepwalker [IRON] 2.350.291 235 10001

Comic
cool-cartoon-997430.png


cool-cartoon-997412.png


[/spoil]​
 
Last edited by a moderator:

DeletedUser

Guest
W27 Weekly: 11th October

Banner.png


[spoil]Zarin – Editor/Interview

What are you waiting for?
Shadow firmly in the lead

War stats as of ~15:00

Side 1:
Tribes: Shadow
Players:

Side 2:
Tribes: [IRON] NOS TK Nstlk* FURY
Players:

Timeframe: Last week

Total conquers:

Side 1: 345
Side 2: 277
Difference: 68

image.php


Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 136
Side 2: 7
Difference: 129

image.php


Points value of total conquers:

Side 1: 3,142,380
Side 2: 1,722,302
Difference: 1,420,078

image.php


Points value of total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 1,272,419
Side 2: 69,277
Difference: 1,203,142

image.php


Nstlk*

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 11
Side 2: 0
Difference: 11

image.php


[IRON]

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 35
Side 2: 5
Difference: 30

image.php


TK

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 20
Side 2: 0
Difference: 20

image.php


NOS

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 46
Side 2: 2
Difference: 44

image.php


FURY

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 24
Side 2: 0
Difference: 24

image.php


Is this it, is this all you can muster?

If I am honest this week, I am disappointed in the Coalition. What on Earth do you call this? What’s the point in fighting if you are going to slide into defeat in such a fashion? We expected a fight, but all we have is bathos and the dominion of Shadow. Look down the stats, what do you see? Do you see resistance, or a catalogue of apathy and failure? Enemies who once stood proudly, now fallen asunder; they are mere shadows of their former selves.

Even Shadow’s supposed main rival falls far short of the mark this week, a disparity of 30 conquers is no small number when we consider that Shadow is occupied elsewhere. It’s disappointing at best and a damning indictment of how inadequate the resistance to Shadow is at worst. [IRON] are making plenty of conquers, but these are either internals or barbs and are not directly aiding the war effort. Moreover, if [IRON] are supposed to set the example to other tribes, what sort of precedent is this?

The only other tribe to attain any conquers was NOS, but their 2 were severely contrasted with the 46 against them. It is a sad state of affairs when even managing to conquer a Shadow village is worthy of note. Indeed, it is remarkable how far NOS have fallen so quickly; they seem to be utterly beaten at the moment and if this continues it will surely not be long before their members pack up or join another tribe. One might even wonder what sort of resistance Shadow is facing in these sorts of situations, are NOS fighting to keep them, or are they simply content with whatever has survived each time they log in?

FURY, TK, Nstlk*; it’s all the same story. It seems unlikely that these tribes have anything left to offer. TK is on the edge of complete annihilation, Nstlk* composed of mainly inactive members and FURY, despite a reasonable size, lacks initiative or direction.

The future of the Coalition looks bleak indeed, and this author doesn’t particularly relish the prospect of simply complaining about their apathy for the weeks until Shadow wins. Admittedly, when it begs the question of what should be done, one struggles to actually conceive of a reasonable answer, [IRON] has the depth to exist for quite some time, but that is a luxury lacking elsewhere.​

In Other News…

  • We seem to have lost another mod, we wish Tyr Hades luck with whatever RL issues have appeared.​

Interview


With UNI leaving the Coalition, I thought that I would catch up with their leader…

Zarin
sweeney2kaii8

Why do you call yourself sweeney2kaii8?

No reason just made up on the spot, I didn't see the point of putting effort into your name.

Why did you come to TW?

I joined because my friends played it, and seemed to be enjoying it, though it took up alot of time.

Which was your first world?

My first world was w29.

How did that go?

It went terrible, I had like 10 troops in a 3k village, and coarse got nobled.

It was a learning expereince for me.


Why did you come to W27?

I ramdomly joined w27, quit , then joined again.

Could you give a brief overview of your W27 history up to this point?

I have quite a history on w27.
I was banned once, lost half my points, haven't been in any big war with sombody.

Joined Dstlk* back when I had 2k.
Got a baron job there.
Then was prometed to leader when most members went to Nstlk*.

Now I'm leader of UNI.


What did you think of the tribe lock?

The tribe lock was a great idea, it allowed expereinced player to teach new ones, though I can't see it happening again.

What was your first tribe like?

My first tribe was crap, nothing much to say about it, was very boring.

Why did Nstlk* decide to make an academy?

Nstlk* made an academy because alot of small players were asking for invites, though I didn't see the point on this world as you can't support players outside the tribe, Dstlk* was more like a dump-off point for Nstlk*, alot of Nstlk* made jokes about Dstlk*, saying that they just hide under Nstlk*, but this was true.

So how did things go with Dstlk* over time, particularly during the war?

The war with ATTACK/shadow didn't effect Dstlk* as much, we were too small to do anything as any player that would have an effect went up to Nstlk*, also alot of Dstlk* was too far away from the frontlines, so we never had much of a chance to make an impact.

Did leaving the Coalition really change anything; do you expect Shadow to ignore you even more?

No, not much, but we are too far away for them to focus on us.

Did the Coalition ever have any hope? Was there a better time for them to have declared?

Yes, when it formed there was a 60-40 chance (infavour of shadow), but not anymore, this is why we left, there goes a saying "don't wound somthing you can't kill", when UNI joined we might of been able to kill shadow, but now...... now I don't see any hope, the only way the coalition will win, is if shadow split, which I cannot see happening.

They should of declared at the same time that Nstlk* did, as (as far as I can remember) the coalition would have been bigger then, if they had joined then, I think Nstlk* would currently rank 1.


If the Coalition had prevailed, what do you think would have happened between the tribes?

Well, we had plan to take out all the other tribe after shadow, for example TKP,SAM, GR*FM and so on.

After that we probably would have gone back to being single tribes.


What does UNI hope to achieve?

To be one of the last tribes in w27, we hope to be able to survive for a long time, to be up there with the likes of Nstlk*/Feb.13/[IRON]/Shadow we want to remembered as one of the few great tribes of w27, if we can achive this I will be happy.

What do you think of Shadow?

Shadow are easily the best tribe ver on w27, there aparent great leadership seems solid. They seem to work very well together as a team, they've taken out all major threats with ease. Also the fact that very few of them seem to quit TW because RL is a bonus.
Although they are great, I don't see them rank 1 on any other world, as there is far better challages on otherr worlds.

What do you think of the Coalition?

The coalition is falling apart, now its just FURY and [IRON], what started out as a glimmer of hope has been crushed by shadow, I cannot see them winning ever.

What do you think of REF?

REF?!?!?!?
They are a joke, 2 of there members were destroyed by shadow, and did REF have any counter-move? NO.
People seemed to forget that they wre just a smaller Nstlk*.
Most of there members fled to IRON anyway.


Do you think that Shadow will win W27?

Of coarse, they will will w27, no doubt about it.
Some say they don't deserve it because there wasn't much of an opposition, but thats not shadows fault, though they have been a little lucky (the fact that tesorro,sparkosss left and the banning of 4knifeRO).
Even still they have laid waste to some fine players, Grim, puggacb, LK, ash.
In my eyes, no one on w27 will stop them.


How do you think Shadow would fare on another world?

There are lots of posts about this, my guess, would be that they would be somwhere around rank 6-7 in most other worlds. They are very good, no doubt about it, but don't have much of an opposition.

Why do you think that Shadow has succeeded?

There apart leadership seems very strong, the fact that they work as one.

This could be a little unfair but, they have had a good bit of luck, the fact that tesorro and sparkoss left, and 4knifeRO got banned.

Even still if they continue like this, they'll have owned w27.


What do you think of the public forum, what purpose does it serve in your opinion?

The public forum, in my eyes, don't serve a purpose, though its nice to talk with people that your battling against.

Who is your favourite forum personality?

That would have to be macca, he was always a good laugh, I'll be sad to see him go, a great loss to the forums.

If you could fight one player on W27, who would it be and why?

Hmm....
Not sure, MikeGriff maybe, if I was big enough because he never really liked me for some reason, he didn't want Nstlk* to have an academy, also hes inactive, so it would be easy :p


What have you learned from TW? What has it taught you?

TW has thought me alot of things, I never knew that you could get so close to someone you'll probably never meet, also I never thought I'd make so many friends here.

What is your favourite part of TW?

Definatly the interaction with other players, if that was to be taken away, I quit TW.

Will you return after W27?

Yes, in fact I am baron of a w42 premade tribe.

Thoughts for the Week
A few words on the vicissitudes of the week and TW in general

I had a few things to say this week, as did silverwolf, so he has submitted something and I have added to it:

Goodbye and Good Riddance

Yesterday at 19:08:38 server time something that was decried as impossible by LK and [IRON] officially occurred: The Great, Almighty, Unrimmable LordKhal was rimmed by Shadow. I can't begin tell you how much that delights me.

Firstly allow me to address a few things to the wider community from LordKhal's profile itself:

LordKhal said:
Sorry you had to go Grim. Not how we wanted it to go I know but some things can't be helped. Peace m8, Khal will hold the fort

Good thing Grim had Khal to "hold the fort". Maybe that's what really happened, Grim quit because he realised not only he was incompetant but that the guy who was his greatest ally wasn't even half as good as he claimed to be.

LordKhal said:
Do not start something if you are not ready to back it up. Look me up in w7, I tend to win once the fighting starts ;)

Firstly: W7 has nothing to do with here obviously, although maybe you just haven't been found out there Khal. Because the fighting started and ended with you losing.

LordKhal said:
I would honestly like people to attack me. I can guarantee without a doubt you will lose everything you send.

This comment is probably the most descriptive in reference to LordKhal's character and attitude towards the game. As we all can now tell LordKhal was rather badly wrong in this statement. Not only did we (Shadow) not lose everything we sent at him, but we also killed every troop he had and took his villages from him.

LordKhal said:
Objective 6: Give LordKhal a massive laughing fit . . . . ACCOMPLISHED

Well you managed to give me a massive laughing fit too Khal, the way you just rolled over and died like the rest of the Coalition was truly amusing.

Then just to cap it all off, when you had begun to lose badly and I mailed you in game to bid you farewell you stated that school had started and you could no longer be as active as you had been. That was a great laugh Khal.

I love how certain members of the Coalition, past and present always have an excuse for why they lost which manages to completely absolve them of any fault and allows them to continue to feed their over-inflated and empty egos with how awesome they think they are.

Grimlock- - was on holiday - whose fault was it that he either didn't set a sitter or at least didn't set a competent and active sitter? It was his. But of course he conveniently fails to point out that regardless of whether he was there or not, the buck stops with him and it was his fault alone that he got destroyed by Shadow.

LordKhal - went back to school - again whose fault was it that he either didn't set a sitter or at the very least set as competant one? It was his. If you fail to set a sitter or a decent sitter anyway that is your fault and it reflects poorly on you; because you made the mistake and no one else.

Or maybe it was the settings that got Grimlock- and LK destroyed?

Finally allow me to quote a member of [IRON]:

Umbada said:
[24/09/2009 3:28:20 PM] darren sholo mon goyas: lord khal wont be rimmed

It would seem that [IRON]'s belief that LordKhal would not be rimmed was also incorrect. [IRON] might be a bigger tribe now but one wonders if they're not just like Nstlk* was when YGI? joined them. There were a big threat, but without enough good players.

Goodbye and good riddance Khal; I, for one, won't miss you.

If you’re thinking that this is some sort of victory dance upon LK’s grave, then you’d probably be right, but it’s about more than that. It’s about something which we are all guilty of, in life, and on this game. When something goes wrong, what do we see on the news? Blame. Always we wonder who else was responsible, who else we can pin the blame upon and does that not reflect something about us?

How often have you lied or ignored the truth? When you lost that game of football, whose fault was it? You blamed the referee, or the weather, or the food you ate last night because you didn’t have the character to accept that it was down to you. You could have made it clear for the ref, everyone played in the same conditions and you chose your eating habits. It’s about character and honesty.

That’s an illustrative point, but the theme is pertinent to the game. Blame is a terrible thing, it is vexatious to us, a spectre that solves nothing and yet is a mandate for apathy, for indolence. It takes something good inside a person to recognise where they were wrong, what mistakes they made and to attempt to rectify them, not to hide beneath excuses.

When players on this game are beaten, how often do they accept that they were beaten by a superior opponent, or that were inaccurate in their play? Heck when was the last time you admitted to another that you were wrong, that you were to blame? Will you have the character to admit, when the time comes, that your opponents were better; or will you drown their victory in exculpation?

And where does the line between truth and excusable disadvantage come? Do the capricious vicissitudes of fate acquit your inadequacy, or is it your fault for not planning for the worst? How do we recognise what we can change, and what we can’t until the time comes?

If you’re wondering what I am getting at, then perhaps I don’t wish to see the next big player who leaves vitiate their legacy with excuses, or see Shadow’s enemies extenuate their defeat. I wouldn’t be surprised if there was sense of irony or hypocrisy in that sentiment. However, that’s not the point, it’s about more than that, but that’s for you to find.

All I have to leave you with is a simple question: whose fault is it that you try to blame others?​

Stats

Top Ten Tribes
1 Shadow 71.167.360 77.682.067 56 1.387.180 7904 9.828
2 [IRON] 26.653.959 34.387.427 89 386.376 3804 9.040
3 *TKP* 10.381.562 10.381.562 40 259.539 1207 8.601
4 NOS 5.814.484 5.922.215 55 107.677 760 7.792
5 UNI 4.686.895 4.686.895 27 173.589 599 7.825
6 REF 3.699.292 3.699.292 5 739.858 373 9.918
7 FURY 3.095.370 3.095.745 42 73.708 402 7.701
8 Trade 2.867.674 2.867.674 12 238.973 352 8.147
9 SAM 2.769.093 2.769.093 19 145.742 347 7.980
10 WT3 2.217.513 2.229.137 47 47.428 319 6.988

Top Ten Players
1 gerick6 Shadow 3.129.866 307 10195
2 Carthon II Shadow 3.011.405 313 9621
3 ftw97 Shadow 2.991.301 304 9840
4 mikestuntz Shadow 2.920.314 286 10211
5 Zarin Shadow 2.825.831 277 10202
6 BrobFellshank Shadow 2.797.816 271 10324
7 toby7304 Shadow 2.686.253 271 9912
8 Mande1992 Shadow 2.666.539 272 9803
9 filphillip Shadow 2.435.249 249 9780
10 dirtfish Shadow 2.424.525 245 9896

Comic

cool-cartoon-1016675.png


[/spoil]​
 
Last edited by a moderator:

DeletedUser

Guest
W27 Weekly: 18th October

Banner.png


[spoil]Zarin – Editor/Interview
sweeney2kaii8 - Comic

Worst Week’s Work
It’s the worst week so far for the Coalition

War stats as of ~14:00

Side 1:
Tribes: Shadow
Players:

Side 2:
Tribes: [IRON] NOS Nstlk* TK FURY
Players:

Timeframe: Last week

Total conquers:

Side 1: 311
Side 2: 224
Difference: 87

image.php


Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 131
Side 2: 0
Difference: 131

image.php


Points value of total conquers:

Side 1: 2,731,497
Side 2: 1,597,145
Difference: 1,134,352

image.php


Points value of total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 1,219,240
Side 2: 0
Difference: 1,219,240

image.php


Nstlk*

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 4
Side 2: 0
Difference: 4

image.php


[IRON]

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 48
Side 2: 0
Difference: 48

image.php


TK

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 1
Side 2: 0
Difference: 1

image.php


NOS

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 51
Side 2: 0
Difference: 51

image.php


FURY

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 27
Side 2: 0
Difference: 27

image.php


Well, well, well; what does one say this week? It cannot be denied that it’s been an atrocious week for the Coalition, no conquers at all against Shadow is an indictment of the most chronic ineptitude. Last week I asked what you were waiting for, but the stats this week do not show me any signs of brilliance from the Coalition.

Indeed, the Coalition has had its fair share of bad weeks, but never before have they failed to take a single Shadow village. When we ask for the reason why, I think the cause is apathy rather than incompetence. After all, if you don’t send nobles, you can’t noble villages. Many attest to the dangers of allowing inactivity and apathy to grip a tribe and this is exactly what we’re seeing in the Coalition where it is fast becoming merely a fight to survive, rather than a contested war.

If we look down that list, it is also clear where the focus of Shadow has been, with [IRON] and NOS being subjected to savage beatings. Then again, one village off of TK, in their current state, is a massive proportion of their points; so in some ways they have suffered the most.

Whatever the case, it has been a grand week for Shadow and they seem to be pushing on resolutely with their conquest of W27 whilst resistance slips away. One does have to ask what exactly the Coalition plan to do and I am not sure that any grand scheme which requires them to fall so far behind in conquers for a week or two is worth it.​

In Other News…

  • We have a new mod – slytown, so welcome to him and we hope he sticks around.​


  • SAM splits into two tribes, one retaining the name, while the other larger section becomes FOME. Make of this what you will.

Interview


Zarin
Silverwolf008

Why do you call yourself Silverwolf008

Well I call myself silverwolf008 for a couple of reasons. Firstly, because I like Wolves themselves and because of a childhood movie I loved entitled "Silver Wolf". I include the numbers "008" because "8" is my favourite number and I didn't want to be pedestrian with the 8 merely tacked on the end so I gave it some company hence: "008".

Why did you come to Tribal Wars?

I came to Tribal Wars because my best friend in RL randomly found the game and started playing. He wanted some company so I thought why not?

It costs money; it's addictive; takes too much time...

Anyway, Where did your TW story start?


My TW story began on W20 where I reached the fantastic total of 14k points with 2 villages and a staggering 100 of each troop. I thought I was awesome too, till someone attacked me.

I take it that didn't end well.

No it certainly didn't I got cleared and nobled by a player on 80k points. We ended up becoming friends because he liked the fact that I found it funny being nobled out (I was and still am a newb). It was a short-lived friendship as I departed W20, never to return.

So where did you find yourself after that?

I found myself on W25, where I grew to 18k points and ended up as Duke of a tribe there. Turns out I'm not too good at that. I was also playing W26 at the time. I ended up quitting both and eventually - whilst joining several other worlds at roughly the same time - I joined W27 and here I am today.

Any particular reason why you chose W27?

Actually, contrary to many others interviewed, due to the fact that I was a complete newb at the time I really wasn't looking at "World Settings" and I had no idea where to look for them at the time anyway. I just joined W27 because it was brand new and I thought it a good learning experience to have a crack at a new world.

Fortune favours the brave I suppose; how were the days of the tribe lock for you?

For me the days of the tribe lock were excellent. I was in a tribe with two experienced players who knew what they were doing. Both of them took me under their respective "wings" and taught me rather a lot about the game. Especially the early stages of it. No one had ever extended such a courtesy to me before so I basically followed what I was told. Due to several unforeseeable factors both my teachers were nobled out and due primarily to luck I was not and still have not been on this world. This is a first for me.

It was also during this time that I first met Eph - although she was in a different, far more powerful tribe - and somehow got into her good graces and was very generously given a position in the now legendary "Shadow" which was ATTACK in those days.


How did that come about?

I basically started talking to Eph during the "Dracaena and "the Horsemen" saga as I was Diplomat Baron of "AWOL" which was the lock tribe of Dracaena. Eph was one of the tribe leaders very opposed to "the Horsemen" and especially Dracaena. It was later decided by our council (AWOL) that we should attempt to merge our active players into ATTACK if Eph was agreeable. Eph was, although due to heavy inactivity almost all of them departed very fast.

Would you care to briefly outline this saga for readers who may not be familiar?

Due to the length of time that has passed since the Saga occurred I will try my best to be accurate but will not guarantee it's authenticity. Dracaena formed what can best be described as a "premade for after lock" tribe which was very large and primarily "core of W27" orientated. Dracaena was very hotheaded and rather power-hungry. He fast established a core of decent enough players in his "premade" tribe and then began attempting to wipe out other large players and their groups. Brownnose and a good friend of his (whose name escapes me) took on and beat all of Dracaena and "the Horsemen"'s attempts at destroying them. Dracaena eventually quit and gave all of his villages to his lieutenant Puccagb06 who ended up in Feb 13th after being cleared by other large players who didn't like what Drac was doing. Most of the horsemen were later wiped out or faded into obscurity. I daresay there may be a few remaining, who knows?

As a slight digression: if I were to ask why Drac failed, but Ephette succeeded; what would you say?

I would say you basically have got that correct - although I have no knowledge if Drac's downfall had anything remotely to do with Ephette - as you seem to hint at. I just know that Dracaena offended rather a lot of people and so it was no shock to see him eliminated. Ephette is a cool customer and a very intelligent leader who has succeeded because of those qualities amongst others.

I simply meant that as both created pre-made tribes, why is Ephette leading one to victory, whilst few remember Drac?

I think I answered that in the last question. Dracaena failed because he was all mouth and thought he could insult everything and anyone and get away with it even though he had lost the support of his lock tribe and would therefore recieve no support from it's members.
Ephette succeeded because she is a calm, driven, motivated and intelligent leader who also has the ability to motivate her players to the best of their abilities.
In short - Eph is by far the better leader


In the interests of keeping any egos under control, let's move on.

What were your thoughts on ATTACK at the time that you joined?


My thoughts on ATTACK were relatively neutral. I had only met Ephette and was impressed by her direct manner which left no room for confusion. I had no idea I was about to join a tribe with a singleminded leadership who had a single goal at the forefront of their thinking.

Would you care to elucidate upon that ethos?

This goal was basically the complete and utter domination of W27. It has forever been at the forefront of the minds of the leadership and has therefore been driven into the minds of all members of Shadow.

However as opposed to other such tribes now passed, such as Feb.13th; Shadow's leadership has conducted itself in an honourable manner without stooping to backstabbing and treachery as is found on other - as LK would put it - "better" worlds.


Well, ATTACK certainly had to fight for that goal, what are your thoughts on the first major war, against LA-G?

Yes the road for ATTACK/Shadow has been a long and hard one. LA-G did not contribute to any of our difficulties however. I was watching the Stats at the time and one figure has always stuck in my mind. That is the fact that ATTACK took 115 LA-G villages before they took one from ATTACK. So my thoughts are that LA-G war was not a war at all but a slaughter.

Indeed, but you did fail to finish them off for quite some time; are we blaming that upon Feb 13?

No I would blame LA-G. Who wants to waste their time on a dead-in-the-water opponent? Essentially they were still an enemy but because Feb.13 actually sent attacks they became priority and LA-G was put on the backburner.

And how did that war go?

It began really well in terms of a good fight. As I was being belted as I was primarily based in the North I was often too busy worrying about my little group of villages rather than the tribe as a whole until all of a sudden the attacks stopped entirely shortly after the annihilation of one of their Duke's Not For Sale. As Feb.13 continued to fall apart we offered their remaining good players spots in ATTACK to honour their good fighting.

So yet again ATTACK leaves business half finished?

Well when yet another organised opponent with supposed strong players attacks you what do you do? Keep attacking the players with the same amount of worth as barbarians? Or do you fight of the "real" enemies?

I assume you are referring to Nstlk*; after the Nstlk*/YGI? merger, was war to be expected?

The impending Nstlk* engagement was much more important after their shock - to me at least - merger with YGI? whom they had been warring at the time. Although I'm no great tactician I think it was the logical step for Nstlk* to declare on ATTACK. What tribe doesn't want to be number 1?

But do you think that, at the time, they had what it takes to beat ATTACK?

I didn't see why not.

Well, let me put it to you another way: if they had not declared, were ATTACK likely to declare upon them?

No it was pretty unlikely in my opinion. Maybe it WOULD have eventuated, but ultimately this is conjecture we all know what happened and to quote Aslan in C.S. Lewis' "The Chronicles of Narnia" we never get to see what might have happened only what has (I paraphrased there).

Were you expecting ~AOW~ to join your side?

As I had no contact with ~AOW~ before Nstlk*'s declaration I had no real idea of their intentions.

Ok, so the war itself, I don't expect that much was happening on your side of the world; what were you up to?

As is the norm with all wars I was involved in I was under attack. As I was in two seperate Northern K's 34 and 35 I was being heavily engaged by Nstlk*'s northern tribesmen. As is the norm I copped a pretty fair beating. I believe that was about the time I was almost driven out of K34 and I credit not being driven out to the generosity of my fellow Shadow members. In K35 I engaged players such as Dot Taco (Who went down pretty fast) and Spaniard who ended up quitting after heavy Shadow assault. Eventually like the previous wars, after the heavy attacks on me at the beginning, all incommings quickly subsided.

It was around this sort of time that Shadow came into being, how would describe the atmosphere and the people within it?

The atmosphere was basically one of excitement. It was the gathering together of a large group of quite good players to fight an opponent who although smaller had plenty of firepower. It turned out that ~AOW~'s members were extremely compatible with ATTACK's members. All members of Shadow were again fixed upon that one goal of dominion over W27.

The Nstlk* war was over fairly soon after, did Shadow win, or did Nstlk* lose?

Shadow won. Yes Nstlk* lost many good tribesmen who either quit due to real life pressures, cowardice or because they knew their eventual fate and therefore decided to move on rather than waste time. However this is an endemic which effects every tribe. Shadow has lost good members due to real life pressures yet we have always continued on without breaking stride.

What did you expect to happen, as that war subsided?

I expected a tribe to be banded together and that they'd come at us again, getting smaller and smaller - at least in terms of skilled members - until there was nothing left. I did not however expect to be amused so very much as when the Coalition was formed. The words "Too little too late" come to mind.

So you were never worried that the Coalition might present tough resistance to Shadow?

I'm no longer sure whether I thought it would be tough resistance or whether it was wishful thinking. There have been what I'd call "pockets" of staunch resistance. But they never last, Shadow's just got much much more of whatever it just threw at you.

So what then do you see for the future of the world?

Shadow will have dominion over W27 and that time is approaching far faster than I could ever have believed.

How would you rate the tribes of the Coalition, what are your opinions on them?

A combination of things: Good players - and potentially strong leaders - quitting; inactivity as strong as the plague; incompetence and ultimately because they have been completely outclassed by the legendary tribe that is Shadow.

What about REF?

Who?

Pretty much, perhaps the most disappointing tribe on the server.

I agree

With all that said, do you think that Shadow deserves to win W27?

Name a more deserving tribe that has worked harder, fought better and worked together as seamlessly as Shadow.

That's quite a bold statement, some have suggested that Shadow has ony won because its opponents have been so woefully inept and that it has not really had to work for the victory; what would you say to that?

I would say that I'm glad that some of those people that claim we've done nothing for our victory are honest about their own playing capabilities. However we haven't had it that easy, Shadow has been constantly at war since the beginning of the world. We've wiped out such opponents who claimed rather the opposite that we were made up of incompetent players. To name some of those players: Grimlock- and LordKhal who were "conveniently" far too busy to stop us nobling their villages. Shadow has worked damn hard for the title of the best. Those that say otherwise not only have no idea what they're talking about (as they aren't in Shadow) but are also just sore losers.

So if Shadow were to suddenly disappear, what do you think would become of W27?

I think massive fighting between the remaining people would occur and massive barb noblings.

And which tribe would emerge on top?

An entirely new one, possibly IRON after shedding it's meat-shield.

And what about you, what will you do after W27?

I will probably go on to another World. But I would only join a world with friends who were also competent players. But who knows, real life may sap me of time and what is there really to achieve after being at the top?

Is there a player on W27 that you would like to fight?

To be honest not really. All the players I really wanted to fight I have fought and whether through my own skill or the help of tribesmates I have won my battles.

What's your favourite part of TW?

Definitely the camaraderie and the ability to make new friends in and outside your tribe.

And your least favourite part?

Fighting friends outside the tribe. I'm not an ultra-competitive person who has to know whether he's better or worse than his friends. I prefer fighting with my friends not against them.

Thoughts for the Week
A few words on the vicissitudes of the week and TW in general

It’s going to be a déjà vu moment this week as it’s been a while since I talked about virtues. But today, events of the week lead me onto a discussion about duty and devotion to one’s cause; sublimely embodied in the Roman virtue of ‘pietas’. The word, like others in this category is somewhat vague and perhaps only applicable when the context is understood, but its main connotations are of duty both to the gods and to the state and we might apply ‘duty to the state’ as duty to the tribe/community within the game.

I suppose the first point to consider would be: what is one’s duty to one’s tribe? Obviously this will depend on one’s esteem within the tribe; a duke has a far clearer duty than the lower echelons. Leaders have the obvious duty of leading, they are tasked with handling the direction of a tribe, maintaining its integrity and ultimately working towards the aggrandisement of the tribe; in other words: ‘pietas’. The very best leaders work for the interests of the tribe as a whole, while the short sighted or outwardly selfish use the tribe merely a means to ensure survival or accrue power.

You see, there may be many, many reasons why players decide to create tribes, they may genuinely believe that they have what it takes to win, or they may be doing it for fun, or to try something new. However, there come various points where a leader is faced with decisions that will affect the entire tribe and they must then choose to act in the interests of either the oligarchical leadership or the multitude of its members.

It is at this point where I ask for the best decision, and with such a difficult question, we could be here all day quite frankly, debating about what is best. Often however, the decision does fall into the two categories as mentioned above. If I give you an example such as the leadership of a tribe looking to leave their tribe for a place in another, you can see which category that falls into. You can also decide whether it involves any perception of duty to the tribe.

I have seen a lot of conduct on this game that isn’t honourable, but I have been guilty of it too in the past. What it does demonstrate is the fragile nature of our sense of duty. We trust our leaders to make decisions in the best interests of the whole, but all too often do we not see the interests of the whole set aside for the interests of the few? Even worse, when we come to a place when we are faced with a similar decision, do we not then disregard the trust that is placed within us?

Then again, is a notion of collective esteem a weakness within us? Imagine your tribe is faced with destruction, and you and a few others are offered an opportunity to join your would be destroyers, or remain with your tribe against certain annihilation. I can’t tell you what the best decision is; it’s a measure of character. But if your leaders are prepared to disregard the tribe in favour of their own survival, you have to wonder what the trust was worth that you put in them. Then again, some would regard a ‘last stand’ as the vestige only of an inept commander so perhaps there is a middle ground. Certainly a leader facing destruction that is offered a means to prevent it must be sorely tempted; their tribemates after gone either way, so it seems logical to them to neglect the rest of the tribe.

So, what does your faith in your leaders entail? How much do you trust them, really? Duty, devotion, trust, faith; these are just vestigial words, irrespective of context or reality, so can we really apply them to a game about struggle and conflict where we don’t even have to observe the external costs of our decisions?

I suppose the final point here is one about basic humanity. Is it easier for us to neglect the needs of those around us if we have never met them, if they are just names on a screen? And by that same token, is it that much more difficult to trust those around us if we have never met them? Simply put: what is the worth of the bonds among tribemates in a place like this?​

Stats

Top Ten Tribes
1 Shadow 73.691.392 81.562.611 56 1.456.475 8276 9.855
2 [IRON] 28.706.367 37.117.571 84 441.876 4042 9.183
3 *TKP* 10.852.713 10.852.713 40 271.318 1249 8.689
4 NOS 5.454.055 5.498.231 51 107.808 706 7.788
5 UNI 4.723.636 4.723.636 22 214.711 589 8.020
6 FOME 3.107.783 3.107.783 10 310.778 438 7.095
7 Trade 3.048.435 3.048.435 12 254.036 370 8.239
8 WT3 2.886.632 2.898.855 46 63.019 392 7.395
9 FURY 2.877.573 2.877.573 40 71.939 378 7.613
10 SAM 2.172.180 2.172.180 13 167.091 269 8.075

Top Ten Players
1 gerick6 Shadow 3.205.823 314 10210
2 Carthon II Shadow 3.108.495 323 9624
3 ftw97 Shadow 3.042.194 309 9845
4 mikestuntz Shadow 2.979.939 293 10170
5 Zarin Shadow 2.961.348 291 10176
6 BrobFellshank Shadow 2.826.631 273 10354
7 Mande1992 Shadow 2.815.722 286 9845
8 toby7304 Shadow 2.750.522 276 9966
9 filphillip Shadow 2.511.468 259 9697
10 sstarkey Shadow 2.469.494 249 9918

Comic

cool-cartoon-1023224.png


[/spoil]​
 
Last edited by a moderator:

DeletedUser

Guest
W27 Weekly: 25th October

Banner.png


[spoil]Zarin – Editor/Interview
Submissions: Lord of Bones

Shadow Shows Supremacy
At least the Coalition got some conquers…

War stats as of ~18:30

Side 1:
Tribes: Shadow
Players:

Side 2:
Tribes: [IRON] Nstlk* NOS TK FURY
Players:

Timeframe: Last week

Total conquers:

Side 1: 310
Side 2: 205
Difference: 105

image.php


Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 156
Side 2: 6
Difference: 150

image.php


Points value of total conquers:

Side 1: 2,862,121
Side 2: 1,283,808
Difference: 1,578,313

image.php


Points value of total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 1,414,677
Side 2: 53,309
Difference: 1,361,368

image.php


Nstlk*

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 2
Side 2: 0
Difference: 2

image.php


[IRON]

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 76
Side 2: 4
Difference: 72

image.php


TK

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 1
Side 2: 0
Difference: 1

image.php


NOS

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 43
Side 2: 0
Difference: 43

image.php


FURY

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 34
Side 2: 2
Difference: 32

image.php


This week, the stats tell the story and a strong week it has been indeed for Shadow, while the Coalition, despite at least gaining some conquers against them, have been utterly put to shame. Some of the more venerable players might remember a time when this was an actual conflict, where the stats meant something other than complete domination from Shadow, but that time seems to have passed.

156-6, it’s a story with one ending and one ending only it seems. The Coalition cannot possibly construe this as a victory; in fact they have got worse from last week and surely no tribe can suffer such a reckless disparity of conquers and still hope for some victory, for some saving grace.

[IRON], once touted as the rock at the centre of the Coalition, seem to account for the greatest losses even if they do make up the most conquers. And when the most conquers turns out to be just 4, might you realise that something is up? Add to that the chronic inactivity amongst supposedly top players and you have a recipe for defeat, no one can deny that.

NOS, 43-0; what good can come of that? Only perhaps that it cannot get worse. There is no hint of a turnaround here, just a tribe seemingly waiting for their death. They may look to TK, who are very much on their last legs, and how far they have come indeed and wonder whether they will suffer the safe fate too. There's not even [IRON] to run to anymore as they are in just as much trouble.

Nstlk* can boast nothing better, and neither can FURY. It’s disappointing on every front and Shadow remains as meticulous and efficient as it always has been since the decline of the Coalition. Look at the stats, the opposition has dissipated at every turn and reformed albeit weaker each time. How long can this continue? Where is the fight that was promised? Is it not testament to Shadow‘s integrity that whilst their opponents flee or hide they remain constant and unstoppable?

It begs the perennial question of why they persist. I suppose if I were on that side I would answer simply: 'it’s rude not to' and they know we’d be fighting them anyway. It was a nice idea, but I imagine some players are regretting putting their faith in it. The consensus is that it was 'too little' too late', but I cannot decide whether it is the ‘too little’ or the ‘too late’ which has done more damage.​

In Other News…

  • Plenty of reshuffling towards the latter end of the top ten tribes, but nothing official being said; by all means make what you will of the new tribe rankings over the last few days.​

Interview


Zarin
Lord of Bones

So, firstly, why do you call yourself Lord of Bones?

ahh, in the book series of ‘Dragon Lance’, Lord of Bones is the nickname of the god of the underworld - I thought that was fitting. From day one in the game I always named my villages after names of cities in ‘Dragon Lance’

Do you think that you conducted yourself according to the character in that book; did the idea of their demeanour influence how you came across to other players?

He is a noble god, in his conduct who believes in order, but he is also ruthless when it comes to people that he thinks deserve it. I believe that I have some characteristics not as eccentric but yes, some.

Anyway, where did your TW story start?

I started on world one in K54. W1 core was wonderful, everyone was a noob. After I reached the staggering size of 138K I was nobled out by a player of 900K that actually taught me a lot, I talked to him while he took my villas and he explained step by step why I was loosing and what I did wrong.

I joined W2 – was in HOT and as I was on the border of the war with TW, I was eventually nobled out.

W3 I was in STACHE.

And then I joined W6 under the name copy1234 – if someone is interested then here is the storry : http://forum.tribalwars.net/showthread.php?t=164728.


Well you certainly seem to have a lot of experience, why did you come to W27?

I am one of the 7 people that actually read the world settings and the tribe lock is the reason that I chose this world

Why did those settings interest you?

For one I hate tribe hoppers (the policy of RIM in W6 was that if you join the your points stay in RIM, with or without you); I believed that the setting would create tribes where the more experienced would teach the new players and the tribes would be more active. I tried my best and ABS finished ranked 3rd at feb.13 and merged into ATTACK, so I must have done something right :p.

Was your belief in the tribe lock fulfilled?

Not really, as I said maybe 7 people read that part of the world info... but I had fun. I ‘gathered’ players and taught them to play better and helped as much as I can and today they are great (players like kfoo, dirtfish and some others).

Do you think, on the merits of this world, that tribe lock settings wil be repeated?

Not a chance, lol

Anyway, how were the first 3 months, how was your tribe; any other famous alumni?

There were great players there: titan, atraxis...it was interesting and I enjoyed it even though others didn’t; I like to talk with people in the tribe and to players from others tribes that are around.

On the whole then, was it a good or bad experience?

Yes, a good one - I also got to know all kinds of players and I could use those connections in the future to mine for intel or to make contact (with someone throwing in a good word) with players that I need but don’t know. I built a network of information so I would know what is going on in the future.

So, what did you do as the end of the tribe lock approached?

Negotiated with Ephette about joining her, there is where our ‘love/hate relationship started.

Well, firstly, why did you wish to join Ephette's tribe?

She gave the correct answer to my question and in return I promised her my loyalty. I'll say simply that Shadow players know what I talk about (they can read it in the tribe forum) and others don’t need to know.

What role did you serve within the tribe?

Baron of internal affairs and leader of the north.

And how would you, honestly, describe the tribe as it was then; were you impressed with it, did you think that it would have what it takes?

Hmmm... ATTACK had a good foundation and an able leadership, I wouldn’t have bet at that time that it would be that great, but the potential was there; I will use this answer to congratulate eph for turning that potential into reality.

What did you think of albrew?

I would rather choose ‘no comment’ on this one.

Fair enough, though you did talk about an able leadership.

Moving on slightly, how did ATTACK perform, in your opinion, in the LA-G war?


He (albrew) was a good war leader but I just loath the kind of person he was, he didn’t fit into shadow but he did some good so I don’t want to trash him in public.

It was a sad, sad war; one of the leaders of LA-G (didmi88) beat us by an inch to the destruction of the tribe, and when players are not motivated and start a rebellion while another tribe declare doesn’t leave much chance to win.

Did ATTACK strike you as a good war tribe, or were LA-G simply abysmal?

The war contributed to ATTACK as it was an easy victory and it enebled us to learn how to work together, but yes LA-G was a disgrace

And of course, we already know your thoughts on Feb.13 declaring, but would you care to reiterate?

When you give your word, even if it is on the internet and you don’t really know or see the other person it is still your word, there are some basic unwritten rules that we choose to follow, things that we define as honesty, honor, loyalty ect…these words have vauge definitions but each and every one of us know when the line is crossed, feb 13 crossed that line...

We all do things that can be defined as dishonourable, but we do them as privately as possible because the basic instinct of people is to denounce this; you can be dishonorable but you can’t expect a tribe to follow you.

That is what destroyed feb.13 in the end; in sheer force it was more or less a tie in the beginning.

Is it not a little naive to expect your opponents to adhere to the same standards as yourself?

Why is that? These codes of conduct were created in millennia of warfare and social conduct, and are still here today, there must be some pervasive reason.

I may be naive, but I am not stupid; I may expect them to be honorable but I don’t count on it.

But these codes are not codified, they are de facto; there is no reason for a force to conduct itself following such regulations and indeed a commander cannot expect their opponents to do so because that is a naive decision. They must always expect the worst from such a situation lest they will be poorly prepared.

These codes were no doubt created because it was assumed that a pervasive code of basic conduct in warfare was mutually beneficial - it was hoped that if you gave your word to an enemy and kept it, they would keep theirs. If you come into an environment like this where reputations are worthless, where we can hide behind computer screens then there is no reprisal that can be sought; you can't rely on ethical orientation in others because, to some, in this environment, it will not matter.

You can complain all you want about dishonourable conduct, but it stands that ATTACK should have expected it and merely brushed it aside verbally on the forum, not lamented it as an excuse.


At the bottom line, ATTACK/shadow always chose to conduct itself in an honorable way despite the enemy time and again not doing so; where are those that didn’t and where is Shadow?

I do not think that you can hold basic tenets about honour as the reason why ATTACK/Shadow has endured, but I sense we are getting distracted.

How did the war actually go, I know you must have come under heavy attack in the North?


The north was attacked hard but we more or less held the line while the south nibbled Feb.13. ATTACK didn’t win that war, Feb.13 lost it and lost it due to the reasons that we discussed; ATTACK leadership kept going and motivating the tribe, mostly by conduct and personal example, while Feb.13 players saw that the actions of their leadership were not right and not honorable and just turned against them.

People are willing to accept winners even if they do things that are not too acceptable, and people are also willing to accept people that ‘did the right thing’ but failed. However, no one will accept a corrupted loser.


Do you think that Feb.13 could have succeeded in the same way that Shadow has done had it won that war?

No, but it would create a more versatile world.

By that token, would you perhaps suggest that ATTACK/Shadow has ruined the world for others?

Do you ruin a monopoly game when you have more hotels than the opponent???

I am just saying that the world never really got going, though it is not as if W27 hasn't been perhaps the most unique TW world thus far.

Anyway, with another ATTACK victory, you earned more opponents, what are your thoughts on Nstlk* and their merge with YGI??


At that time my reaction was 'so be it' and i started sending out mails to move troops to that front...

As i said, i may be naive (as we had a NAP) but not stupid...

Would you describe that as another war marred by dishonourable conduct?

Go back to where you asked about Feb.13 declaration and copy + paste and just replace Nstlk* with Feb.13 :) - same start, same conduct, better organized, same downfall.

Would you say that in this war too, Shadow did not win, but rather Nstlk* lost?

It is rare to actually WIN a war, the victory is more of an ‘out-live’ the opponent. In all my years of playing in TW, I saw 1 war that can be described as a clear cut victory, a tribe ranked 11 was killed (I mean killed) by a tribe ranked 7 in a staggering time of 12 minutes from the first nuke till the last noble; that war created a legend of a tribe that 2 years after it is gone people still talk about (I refer you to the link about RIM in W6 – http://forum.tribalwars.net/showthread.php?t=164728 – the ATA war)

So to answer your question, Shadow out-lived all of her opponents but I can’t honestly sat that we had even one clear cut victory.

What did you think about the ~AOW~ merge?

I supported that merge and it turned out to be a great decision.

Naturally, naturally; so what then was your overall impression of Shadow when it came together?

When I saw the reaction of people and how well people worked together I just took a beer sat back, watched the screen and said: “We will win this world".

That's one way of looking at it, but Shadow still had/has to face some opposition; what are you thoughts on the Coalition?

The coalition was actually the first opponent that I had any respect toward, they did the expected thing even that it was too little far too late; they declared their intentions, but they had no chance. At that time Shadow was a well oiled machine in which the players knew what can be achieved by team play, they had trust in the leaders that proved time and again that they take the right decisions and do the right thing.

The coalition was composed of a group of battered players that each tribe and each player was busy of keeping his own but safe instead of working together, the only tribe that made a progress is [IRON] that had a geographical advantage.


IRON has "fat belts" of players that were used as shields and the northern front was at that time quite battered and isolated, but as a player that had a continent long border with [IRON], (I was located on the northen border of shadow with my villas spread across the first line) I can honestly say that they were a joke, I lost 5-6 villas to the entire [IRON] tribe while I was always under attack.

Why do you think they are failing against Shadow

The Coalition as a whole, and IRON separately, have a leadership problem. They have players that do not plan and don’t have the ability to get everyone to follow them. Losing battle after battle and war after war doesn't really help the leaders to prove that they are worthy of others to listen; people do not follow losers even if they are good people. The only player I saw a spark of true leadership qualities in, willet, I killed ;P

What at least have they done well?

I will congratulate them for holding the line this long, my bet was that they would give up much sooner.

How long do you give them?

As it looks now and if Shadow will kill 2 key players (Zero and Umbada) then not more than 2 months till Shadow can claim victory over W27.

Ok, so is there a player who you would like to fight?

Maybe Zero, we were too far away and never had the chance.

And who’s your favourite personality?

Zarin - sorry I just love to enrich my vocabulary.

What is your favourite part of TW?

The politics, the friends and just talk with people from all around the world; taking villas is actually quite a distraction.

Finally, will you be returning to TW?

Probably, some day, it is hard to be cured from this addiction.

Thoughts for the Week
A few words on the vicissitudes of the week and TW in general

This week LoB offers to share some of his experience and frankly, the Coalition would benefit:

Fast, Clean and Elegant…

I play this game for those rare moments of pure ecstasy.

You are measured as a leader by the performance of the people that follow you, your job as a leader is to prove time and again that you deserve those people who follow you.

Now let us get to the topic, how does one prove this? You sit down and plan!
There are 2 kind of leaders here: those that take the decisions (this is the hard part and it is an ungrateful job as when you take the correct decision it is: ‘the way it is supposed to be’ - as all of us are super smart post factum - and if you make a mistake it is zero tolerance). ‘It takes years to build a reputation and five minutes to ruin it…’
The second kind is those that make these decisions happen, these are the ones I want to talk about. Usually the first kind is a duke and the last is a baron (but not always).

The job of a war leader (a baron/duke that is in charge of conducting warfare) is a hard and rarely rewarding one but heck, what an adrenaline rush it is when something actually goes perfectly to plan…

In chess I am willing to sacrifice a pawn, a knight or a bishop to keep the opponent in line, not to push him too much, to keep him predictable, to move my tools to position, to get a perfect position where I know the next moves of my opponent even before he saw it. When I get there I launch – I attack with all I have to push him off balance to make him make the moves I planned, when your opponent plays ‘by your rules’ it is just beautiful, the victory is sweet.

Then back to the game: how to make the magic happen?
The first move as a leader is to plan, and as every plan it involves a few steps.
1. Gather info – you need to assess what you have, what the enemy has, times, distance and how much you can trust people - in a word: your ‘resources’.
2. Analyze the info – how to put it all together, people tend to mistake this phase as the ‘planning phase but no, this is a preliminary action to see if you have enough info to work with and if not go back to phase 1.
3. Draw a sketch – make a plan, when to launch/hit, who will attack what, distractions etc; the pieces don’t fit? Go back to phase1
4. Take your plan and check it – look at it from the opposite angle and try to figure out how the enemy will react and go back to phase 3 and redo it after you have the conclusions; do it till you are satisfied.
5. Check for holes - what can make your plan fail? See what is a must and what is ‘nice to have’ if it won’t make or break your plan.
6. Plan a fail-safe mechanism – what happens if something that you didn’t expect will happen? Go back to phase 4.
7. Make the plan, as detailed as possible, go back to phase 4.
8. After you double checked your final sketch start giving out the orders, start from the key players and change the plan according to what they are capable of.
9. Give out the orders - set a launch time and wait (actively wait, ask everyone if it is all clear and be sure that everyone understands the importance of their role). Keep track of execution.
10. Sit back and enjoy your master piece, there are not many moments of this pure and refined kind of joy than to see something that you did actually work and take shape.

Now to the important bit, I will highlight some points in every stage of the process.
1. Gather info
1.1 – Ask, don’t demand; people don’t owe you anything that you haven’t already earned.
1.2 – Decide what the minimum info is that you need (for example ‘number of nukes’ is a reasonable request; ‘which are the attack villas?’ is not, but you can use that info so it wont hurt to ask but to make it clear that it is not mandatory).
1.3 – Ask for all the info, but take into consideration that you can’t exhaust everyone.
1.4 – Do research; about your enemy and your friends – there are a lot of tools for it
1.5 – It is acceptable that players don’t have troops but you can’t accept a lie, make sure that it is crystal clear that you will accept poor play and even try to help but you won’t accept people lying.

2. Analyze the info
2.1 – Use excel or any other chart/graph tool.
2.2 – Cross-reference info.
2.3 – Use maps: draw them, don’t just use the map tool, draw your info on the map; there is nothing better than graphical representation.
2.4 – Take a day and think about what you have and what you are up against before you go to step 3.

3. Draw a sketch
3.1 – Start with a clean sheet and define the goals and the method.
3.2 – Use the tools you created to hammer your plan into an executable shape.

4. Take the plan and check it
4.1 – Ask for help from a friend.
4.2- Write the expected reaction of the enemy down as they won’t be a sitting duck (you can always hope).
4.3 – Compare your conclusions with a friend’s conclusions.

5. Check for holes
5.1 – Take a break and then, with clear head, think about what you missed.

6. Fail safe
6.1 – Dukes and barons are not the key players, they are the fail safe mechanism!
6.2 – You are the only player that has no active role, you are the last and most powerful fail-safe mechanism…

7. Final plan
7.1 – When I say detailed, I mean detailed.
7.2 – The fewer the freedoms of choice you leave to the players, the
more your chance of success will grow.
7.3 – Remember: they can’t read your mind.

8. Orders to key players
8.1 – Be 100% sure that they understand and are able to execute the plan.

9. Orders
9.1 – Be polite!
9.2 – Ask, don’t demand
9.3 – Explain your choices.

10. Sit back
10.1 - Take a beer and watch the real time conquers.

Some general words about plans:
  • Remember you fight people, those people have limits; exploit those limits.
  • Do something unexpected, throw them off balance.
  • Assume that the enemy players are all at least as good as you.
  • Real fakes and fake real noble trains are the ultimate distraction.
  • Make sure that in worst case scenario, you will still leave your enemy immobilized.

Throw everything you have into one well organized, fast, clean and elegant blow and no one can stand in your way.​

Stats

Top Ten Tribes
1 Shadow 76.615.074 84.223.506 57 1.477.605 8544 9.858
2 [IRON] 29.621.326 38.849.595 86 451.739 4183 9.287
3 *TKP* 11.243.887 11.243.887 39 288.305 1284 8.757
4 FOME 4.395.003 4.395.003 16 274.688 603 7.289
5 UNI 4.089.506 4.089.506 21 194.738 513 7.972
6 GR*FM 3.664.095 3.664.095 15 244.273 452 8.106
7 Trade 3.258.854 3.258.854 10 325.885 403 8.086
8 WT3 3.150.555 3.160.361 44 71.826 415 7.615
9 NOS 2.974.141 2.974.141 40 74.354 404 7.362
10 FURY 2.439.991 2.439.991 37 65.946 323 7.554

Top Ten Players
1 gerick6 Shadow 3.389.370 332 10209
2 Carthon II Shadow 3.181.127 331 9611
3 Zarin Shadow 3.124.905 307 10179
4 ftw97 Shadow 3.079.732 313 9839
5 mikestuntz Shadow 3.018.241 296 10197
6 BrobFellshank Shadow 3.013.535 291 10356
7 Mande1992 Shadow 2.903.919 295 9844
8 toby7304 Shadow 2.856.494 286 9988
9 sstarkey Shadow 2.625.352 265 9907
10 filphillip Shadow 2.590.593 267 9703

[/spoil]​
 
Last edited by a moderator:

DeletedUser

Guest
W27 Weekly: 01st November

Banner.png


[spoil]Zarin – Editor/Interview

Stalwart Shadow Still Supreme in Spite of Slight Slip
It could only get better for the Coalition after last week

War stats as of ~12:00

Side 1:
Tribes: Shadow
Players:

Side 2:
Tribes: [IRON] NOS Nstlk* TK FURY
Players:

Timeframe: Last week

Total conquers:

Side 1: 326
Side 2: 243
Difference: 83

image.php


Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 139
Side 2: 8
Difference: 131

image.php


Points value of total conquers:

Side 1: 2,799,353
Side 2: 1,577,692
Difference: 1,221,661

image.php


Points value of total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 1,282,921
Side 2: 64,966
Difference: 1,217,955

image.php


Nstlk*

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 0
Side 2: 0
Difference: 0

image.php


[IRON]

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 78
Side 2: 7
Difference: 71

image.php


TK

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 2
Side 2: 0
Difference: 2

image.php


NOS

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 13
Side 2: 1
Difference: 12

image.php


FURY

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 45
Side 2: 0
Difference: 45

image.php


As I said above, it really was only going to get better for the Coalition after last week’s debacle. Of course 139-8 is nothing to be proud of, but it does at least show an improvement from last time. If you had to ask me why this has happened, I couldn’t tell you; it’s no doubt testament to an extra village or two being nobled back from Shadow rather than any concrete gains. Not only that, but you have to consider that the Coalition has put a significantly better number for their total conquers which is no bad thing to my mind. Al in all, it points to a slight improvement from the Coalition.

Unfortunately it’s one of those bittersweet moments where improvement still leaves you trailing hopelessly in the wake of your opponents. Admittedly, the Coalition was slightly better this week, but this week, like any other, they are buried under the weight of Shadow. And whilst they sit around internally nobling, Shadow pushes forward. Do I see any hope based on this? No; with stats like these there can still only be a single denouement and that is a Shadow victory. A lot of you might tell me that it isn’t over until it’s over, and this is quite true. However, it seems to me that the time for any ace in the hole has long since passed. And if 6 months down the line, the world has been turned upside down, at least I’ll have something to write about.

If we go through the usual suspects, it’s a lamentable state of affairs. Nstlk* we can ignore because they are mere remnants of a once worthy tribe. If I asked you to tell me where there members are on a map, you probably couldn’t do it and that is an indictment of how far they have fallen.

If we look to [IRON], we are yet again confronted with a clear picture of who is in control of that war. A small number of [IRON] conquers does not hint at any initiative or offensive action from that side whilst the storm of conquers against them demonstrates an alarming fall from grace for [IRON]. Where once things might have been equal between these two entities, now [IRON] has cracked and Shadow has capitalised.

NOS has had a better week this time around, a deficit of 12 is reasonable for this conflict. I suppose we can either put this down to stalwart defence or a change of focus for Shadow and I think I know where my money would be going for that one. The collapse of its membership has left it a ‘Shadow’ of what it once was. Their progenitor, TK, suffered grievously this week. It might have lost only 2 villages, but that was 2/3 of its total villages. Just one more to go and it will be another nail in the Coalition coffin.

Finally, we come to FURY who seem to have done the worst of any of the members this week. At least [IRON] had something to show for their losses, but FURY was unable to get anything at all from Shadow. If you are wondering why that is, I would promote apathy and inactivity as he causes of that; although FURY showed promise, it has been relegated to a collection of inactive players, let down by their allies and left to perish.

Shadow for its part has been a little quieter on the war front this week. Despite an increase in the number of total conquers, conquers against the Coalition are down. Does it represent anything significant? Of course not, some operations are no doubt drawing to a close, whilst others begin. Shadow have been efficient and ruthless as always this week and that doesn’t look set to change much.​

In Other News…

  • The forum has been updated with a very charming new look, I might have to reconsider the colouring for the interview, but we'll cross that bridge when we come to it.​

Behind the Scenes – W27 Weekly


Instead of an interview or some thoughts, I thought that I might do something a little different this week to keep readers on their toes. Usually I would be interviewing an influential or (in)famous W27 figure as well as writing my weekly musings, but I was struck by the thought that I have never examined the actual Weekly itself. This week therefore, we go behind the scenes of the Weekly itself.

Readers ask from time to time about the Weekly and the mechanics of how it is put together as well as why I spend so much time each week to produce it. I assume many are curious to know what motivates a man to give up several hours over the course of each week to put something like this together seemingly with limited gratification. Your questions will be answered. And of course, you might just get one or two insights into what will be arriving in the forum over the next couple of months.

I suppose we start with the most interesting question of all and that is of course the ‘why?’. A Weekly newsletter like this is not unique to this forum, nor is it endemic; it seems to be a privilege enjoyed by some world forums and they come in various styles with varying levels of detail as well as chronicling differing time periods – weekly, bi-weekly or even monthly. The purpose of the item itself is to inform the community of world events. Obviously, not everyone will know that one tribe is declaring upon another, nor will they necessarily know how the war is progressing and a newsletter keeps the community up to date and aware of the issues affecting the world. As well as providing news, some offer interviews to allow a community to get to know those who are affecting the course of the world; others offer items of comedic value or for discursive value in much the same way that a real newspaper might do so.

Indeed, a newsletter is also useful to either a newcomer or alien who is not familiar with the events of the world and it saves them having to trawl through a considerable amount of forum banter to ascertain the news, where even then it may not be obvious. In addition, a newsletter offers the author their own chance to subtly affect the world; never forget that you are being told that things are the way the author sees them or at least wants you to believe that they see them; their view may be far from what is correct, or if there is even such a thing as objective truth, but more on that in next week’s thoughts.

So why still does a person or persons take it up themselves to put together such a publication? I can’t answer for the other authors, but I can offer my reasons for putting this together. To do so, I want to be honest - I have always been a fan of transparency from those in positions of responsibility and as readers of this publication you deserve to know what possesses me to write it.

In all honesty, I had several reasons for choosing to do it. Firstly, I wanted a little more acclaim, to make myself more visible to the community and to acquire that most strange of things – fame. And it wasn’t just fame either, I was looking for respect too; respect for a person who writes well and who offers to do something relatively altruistic for a community of people, because I hoped people would respect that. I knew that if I wrote the Weekly, I would be guaranteed a place in the lore and history of TW, well W27, and ensure that my name would not easily be forgotten.

In its mandate too I saw an opportunity for another facet of Shadow domination. I never intended and never will intend to turn it into a mere Shadow propaganda engine; I’ll admit that I do have a bias towards Shadow, but that’s part of who I am and no one has offered to mediate. Instead, I wanted to at least have a hand in it to prevent it being used against us. And if I could assert some level of control over what the community received of events, then I saw that as no bad thing; it’s a position of power after all, however subtle. Finally, I enjoy writing and expressing my opinions on things. Did I do it purely out of the goodness of my heart? Honestly, no; nothing in this world is ever done as such.

That’s why I write it. As to the providence of the format and why for example I like to impose my musings upon you on a Weekly basis is not really a mystery. I did not write the original, so I always had a pro forma to adhere to, and it began with the idea of news with an interview to give context and build up a picture of the world through the eyes of the influential figures. It also had comics for some light hearted relief from the stresses of TW. Over time I added a smaller section for other news that wouldn’t make an entire article to let players know about the smaller events going on; I also added a statistics section which serves to chronicle the rise and fall of major players and tribes week by week (something that I’ll be glad of later). Finally, I have a section for my own peripatetic thoughts. That’s probably a rather unique section to W27 (don’t all cheer at once) and you have probably realised that I enjoy writing for the sake of having an excuse to use orotund vocabulary and I like the sound of my own voice (or whatever the literary equivalent is). Fortunately, that section is not just about that either, I genuinely enjoy discussion about the wider concepts of TW and the microcosms it presents; it definitely has merit on a psychological level as well as a moral and ethical one. And sometimes the Weekly needs a spot of padding and my ability to pose more questions that I started out to answer is useful for that.

With the raison d’être dealt with as well as what goes into the Weekly, we move onto the machinations of its construction. It takes more work than you’d probably expect to compile this and I’ll admit that it can be tough to juggle it throughout the week; hence the late Saturday nights and delayed Monday editions. By the time I post a Weekly, I have my ideas for the next one in motion: I draw up a list of possible interviewees based on current events and try to pick out a nice variety of tribal affiliations, positions and locations as well as mix up the personalities from week to week to try to keep it flowing. The interview is by far the most time consuming part of the Weekly, but probably the most interesting. I used to mail back and forth with questions, but recently I have taken to skype to reflect a more natural interview style. It’s also the part that is probably missing the most, and that’s mainly due to me forgetting about the Weekly (yes, completely true) or just not getting the interview started early enough.

As well as the interview, we have the main substance of the Weekly which is the news itself, dominated in recent times by Shadow and the Coalition. This bit I have to leave until the Sunday itself so as to be up to date on the stats and the commentary. It is of course difficult to commentate as a high ranking member of Shadow though I do try to be reasonably balanced. The hardest part here is in fact coming up with a meaningful headline.

Most of the other bits explain themselves, the other bits of news I try to keep brief and objective and the stats are just a little something to chronicle things. The comic section is usually left out due to my comic makers having left and I usually don’t have comics at the top of my agenda so it usually slips my mind. I have explained my thoughts section as something for you to take as you will. You might ignore it as a little off-putting due to my style, or you might take the thoughts to heart and really think about them. Or maybe you just enjoy seeing what esoteric words I throw in from week to week.

All in all, a Weekly will usually take 4-6 hours to complete. Much of that is taken up by the interview, particularly if done via skype, the coding of all of those questions and responses is a nightmare. Thankfully I can do it during the week and I can write my thoughts when I have a free moment, and I do of course have Saturday to prepare.

You’ll probably want to know why it is worth spending that much time on. I know I offered my reasons, but those were my reasons for taking it up. Would they sustain it when I lost faith in the publication? No they would not. The thing which surprised me most was the satisfaction I gained from producing it week after week. I don’t know what it is about it that contents me, but it’s that warm feeling inside when people come back and say how much they enjoy it. It’s about the pride I know take in it and the fact that people read it makes it worthwhile. It’s a genuine pleasure to serve the community in this way.

Finally, I have some FAQs that I’ll answer. Some of these are recurring questions, or surmised ones, as well as providing me a means to answer questions I have not already done so.

How long does it take to complete?

Depending on the amount of news and how I do the interview, 4-6 hours is reasonable. I’ll try to do a similar amount of work each week, so if I feel that an interview is particularly good, I’ll be lighter with my thoughts or vice versa. I also have to consider my own time constraints and whether or not others submit items for me.

What is the longest you have spent on a Weekly?

Some have taken me a very long time when an interview has been good, coupled with me having a lot to say. I’d reckon at a time around the 8 or even 10 hour mark for the longest but I can’t say.

Which is your favourite/least favourite part?

My favourite part is the interview, it’s always nice to see the thoughts of others on the events of the game and scrutinise other perspectives. I also enjoy writing my musings and the prior discussions I have with friends that lead to them.

My least favourite part is probably the intricate coding and editing itself. I can’t get everything and after the tenth edit it becomes really tiresome.

Do you have a favourite edition?

Not especially, I have some that I am more proud of than others, but if people enjoy it then I consider it a successful Weekly. Some are better than others I shall admit, and I have some favourite interviews, but I can’t play favourites so I’ll keep quiet on that.

Will you keep the Weekly going until the end of the world?

Hopefully I shall be able to; as long as there is news I shall report it. If the world stagnates then it may well become redundant, but it will probably continue for the sake of continuity. The only other issue I can see if of the ‘W27 Blog’, which I am considering taking on instead of the Weekly. It will still be the same format if possible, just under a different name, but we’ll have to see on that. Indeed, I might even just blog a link to the Weekly, and if that isn’t cheeky, I don’t know what is.

Would you consider doing it again for your next world??

That’s a tough call. I know that with the new system of blogs, it’s easier than ever and I could cut down the material to meet my time demands. It’s about balancing my time and delivering something meaningful and whilst it may seem easy at first, you don’t know how busy the world will be, or your own life. Also, part of me feels that I should stand aside and let others have a chance to do it, so I shall most likely only be repeating this if no one else wishes to (or my reputation precedes me). All in all, I wouldn’t mind my Sundays back.

I think that just about wraps it up folks; I hope you enjoyed a slightly different Weekly. I did promise an insight into future editions and indeed my future works for the forum. Seeing as it is coming up to W27’s birthday (yup, I just anthropomorphised it) I felt that I should write something to look at the events of this world one year on. Seeing as I already do this, I am happy to do that, though by all means get in touch if you want to help or do it yourself. The Weekly itself will no doubt remain unchanged, but will be a compact edition due to my time being spent on the former publication.

Seeing as this word is drawing to a close (hopefully) there will also be a W27 history to commemorate this world which again I expect to write, though that will be coming much later. It has been planned already, but is very much under construction.

As to future Weeklys, I am keen to explore some other perspectives in the next few weeks, so leaders of tribes outside the limelight could well be receiving invitations for interviews. As always, I’ll be tackling a range of TW issues in my own fashion each week too. I may also look into trialling some new sections for the Weekly to keep you on your toes (suggestions welcome) and there could be a very interesting Christmas edition in the works, but you’ll have to wait and see on that. It’s been a pleasure thus far and as long as you keep reading, I’ll keep writing.​

In my own style, I’ll finish with a quotation: ‘The most important service rendered by the press and the magazines is that of educating people to approach printed matter with distrust.’ – Samuel Butler

Stats

Top Ten Tribes
1 Shadow 77.988.910 85.325.607 57 1.496.940 8702 9.805
2 [IRON] 28.512.155 37.070.521 82 452.080 4008 9.249
3 *TKP* 10.027.745 10.027.745 36 278.548 1172 8.556
4 FOME 4.811.477 4.811.477 19 253.236 657 7.323
5 GR*FM 4.528.188 4.528.188 20 226.409 551 8.218
6 UNI 4.195.464 4.195.464 19 220.814 521 8.053
7 WT3 3.897.869 3.930.822 49 80.221 528 7.445
8 NOS 2.937.816 2.943.650 43 68.457 403 7.304
9 Trade 2.679.304 2.679.304 9 297.700 348 7.699
10 FURY 1.908.466 1.908.466 33 57.832 261 7.312

Top Ten Players
1 gerick6 Shadow 3.480.481 341 10207
2 Zarin Shadow 3.204.214 314 10205
3 Carthon II Shadow 3.188.254 331 9632
4 ftw97 Shadow 3.164.417 322 9827
5 mikestuntz Shadow 3.072.026 301 10206
6 BrobFellshank Shadow 3.048.149 294 10368
7 toby7304 Shadow 3.023.319 301 10044
8 Mande1992 Shadow 3.013.603 305 9881
9 sstarkey Shadow 2.775.627 281 9878
10 Deciphered Shadow 2.727.741 275 9919

[/spoil]​
 
Last edited by a moderator:

DeletedUser

Guest
W27 Weekly: 08th November

Banner.png


[spoil]Zarin – Editor/Interview
sweeney2kaii8 - Comic

The Light in the Shadow
The North forms its last stand against Shadow

I have been hoping for some big news to break the deadlock and I really did not expect this. It seems that the active elements in [IRON] have reformed with elements of UNI to create a large entity in the North by the name of LIGHT. There are no prizes for guessing why they chose the name, but far from waging a frenzied war against Shadow, there has been something of an inauspiciously calm grace period. When you consider too that they have nobled far more villages from [IRON] than Shadow, you do have to hope that this will not become some sort of joke and that there will be a glorious last stand, rather than a slow dispersion of players.​

The stats thus far (for the last week):

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 26
Side 2: 1
Difference: 25

image.php


It’s not exactly the best start for the tribe, but I am sure that this is merely a time for them to settle and we await some fierce fighting which W27 has not seen for some time. You can see from the maps that LIGHT is very much a northern tribe and has a massive frontline which may well be a disadvantage when Shadow can bring its superior manpower to bear. It also seems to be a case of these players showing their hand and placing all the active players in one tribe and basically pointing them out as the targets, effectively allowing Shadow to ignore [IRON] and all the players within it. The potential for support from those players is lost, but one perhaps assumes that most were being sat anyway.

On the plus side, it should help streamline the tribe and give a clear idea of who is worth supporting and can be counted upon. The implication of UNI also allows them to bolster their Western front which has suffered a relentless Shadow advance. In the East and around central areas, [IRON] players provide a buffer between the two giving LIGHT a chance to consolidate and to regroup whilst Shadow work their way through in places.

Crucially however, LIGHT has not gained any new allies, UNI were too far away to be bothered by Shadow anyway and that will probably remain so and there seems to be no one left to join up in the North. The term last stand probably is apt, though you can probably count upon the formation of yet another tribe before the end.

As for the Coalition, well I think that this really does spell the beginning of the end for it. It has few active elements left with LIGHT having picked many of the best and brightest. It was a glorious ideal, but doomed to fail it seems. The reasons why are something to be discussed in the fullness of time.

Who knows? We could be about to usher in a new era of dominance where the gurus of LIGHT bring the world from the darkness and into the light. Another chapter closes as [IRON] is crippled by the loss of players and a new one begins and all that is left to decide is whether this is the end of the beginning or the beginning of the end.​

Coalition Crippled
The loss of players to LIGHT leaves the Coalition in dire straits

Shadow, the sapient and sedulous saviours, stand among subdued seditionists, seemingly supreme. Their enemies: subjugated, surrendered to such superb strength; their soldiers: as swift as they are stout; their solicitude: supremacy; their salacity: sated; their solution: slaughter; their strength: unsurpassed. No mere sham, but a scheme seen successful. Their sheer success testament to their steadfast stance. Such serene style, synonymous with their surreal skill, no suspicious synchronism, but a sure show of sublimity. Surely submission remains for saboteurs and spies, dissidents of their staggering status, such a sorry state of affairs, scheduled for suppression amid the strategy of their subjugator. It’s sobriquet: Shadow…​

Side 1:
Tribes: Shadow
Players:

Side 2:
Tribes: Nstlk* [IRON] TK NOS FURY
Players:

Timeframe: Last week

Total conquers:

Side 1: 362
Side 2: 73
Difference: 289

image.php


Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 102
Side 2: 1
Difference: 101

image.php


Points value of total conquers:

Side 1: 2,970,176
Side 2: 409,388
Difference: 2,560,788

image.php


Points value of total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 916,370
Side 2: 8,441
Difference: 907,929

image.php


Nstlk*

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 1
Side 2: 0
Difference: 1

image.php


[IRON]

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 45
Side 2: 1
Difference: 44

image.php


TK

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 0
Side 2: 0
Difference: 0

image.php


NOS

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 7
Side 2: 0
Difference: 7

image.php


FURY

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 49
Side 2: 0
Difference: 49

image.php


This may be the last week that the Coalition is discussed as an entity; it has dispersed to many places and is little of the entity it once was. A single conquer this week is all they have to their name and a seemingly quiet Shadow reply with over 100. It is a sorry state of affairs indeed for the Coalition, having been abandoned by many of their players to form LIGHT.

What remains for this group is hard to say, they are struggling to stay afloat in terms of player activity and under the weight of Shadow. Perhaps the focus will shift to LIGHT, but one doubts it, and even if they do, these tribes’ numbers are still inflated by inactive players. Not one of them seems to be a threat to Shadow any more and their early days seems like an impossibly distant time in the past.​

In Other News…

  • The tribal rankings get quite a shake up with the demise of UNI and [IRON] and the formation of some small tribes.​

Interview


Zarin
TarynAshley

So where did you start TW?

W4, W6, and W10 all at the same time...not sure why, didn't know where I wanted to start. But W10, my son and I were co-dukes

So how did 3 worlds at the same time go?

Too much... I was so unhappy with leadership in the first two worlds, it was not hard to give them up for W10 where I lead...and of course, I am a good leader, so it was where I wanted to be... ;)

Are you still playing there?

The tribe is a rim tribe. I stay only to chat with friends there, but not playing. Just log on every few days to answer mail.

So what compelled you to join W27?

As I said, one of my tribemates begged me to keep playing. I said I would never play again. He kept at it, he was on W27 at almost 100K when I finally came. I was going to be his warehouse only....I was going to be in a tribe of one...me. My son joined as well, in his own tribe. And we just grew... eventually merged. Did not recruit, but took in neighboring players only that asked to join us.

So who is this tribemate?

pallysrange. He was too far away for us to be in the same tribe. So we just chatted and still do.

What did you think of the tribe lock?

I was not here when that took place. I do not think I would have liked it though. Apparently others did not as well. I have been told that is why there are so many barbs? Is that true?

I don't think that many people were aware of the settings and didn't give them a chance. Also, without any of your neighbours as tribemates, it could be frenzied at times.

So how far in did you join?


In March...don't know when the world started.

How was the world looking to you when you joined?

(World began Nov 13)


Well, I was surrounded by 500 point barbs. In W10, I was surrounded by players and very few barbs, so you started fighting immediately. Here, I decided to keep a nice tight cluster....no stress...to not piss off anyone until I was large enough to handle them....so I started nobling barbs...one after another. Pretty uneventful and I felt kind of like a noob, instead of a warrior. But I also did not care what others thought. I had just finished fighting for nearly 5 months, with attacks everyday, sometimes 1000 or more incoming a day. It was actually kind of nice to just log on and take care of building and log off.

Seeing as it was after tribe lock, you could join tribes as normal; which was your first?

On W27 it was Freedom, and my son was GRIM... so when we merged, it became Grim Freedom. Some of our mates in W10 have joined us here, but just a few.

What do you see for the future of GR*FM?

Well I never really intended to be one of the top tribes when I came here. As I said, it was just for fun and a place to chat. We have some really good players, and newer players that are eager to learn how to build the right kind of villages and how to attack and defend. So it is a fun, new time for the tribe. Everyone is really into it and expanding and getting along.

Where we go in the future depends on the tribes around us. In W10 my tribe was spread out over 8 non-adjoining continents. It made war difficult. The players being attacked were supported by the other players, but the Ks far away did not want to noble out of their K. You can not win a war without nobling the enemy, so it became frustrating and players became inactive...and inactivity will kill a tribe.

So here, we will stay in a tight group and expand from there. We are not bent on world domination, so we will not actively pursue taking out other tribes. But we also are not afraid to fight and will take what comes our way. The main thing is to keep it as a game and not take it personally. If we are happy and active, the points will take care of themselves.


It's certainly a good ethos, what do you think of a tribe like Shadow, who are here for world domination?

Everyone has their own agenda. There is enough room to grow for a long time in this world, but if tribes like Shadow want to cut that short, then they can try. I think every tribe needs friends in other tribes. You could argue if you are on the top and so much larger than everyone else that you don't. I am not here to say that is not true as well. Diplomacy is sometimes false too. An ally can be an enemy the very next day if there is no honor. So, Shadow is doing a great job growing. The tribes that decided to join forces and attack Shadow could not stop them, but only gave them targets to fuel their tribe further. You cannot take lots of tribes and put it under one leadership. Getting the leaders on the same page, let alone the players is a nightmare. Coordination becomes nearly impossible. That's why I would not join the coalition. It was doomed to fail.

And if you print this, they will all hate me, but it is just my opinion and I have seen it before. Two way mergers don't work most of the time unless one tribe is definately the underdog.... 5 or 6 tribes... impossible.


You say that the Coalition was doomed to fail, but what else could have been done?

Probably nothing. Shadow had a head start with good players that knew what they were doing. Most of the other players were noobs. I have taken in some good players, that have been playing in this world for awhile and they don't have a clue what they are doing. Their leaders were teenagers that did not know what they were doing. There is no way they could be successful against a tribe like Shadow. It was a pipe dream.

Do you think Shadow will win W27?

Oh, tough one......well yeah. I am a good player (not to pat myself on the back), but I could never catch up. You have too much momentum and no one will hold you back...UNLESS your players start getting bored and inactive... but that is up to the leadership to keep things fresh.

However, I might be able to catch up individually...if I have enough time... ;)


Somehow I think that Shadow will come for you too before that time. How do you think that war might go?

It would be interesting. You guys are spread out and we are very tight clustered. If we stay calm, we could hold on for quite a while. Shadow would take very heavy losses. But eventually, your manpower would overcome us.

In W10, the tribe we were fighting were over 3X our size, and IF I had not been betrayed by my barons, we would have held on until another tribe got involved. In fact, if I had had less than 2 weeks, we would still be there the way things played out. However, the world is old and boring. CTRL (Control) is what Shadow will become. Or maybe already has. It just was not fun anymore.


Do you think that things would be different if you had joined the Coalition?

Yeah, I would be fighting Shadow. Different for Shadow, probably not. The tribe and me, as an individual, have grown substantially since the start of the coalition. But as I said before, just adding more tribes would not change the outcome.

So you think that if every player had declared upon them, Shadow still would have won?

yes... without good leadership and good coordination, you cannot win a war. Add to that the inexperience in fighting that most of the players on W27 have, and it makes it worse. Also, there is lots of inactivity in this world. I don't hear other players making statements that they are on 4, 5 or more hours each day. When you are fighting, you have to be much more active than when you are just growing. That is, if you plan to retaliate.

How do you think that the Coalition has performed?

poorly... they try one thing, it does not work, they try another. Too many chiefs and not enough indians. I talk to the players and they say their leaders got them into this and now they are done. Many have already given up and are planning on just starting in another world. And the leaders, many of them have just left the tribe and their players, a cowards way out.

I don't see you fighting, just hiding from Shadow.

Yeah, you could say that. But as you said earlier, Shadow will find us and then we will fight. It is not like you can escape it, but you can try and be prepared. I am not hiding or going anywhere...you can see where I am.

But perhaps it would have been better to fight when Shadow was distracted; you might have stood a chance then, or at least made something of your tribe.

Made something of my tribe? I am very proud of my tribe. We are doing very well for being so new. We will be fighting with friends when we fight the Shadow players around us, as we have gotten aquainted with them. I personally have nothing against Shadow and there are very few villages presently close to our cluster (and they have been taken over recently). As I said, we are not branching out here and there. So if we were to attack Shadow, it would have been long distance. I would rather make them fight long distance and wipe out their troops as they find our villages. I have always enjoyed fighting defensively.

What do you think of LIGHT?

Honestly, I don't know a great deal about it. Correct me if I am wrong, but Light came from IRON? It is the offensive side of IRON to take out Shadow (I love all the fun names...LIGHT against Shadow...lol). To divide a tribe into offensive and defensive I think shows your hand. I cannot understand the advantage, in fact, I see only disadvantages.

Do you think that Shadow deserves to win W27?

Deserves...from a moral standpoint? If I were to be one of the first to start in a world and brought lots of good players with me with the single intent of dominating a world... I guess with all that forward thinking I should get the prize. Do I think world domination is fair? No. I do not think that it is necessary for one tribe to have it all. But this is Tribal WARS, and that is the general goal in this game. Shadow is just playing it to the nth degree. It is fine and there should be tribes trying to stop it from happening. I am just too much of a realist and got to this world too late.

What have you gained from TW?

Loss of about 18 months of my life when playing on W10....some good friends...and some further realization that when people are not accountable for their actions (no one will really know who they are, they will lie, cheat, and steal to get what they want..............Good and Bad.

Is there a player on W27 whom you would like to fight?

Never gave it much thought, you might be interesting. There are not many players close enough to me to give me that option...and as I said, I have had my fill of long distance fighting.

Would you do anything differently on W27 if you had your time over again?

No, I don't believe I would. I may be more aggressive at the start, because from March until July I did not do much...but I don't regret what I cannot change.

Where will you be going after W27, will you be returning to TW?

I don't think so. I can still chat with my friends on Skype/MSN, whatever and there are so many video games I want to play that I never have the time for. I also love animes and movies, and I never seem to have time to fit them in either. So, I think W27 will be the last world.... of course, life is full of change and it is true that you should never say never. I was not going to come here... it is amazing what you will do for a good friend...lol...

Thoughts for the Week
A few words on the vicissitudes of the week and TW in general

Truth. What do you think that this word really means? Do you think that it exists as an empirical thing, an objective and concrete law, or is it merely a concept, a blur, an anachronism destined for a world without cynicism, an assumption moulded by perspective? Do we take something to be true, no because we have proof of its verity, but rather that we have not questioned it, that we know no different or indeed our perspective demands it?

Last week I gave an insight into the machinations of this publication, and I mentioned, among other things, the elusive notion of truth, and the problems any author encounters in recounting events. It is something that plagues every instance of historical and indeed contemporary source of information. I am talking of course about bias, about the loss of objective truth and about the search for it. Is it any surprise that the Roman Goddess and embodiment of truth – ‘Veritas’ – was said to be so elusive. Analogous perhaps, but it is nonetheless a demonstration of the reasoning that truth is so hard to find.

Something which is objectively true is said to be so because it is true regardless of the judgements of the observer and is true in all cases. So, surely, you say, some things have elements of indisputable truth to them? And true, there are some things that are seemingly always true, 1 + 1 is always going to be 2 in a decimal number system, it is an inherent part of its definition after all.

But consider something where the line is more vague; how about history? If history is the study of past events, we are therefore led to assume that one such version of past events exists. So why is it that some events are taught completely differently? The American War of Independence is taught completely differently in America than it is in Britain. If I asked historians from both sides what happened and why, they could give me reasonable accounts, but they would doubtless be completely different. This leads one to question what exactly happened, what the truth of the matter is and frankly, can we know that?

Something as simple as placing a start and finish on historical events is difficult, it is nigh on impossible to ascertain the beginning of every cause for something or to define the point where it has ceased to be relevant. When Napoleon remarked that history was simply a set of events that are agreed upon, he was quite correct because despite its quest for universal truth such a thing seems impossible.

So I want to ask you about the things that you accept to be true. Do you look at the world around us and remark about the effects of gravity or the shape of the Earth? Well, when I tell you that gravity is still an incredibly difficult concept to the modern physicist and that the Earth is not a perfect sphere, you might begin to wonder about the veracity of things. Scientists might tell you that things are true, that there are laws that cannot be broken and to the best of our knowledge these are true, but the concepts are abstract. You probably remember Pythagoras’ Theorem, it works right? Of course it does, because it is based in an abstract concept. If I told you that computer = chair, you’d probably tell me that I were a lunatic, but if in my hypothetical system that is an inherent law, it’s true to me. Mathematical proof is self determining, it uses itself to prove itself in a tautological fashion; thus it is true self referentially. In other words, I can take a single set of true statements and construct an infinite number of others and suggest that they are all true because of the first set. Ask if the first set are true and you have an interesting question indeed. You’ll probably get one of two answers: an elaborate proof of mathematical concepts which attempt not to use maths lest they should be a priori and ultimately suffer the same questioning on veracity that the original principles suffered; or you will simply be told that they are inherent to the definition of maths. See the problem?

For the theist, the answer is quite simple; to them, an ultimate truth exists and they accept this as completely true, being theists. Ask an atheist and we have a difficult question about anything being true. You see, things can be true only because we make them. Do you even see the irony in setting a definition of truth? Or indeed the irony in telling someone, as a truth, that nothing is true?

You probably think I am trying to lose you in deep philosophical mumbo jumbo, in intricacy and semantics that dissolve the point of what I was trying to say and that you didn’t really anticipate on a Sunday, so I’ll give you a simple statement and I want you to think to yourself whether it is true or not: ‘Zarin wrote the Weekly’. Well, considering Zarin is only a representation of someone else, he is not true, the person behind him wrote this. But even if we ignore that, this is not a new discussion or debate, it has quotations, parts of other theories and discussions that have gone before so I didn’t write all of it, nor in fact did I write it, I typed it. So does all that change the fact that someone put all this together, that it was made? Surely somewhere there must be something true, something defined, not just a shade of semantic or philosophical grey?

But I think I’ll leave that one to you, make a true statement that isn’t a tautology or a priori, that is true regardless of perception. I can prove that one exists if we consider the statement: ‘Nothing is true’. If this statement is true, then there is something that is true: the statement itself. If the statement is false, there must be truths out there.

Finally, I shall examine the main event. I digressed at quite a deep tangent and we need to consider why I really brought this up. And that is in the chronicling of past events and the declaration thereof. Each week, I tell you what has happened in the world, and you entrust me with a responsibility to tell the truth. But do I? Of course I do not. I tell you the events according to me, how I see them and how I want them to be seen by you. I am human, I cannot account for everything that has happened, I miss things and I misinterpret things. Even something as basic as the stats can lie to you, are those active conquers or retakes, and were they valuable villages, or isolated outposts? Do they account for what percentage of the tribe was lost or whom they were taken from?

The quotation I gave last week holds this week as it does every week and for everything you ever read. Is it any wonder that Herodotus, the man regarded in the West as the ‘Father of History’, was also called the ‘Father of Lies’? Information is a tool, you are told what to think; not necessarily what is true. Look at George Orwell’s 1984, the way that information is presented to the people, ‘Doublethink’ and ‘We've always been at war with Eastasia’. Look at the war in Iraq and even look at the Weekly itself. I am not saying that media are redundant, merely that you should be careful with what you accept to be true.

This is another one of those times where I never really answered anything, just gave you more thoughts, but it’s more fulfilling this way. Einstein was right when he remarked that the world we have made, as a result of the level of thinking we have done thus far, creates problems we cannot solve at the same level of thinking at which we created them and while you’re thinking about that, I’ll leave you with a quotation from a favourite film of mine; make of the words what you will:​

My father was a writer. You would've liked him. He used to say that artists use lies to tell the truth, while politicians use them to cover the truth up.” – Evey Hammond – ‘V for Vendetta

Stats

Top Ten Tribes
1 Shadow 80.416.384 87.466.492 57 1.534.500 8999 9.720
2 LIGHT 29.714.937 35.649.907 72 495.138 3815 9.345
3 *TKP* 11.167.359 11.167.359 38 293.878 1301 8.584
4 FOME 5.177.255 5.177.255 21 246.536 687 7.536
5 GR*FM 5.020.367 5.020.367 20 251.018 600 8.367
6 WT3 4.168.155 4.209.019 50 84.180 569 7.397
7 [IRON] 3.263.104 3.263.104 16 203.944 384 8.498
8 NOS 3.047.103 3.052.028 42 72.667 409 7.462
9 Trade 3.006.229 3.006.229 9 334.025 371 8.103
10 Dawn 1.876.985 2.063.933 84 24.571 417 4.949

Top Ten Players
1 gerick6 Shadow 3.583.083 352 10179
2 Zarin Shadow 3.307.309 324 10208
3 ftw97 Shadow 3.247.631 330 9841
4 Carthon II Shadow 3.234.926 336 9628
5 mikestuntz Shadow 3.220.805 321 10034
6 toby7304 Shadow 3.151.712 315 10005
7 BrobFellshank Shadow 3.131.671 302 10370
8 Mande1992 Shadow 3.130.817 316 9908
9 sstarkey Shadow 2.917.892 299 9759
10 filphillip Shadow 2.900.731 312 9297

Comic

cool-cartoon-1106148.png


cool-cartoon-1106617.png


[/spoil]​
 
Last edited by a moderator:

DeletedUser

Guest
W27 Weekly: 15th November

Banner.png


[spoil]Zarin – Editor/Interview
sweeney2kaii8 - Comic

No Surprise From Shadow
The war continues as it always has done despite new tribal configurations

I have decided to keep all of Shadow’s opposition in one topic just for the sake of keeping it all tidy and calling it Coalition this, new enemy that etc. You’ll get the idea as we go along.​

LIGHT

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 32
Side 2: 2
Difference: 30

image.php


Nstlk*

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 0
Side 2: 0
Difference: 0

image.php


[IRON]

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 22
Side 2: 0
Difference: 22

image.php


NOS

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 4
Side 2: 0
Difference: 4

image.php


FURY

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 35
Side 2: 0
Difference: 35

image.php


What did you hope to achieve LIGHT? I didn’t especially agree with the initial premise, well maybe in some ways I did, but I was at least expecting something a little different this week. I look down that conquers list, and I see a lot of LIGHT and [IRON] conquers, but only a couple of Shadow and it beggars belief that you think that you will win the war by doing such. Your LIGHT will burn itself out if you keep that up.

Elsewhere, I took TK out of the stats because they only have a single 114 point player so they were not worth worrying about. Nstlk* too seem to have fallen off of the Shadow agenda. [IRON] have suffered grievously from Shadow, but have come off worse it seems from LIGHT attacks.

NOS too seem to have fallen far recently, with members gradually slipping away, and FURY have struggled this week on a front that does not seem to be relenting despite the larger enemies elsewhere.

So what does it all mean? Well I’d say that the writing is on the wall this week, LIGHT haven’t made much of an impact and the other members are sliding into defeat. Maybe if they stopped internal and barb nobling so much, they might put up a fight.

I suppose one thing to comment upon this week is that Shadow has been rather quiet, testament to complacency or maybe a cheeky holiday, who knows? Whatever the case, Shadow is way out ahead for the moment.​

Whisperings about WT3

All of this courtesy of sweeney:

Side 1:
Tribes:
Players: sweeney2kaii8 blackomega
Side 2:
Tribes: WT3
Players:
Timeframe: Last week

Total conquers against opposite side:
Side 1: 3
Side 2: 9
Difference: 6
image.php


Points value of total conquers against opposite side:
Side 1: 14,938
Side 2: 75,930
Difference: 60,992
image.php


This is by no means a war, yet. Though it could be the start of somthing, for some reason WT3 have targeted blackomega, I for one have tried to salvage a little bit of revenge - will my tribe follow me up? I don't know for certain. Some may say that WT3's move was stupid, because LIGHT are so much bigger but, I suppose, we have Shadow to deal with too.

Who knew what was going through the heads of [ally]WT3[/ally]'s leadership when they attacked blackomegaThey may of picked on the wrong tribe to mess with? Who knows?​

Side 1:
Tribes: *TKP*
Players:
Side 2:
Tribes: WT3
Players:
Timeframe: Last week

Total conquers against opposite side:
Side 1: 20
Side 2: 0
Difference: 20
image.php


Points value of total conquers against opposite side:
Side 1: 221,278
Side 2: 0
Difference: 221,278
image.php


*TKP* have been attacking WT3 also, but only one member, pleblanc- but the question is, will they stop here? Or take out WT3's members one by one? Who can tell?, with *TKP* to worry about, its seems WT3 bitten off more than they can chew, they await some sort of counter from LIGHT for what they've done to blackomega, at this point I cannot see that this week will be most enjoyable for WT3 members, their leadership may have let them down, only time with tell.
This could be the start of WT3 undoing…​

In Other News…

  • Happy Anniversary to everyone first and foremost! I took the liberty of compiling a brief history of W27 events which is up for your perusal and augmentation. Where has it gone eh?​


  • The nice banner for the Weekly has disappeared, looks like we’ll have to replace that one, so that says competition time to me!

Stats

Top Ten Tribes
1 Shadow 82.628.928 90.445.792 59 1.532.980 9329 9.695
2 LIGHT 29.961.750 37.247.048 77 483.728 3991 9.333
3 *TKP* 10.986.194 10.986.194 37 296.924 1265 8.685
4 FOME 6.341.974 6.341.974 21 301.999 803 7.898
5 GR*FM 5.495.849 5.495.849 21 261.707 659 8.340
6 WT3 4.446.583 4.500.539 49 91.848 614 7.330
7 Trade 3.480.936 3.480.936 10 348.094 435 8.002
8 NOS 2.858.266 2.858.266 35 81.665 365 7.831
9 Dawn 2.117.756 2.295.412 76 30.203 439 5.229
10 [IRON] 1.483.446 1.483.446 9 164.827 162 9.157

Top Ten Players
1 gerick6 Shadow 3.609.903 354 10197
2 ftw97 Shadow 3.379.004 343 9851
3 Zarin Shadow 3.370.641 330 10214
4 mikestuntz Shadow 3.367.092 336 10021
5 Mande1992 Shadow 3.280.281 331 9910
6 toby7304 Shadow 3.256.129 328 9927
7 Carthon II Shadow 3.235.238 336 9629
8 BrobFellshank Shadow 3.157.439 304 10386
9 filphillip Shadow 3.042.147 328 9275
10 sstarkey Shadow 2.998.590 308 9736

Comic

cool-cartoon-1129346.png


[/spoil]​
 
Last edited by a moderator:

DeletedUser

Guest
W27 Weekly: 22nd November

Banner.png


[spoil]Zarin – Editor/Interview

Shadow Slows Subjugation
Shadow still ahead, but it didn’t conquer many

LIGHT

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 25
Side 2: 1
Difference: 24

image.php


Nstlk*

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 0
Side 2: 0
Difference: 0

image.php


[IRON]

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 6
Side 2: 0
Difference: 6

image.php


NOS

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 9
Side 2: 0
Difference: 9

image.php


FURY

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 26
Side 2: 0
Difference: 26

image.php


No, the headline is not misleading, Shadow have genuinely been quiet this week, even though they have maintained a crushing lead. Looking down the stats, there’s not much to say; LIGHT seem to be a complete debacle and the other parties do not seem to want to put up a fight. It is not quite the last stand we accepted, and they will have to be hoping that these are just teething problems while the members adjust, but it has been 3 weeks now. They haven't removed the spectre of inactivity and are not on the offensive and they cannot win a war like that.

The other tribes too seem too to have lost any idea of initiative. Nstlk* has faded as a power and those stats are largely redundant. NOS and FURY carry on, but are simply losing villages and make no effort to fight, to take them back or even to defend them. It's as if all have lost hope and are just waiting for the end really, Shadow just has to fear its own activity and complacency and it should coast to victory in LIGHT of the lack of response from the enemy.

What more can be said folks? The wars are going one way for the moment and I do not see another party who can add much to the war, this seems to be a section to chronicle the slow rise of Shadow and the crushing of its opponents.​

In Other News…

  • In a follow-up to Sweeney’s article last week, there are plenty of rumours fling around with regards to WT3 and *TKP* going to war, and one or two conquers too. Watch this space.

  • We need a new banner for the Weekly. Something small, similar in size to the last one and conveying the nature of this publication. I am open to any offerings and I’ll make a decision at the end of the month. If I don’t get any submissions, or no suitable offerings, we just won’t have one.

Interview

Zarin
metaldoc

Why do you call yourself metaldoc?

I’m actually a doctor, a dentist (maxillofacial surgeon) partially retired and one of my hobbies is playing guitar and I like metal music.

Why did you come to TW?

I was invited to come to TW on a poker tournament a few years ago. I started on world 6; the world was already old when I started so I didn’t do too well, I played for about 8 months with another nick and quit the world.

Why did you decide to join W27?

Coming to world 27 was a temptation; random tribes, random sectors, it seemed like a great idea at the time.

Where did you start and how did that go?

When I started W27 I started in VEN; it looked good when we started. I still remember really good players we had over there but then, like on every TW tribe on every world I have played, inactivity takes his toll.

What did you think of the tribe lock, do you feel it benefited or hindered you overall?

I was surrounded by 2 enemy tribes I was doing really well but I couldn’t defend against 5 players. I was off to a rough start, lost all my villages in VEN and restarted in K25.

Were there any famous alumni in your tribe?

Oh yeah we had an awesome player aly01 and the infamous cheakytoast (number 1 spammer if I ever saw one). We lost them both to RL. Another one that still plays whom I had the pleasure of being co-duke with at VEN is shaneanigans who is co-duke of TKP.

Do you think those settings will be repeated?

If those settings get repeated I might live the experience again, it helped my game a lot.

How did VEN go for you; why did you decide to stay?

VEN was good in the start, all active players having fun, working together, even though we were far apart from each other I decided to stay and try to make it work.

How did you see the world shaping up, any correct predictions?

I remember noticing tribes like ATTACK, Santa and others growing really fast. I assumed those would become the top tribes. I wasn’t entirely wrong even after the tribes disappeared; most of their members stuck together and look at them now.

What did you think of ATTACK back in the day?

ATTACK was one of my favorite tribes, they had the best location for any tribe. Their growth was constant; it seemed that they didn’t have any problem with activity as VEN started to have.

What did you expect from the war with Nstlk*, did you already have plans afoot?

When the war with Nstlk* started, we didn’t have any specific plans. Our idea was to continue growing as quickly as we could. We would war anyone in contact with our villages and our region of growth.

Why did you join [IRON]?

I joined IRON when it was called K25PG. I was rimmed early in the game and ended up in K25 on the opposite corner of the world from where VEN was situated so I joined K25PG after a brief exchange of troops between their members. Then we merged and formed IRON.

How would you compare the tribe to others that you have been in?

IRON had a nice purpose, to grow and dominate; it had better activity than VEN. People in IRON enjoyed working together.

What role did you serve?

I started as a Squad leader assistant in IRON then moved up to squad leader after a few offense coordinations. I was invited to the high council till I was promoted to co-duke with my good friend WesleyT.

When the war with Shadow began, what did you expect the result to be?

When the war with Shadow started I wasn’t too convinced in joining in against them. I remember voting against the war and against the coalition, but majority decided to go to war (the ones that decided quit LOL). I still think that with the proper coordination and commitment on behalf of the remaining tribes of the coalition we could all beat Shadow.

Why do you think that the Coalition failed?

The coalition failed because it was every tribe for itself we had a really good first 2 weeks and then every tribe started working for themselves, moving away from the original attack plan. Then inactivity combined with inexperience took its toll; a lot of members quit after the first response from Shadow.

My first idea was, and still is, to unite all the best and active players from all tribes to fight under one banner.

What would you change about things, with hindsight?

What I would change would have been the way this war started. I would have first taken the best players into a single tribe, nobled off inactives and then start warring Shadow.

Why did you leave?

I left because politics and ties on the old IRON where overwhelming. We required a new order of things.

What's the premise with LIGHT, is it truly a last stand?

LIGHT is the last stand this world will know. If we fail in our endeavor to destroy Shadow, I see the end of the world near. It is definitely MY LAST STAND and a few of my tribe mates also

What do you think of Shadow?

Shadow is a good tribe, perfectly run by Ephette (my respects).

What do you see in store for a) yourself b) LIGHT c) Shadow d) the rest of the world?

Ok, predictions: I will lead this final Offensive with WesleyT till its final result.

LIGHT will shine upon Darkness with a good purpose.

Shadow is definitely the best this world has seen so far until LIGHT started shining, I see the end of the world as an interesting battle: LIGHT against Shadow.


How is LIGHT getting to grips with the fight against Shadow?

Well we will fight, we are going through a period of adjustment and trying to get rid of the oldest enemy tribal wars has (inactivity). It hasn’t been easy for LIGHT as it wasn’t for IRON, dealing with the worst enemy this game has, but we will overcome it and when we are ready, we will continue our fight. I am proud to play with some members in LIGHT; even the new ones have shown the determination that is needed to overcome this world’s obstacles.

Why do you think that Shadow has succeeded?

Well some of the reasons Shadow has succeeded are team work, excellent leadership and most of all the activity of the top players. This game is 60 percent activity and 40 percent skill; add to that too good leadership and a great ethos and you get Shadow.

Do you think Shadow deserves to win W27?

Shadow definitely deserves to win the world but also LIGHT. We both have worked too hard not to give a good final show. Surprisingly we have come a long way in short time dealing with inactivity as a main problem, but like I said with commitment from our players, we are ready to put on a good show.

If all other players declared on Shadow, do you think that it would be enough?

Well it depends if all other players in the world attacked. They would have to be both more active than Shadow and be ready to finish what they started or die trying. Most of all they need coordination. Shadow is too big to be taken out that easily and it would require a lot of team work and most of all activity, to be ready to set an alarm clock to send attacks, spend nights killing nobles etc.

What is your favourite part of TW?

My favorite part of TW is the diplomacy. When diplomacy is carried out well, I love it, the cooperation, the respect, the commitments, the team work and the new friends I have met from all parts of the world.

And your least favourite part?

My least favorite part besides the outside forums (I’m not much of a flamer and I think it has lost the purpose for which it was created) is the churches, thank god we don’t have them here on world 27.

What do you think contributes most to the addictive nature of this game?

One of man's oldest desires: the struggle for power. To me it’s the addictive part of TW; add to that the friends you make in the game from every corner in the world and the struggle to survive and conquer.

Some members of LIGHT are on good terms with some Shadow members and vice versa, what are your thoughts on this?

Oh I agree; the nature of the game, the friendship that arises after meeting a good challenger in battle has brought a lot of players to good terms. I myself have a good friend in Shadow (a good Australian). This is just a game and I enjoy playing it. I have a responsibility to LIGHT and will fulfill it, but that won’t change our friendship.

What would you change if you had your time over again?

I would change recruitment; I have made huge mistakes in the past, all for a good cause, but if people you recruit don’t share your point of view of the game, things tend to work against you.

Is there a player which you would like to fight one on one?

Oh yeah, there are many players I would like to fight one on one. Hale Storm for example; I like what I have seen when defending against his attacks on sat accounts. Also CSLincoln, I still haven’t seen him in action, but I have heard good things from my tribe members.

Who is your favourite public forum personality?

My favorite public forum personality would have to be Zarin. Thank you for keeping the outside forums professional, I am a fan of your work. Thank you for the Weekly and this interview; I’m not good with words but you seem to find a way of getting the good out of people. My second favorite public forum personality would be Silverwolf. Hi Jono, I consider him a friend not an enemy and also the attempts my tribe members have made to keep IRON’s name on it and now LIGHT.

One year on, which event do you think has had the greatest effect on the world?

It was the merger that ATTACK went through. The rest of the tribes tried to work with what they had when ATTACK smartly started recruiting when the rest of the world stood still. When the moves started most tribes tried to move their players closer to small barbs and such while ATTACK nobeled its way closer to its players. That was the move that sealed the faith of the other tribes, no one had the experience in this experimental world so they worked the obstacles in an awesome way.

After this world, will you return to TW?

How could I return to it, I’ll never have left; I’m still on world 11 27 and now 42.

Stats

Top Ten Tribes
1 Shadow 84.458.848 92.567.678 60 1.542.795 9549 9.694
2 LIGHT 30.703.408 38.650.436 78 495.518 4148 9.318
3 *TKP* 11.350.012 11.350.012 38 298.685 1312 8.651
4 FOME 7.239.307 7.239.307 21 344.729 903 8.017
5 NOS 5.881.078 5.893.686 43 137.062 737 7.997
6 GR*FM 5.230.963 5.230.963 21 249.093 649 8.060
7 WT3 4.936.633 5.014.848 51 98.330 678 7.397
8 Dawn 2.351.364 2.649.778 84 31.545 513 5.165
9 Theory 1.998.489 1.998.489 24 83.270 271 7.374
10 BIP 1.437.216 1.437.216 16 89.826 195 7.370

Top Ten Players
1 gerick6 Shadow 3.613.989 354 10209
2 Zarin Shadow 3.467.069 340 10197
3 mikestuntz Shadow 3.462.322 345 10036
4 ftw97 Shadow 3.403.450 345 9865
5 toby7304 Shadow 3.367.201 340 9904
6 Mande1992 Shadow 3.365.696 339 9928
7 Carthon II Shadow 3.238.775 336 9639
8 BrobFellshank Shadow 3.161.293 304 10399
9 filphillip Shadow 3.129.096 337 9285
10 sstarkey Shadow 3.069.088 314 9774

[/spoil]​
 
Last edited by a moderator:

DeletedUser

Guest
W27 Weekly: 29th November

Banner.png


[spoil]Zarin – Editor/Interview
sweeney2kaii8 - Comic

Wind Tunnels and Penguins
WT3 and *TKP* go to war

That headline is perhaps the strangest one yet, but what is even stranger is the fact that *TKP* have actually decided to go to war against a meaningful opponent. Certainly this will be an interesting one to watch as we have no idea how these two sides will perform in war. *TKP* certainly have the numerical advantage, but they may well be inflated with inexperience and players who are too far away to help.

I am told that a declaration will be forthcoming, and your questions about the war will no doubt be answered in the interview. I think therefore it is on with the stats:​

Side 1:
Tribes: WT3
Players:

Side 2:
Tribes: *TKP*
Players:

Timeframe: Last month

Total conquers:

Side 1: 233
Side 2: 264
Difference: 31

image.php


Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 18
Side 2: 72
Difference: 54

image.php


Points value of total conquers:

Side 1: 1,117,545
Side 2: 1,766,805
Difference: 649,260

image.php


Points value of total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 164,093
Side 2: 713,093
Difference: 549,000

image.php


Well, we do have something to get our teeth into, but the early war does seem to be going one way at the moment. It looks like each side is relying on its large players to really shape the war and so far *TKP* has come out on top.

Obviously their numerical advantage is going to be very telling, but one would think that it is more a case of seeing who can be relied upon when it comes down to the war, and praying that inactivity does not claim the larger players. For the moment, I shall reserve my predictions, even if I a leaning heavily towards *TKP* or even a lame merge.​

LIGHT Lethargic, NOS Non-functional, FURY Floundering, Nstlk* non-existent, Shadow Supreme
Same old story, different week

LIGHT

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 47
Side 2: 1
Difference: 46

image.php


Nstlk*

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 0
Side 2: 0
Difference: 0

image.php


[IRON]

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 5
Side 2: 0
Difference: 5

image.php


NOS

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 39
Side 2: 2
Difference: 37

image.php


FURY

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 6
Side 2: 0
Difference: 6

image.php


The headline does indeed say it all. It’s yet another week of doom and gloom for Shadow’s opponents whilst it enjoys a relatively easy conflict. I am really struggling for positives on that side of things; they might have taken one or two, but lost a whole lot more. I suppose all that they can take is that Shadow had a relatively light week on the war front, and took fewer villages in total than usual.

If we look at each party, LIGHT are just not putting up the fight that was expected, and the days when those members were in [IRON], putting up great resistance, must seem like an age ago. This final stand is proving something of a debacle indeed. This will be the last time that Nstlk* will be included on the stats, it seems pointless to put them up there now. Like LA-G and TK, another of the great enemies bites the dust. [IRON] too are no longer an influential force, losing more villages to LIGHT than to Shadow. It is merely a bin for inactives, nothing more. Another great name brought to a disappointing end.

NOS took the most villages from Shadow, but that clearly will not even their suffering. A distinct lack of initiative would seem to be the problem here, and not excellent defence from Shadow. Unless something changes, it is a slow slide into obscurity and defeat. As for FURY, they had a better week, with relatively few losses, but they too have really suffered over the course of the war. Like the rest, morale must be extremely low and it seems that many have given up on the conflict.

Shadow for their part haven’t had the best of weeks either. Their conquers total of 192 over the last week is a distinctly low one which has seen LIGHT at times nobling more villages than them. Hope for their enemies there? Possibly, it may at least take longer than predicted, but this author doesn’t see them crumbling.​

In Other News…

  • No one bothered to submit anything for a banner. Here was me thinking that we had some creative talent amongst the community, but I suppose that has died too. I was wrong to expect any better.​

Interview

Zarin
mrpickle99

Why do you call yourself mrpickle99?

There’s no particular reason to be honest. It has always been my gamer name since I was a level one on Runescape.

Why did you come to TW?

I have always been very much into online ‘MMORPGs’. As I said I used to play ‘Runescape’; I also have played ‘Guildwars’, as well as ‘World Of Warcraft’. I got into TW when I saw an advert on ‘Facebook’. I have tried numerous games of this sort and not liked any of them. When I started here I was instantly very interested and have become more and more involved from that point onward.

What specifically attracted you to this game?

At first glance I wasn’t to be honest. I thought I would just try it to amuse myself for a few minutes. I started a village and after doing the tutorial logged out for about a week. When I logged in again to see what had become of my village, I saw that all the villages around me were now at higher points than myself. Being competitive, I started upgrading things in my village. This is where the addiction first kicked in, and I started staying up late simply to get something building. A few days later I was invited to a tribe, where I found something even more addicting than the village building. The tribe only had about 4 players in it, but I quickly became very involved in talking to each of them. That relationship with those 4 players has lasted, and it taught me from the start that having friends in this game is much more beneficial than you yourself giving up your real life in order to have the most points.

Which other worlds did you play?

When I first started playing I started on world 21. When I realised how addicting the game was I joined into W23, W24 and world 25as well as world 26 and obviously here on world 27 when they opened. My strategy was that, as a lot of other players had a lot more experience than I had from playing years before me, I would just play on a bunch of worlds at once to get good start quickly. It worked well actually.

How did those go?

On World 21, I was a baron in a tribe which at its peak was at rank 21 I believe. That tribe was taken out then in about 2 weeks by the tribe ranked #1 on that world, we picked the wrong fight.

On World 23 I learned my lesson about family tribes for the first time, I tried to create a tribal alliance with about 25-30 tribes all with about 20 people in each. This didn’t go well and eventually disappeared all together.

W25 and W24 I never played long enough to really become involved in.

But on world 26 I got into a top 50 tribe first off. I stayed in that one for a long period of time; we hit the top 20 for a short period of time before failing. However in the process of failing I made friends with a player in the #1 tribe, and from that friendship also gained access into that tribe as a morale basher. As of the last few weeks my friend quit the game, and gifted me all of his villages. In that world I retain nearly 1.5 million points and am in the tribe ranked #2.

I have recently joined World 43 with some friends but I have not officially decided if I want to continue playing there or not, as due to the 2 worlds I already play(W27 and W26) my time is very limied and I don’t know whether I can be very successful.


Why did you come to W27?

The same reason almost everyone else on W27 did. I wanted to see what the new ‘Tribe Lock’ was all about. I actually thought the idea was retarded and one of the stupidest things I had ever seen. I decided to quit W27 three days after I joined. I ended up logging back in, a few weeks later to see how things had turned out, I am lucky the account hadn't gone barb yet. I saw that my tribe had risen to the rank of 17th if my memory serves me right. This was the highest ranked tribe I had ever been in before, so I began to play this world, and it ended up being my favorite world that I have played on, simply because it is unique.

What did you think of the tribe lock when you came back?

I was glad I had joined as the way I saw it, some of the best players in the world were stuck with me (Carthon II and
OjibweMan both originated from *TKP*, at the time called LITE). I still thought of it as a bit dumb that we could not get rid of the players who had quit and they were just a bunch of dead weight, however if we could I would have never met two of the best friends I have had on this world.


Did it help your play or hinder it?

In my case, it definitely helped me become a much better player. It put me with players who would have probably never spoken with me at all otherwise. I learned a lot from them. And even after they left the tribe and joined into ATTACK I still mailed them regularly, and we have stayed friends. Without the help of Carthon II and OjibweMan helping me with hard decisions until I had gathered a good council, *TKP* likely would have been disbanded within a month after the tribe lock ended. So to answer the question it most definitely helped my play.

What did you do after the tribe lock ended?

Well first off, only about a week, maybe two before the tribe lock ended, when I was suddenly thrust into the leadership position, I changed the name to *TKP*. It was right around there that I decided to take this world seriously; I overhauled all the tribe’s insides (meaning the internal announcement, the profile page, and the welcome message - which up to this point had never been used). Not being nearly as smooth as Ephette, I did not plan ahead as much as I should have. Though my tribe was ranked #3, everyone knew that Carthon II as well as OjibweMan (the only 2 players in the tribe that were in the top 100) were going to be leaving. I arranged a merge with a tribe that I had become friends with, which kept us in the top 20. We made no alliances or diplomacy until about a month after the lock ended.

What did you think of ATTACK back in the day?

What did we think of them? Hmm this is a hard question. I saw then that they were made up of the best players in the world, several of which I could vouch for personally that they were great players. I assumed and still do that many of the players who started in ATTACK would be in the final tribe standing at the end of this world.

What did you intend for *TKP*?

At the time I was simply interested in keeping the tribe alive. I worked hard to mail each and every player in the tribe, and get to know them all personally. This kept the tribe together and active, and was a large portion of the reason I was made the duke of *TKP*. And obviously what every tribe leader intends for the tribe, world domination of course ;).

What were your thoughts when the war between Nstlk* and ATTACK broke out?

ATTACK was obviously the winning the war, this became apparent after only the first 3-4 weeks of the war. Many criticised me in those days for choosing a winner so quickly, but it seems my guess was correct.

Did you ever consider joining that conflict?

*TKP* at no point wanted to join in the war of ATTACK verses Nstlk*, either tribe could have gotten rid of us at that point within a few weeks.

Do you think that the ~AOW~/ATTACK merge sealed the fate of the world?

I do not. I think that at that point there was still a very large chance for other tribes to rise up and give ATTACK some competition. As we saw [IRON] rise up out of nowhere and become the 2nd best tribe later on; we know that, had something of the sort happened earlier, they would have had a much better chance.

How would you compare *TKP* to other tribes that you have been in?

To start off, I wouldn't. *TKP* is like no other tribe I have ever been in, we run things very uniquely. We really are a very close family as many tribes in the game are. However one difference for instance is that our forum is hardly used compared to the amount of forum use in other successful tribes. We do 90% of our communication through private mails. I personally mail the majority of our members daily, not just in circular mails but in personal messages. This keeps me knowing what the tribe’s opinion is, it is typical for me to log in with over 3 pages of inbox messages every day.

Were you asked to join the Coalition?

Oh yes, on numerous occasions, and to this day the side against Shadow is trying to get us to join.

I believe that the time for uniting against Shadow came and went before the Coalition was formed. I expected someone else to form it. If I had had time myself I would have started something similar around 3-4 weeks before the Coalition was initially formed. As I thought the time was already gone, it was the automatic response from me to say no when offered a chance to join. But I still brought it before the council of The Killer Penguins, and we agreed unanimously that it would be suicide to declare war on Shadow. Not only because of the late start, but more because of who was leading it, Nstlk* was the frontrunner at the time and we were not on very good terms with the leaders of that tribe at the time.


Why do you think that the Coalition failed?

Namely because of lack of organization. However there were other reasons, they made the uniting decision much later than they should have, as well as the fact that they got a big head. The majority of the posts I have seen from the Coalition shared forum (it was not hard to get information out of Coalition members) was bigheaded spamming. Entire threads were dedicated to pointing out how little of a chance the rest of the world had against them. This distracted them from the real task of nobling villages.

What should they have done?

Formed earlier and been much more organized. 2 Tribes working together to take out a common enemy does not mean having a shared claims forum. If they were having massive 6 tribe ops on Shadow they would have likely put up a much better fight.

What do you think of LIGHT?

I think that as they are made up of the tribes of the Coalition, in the long run, LIGHT will be no more successful than the coalition was. All the really capable leaders seem to have disappeared so I would not expect much of them for the remainder of this world.

One year on, which event do you think has had the greatest effect on the world?

Call this cheesy, but I would have to say the tribal lock obviously had a larger effect than anything else. It made this world undeniably different than any other.

There are rumors about *TKP* warring WT3, anything to say about this?

The rumors are in this case correct. I would like this opportunity in front of all to say this. I MrPickle99 Leader of *TKP* herby declare war upon all the members of WT3.

How and why does this war come about?

Several reasons, we have up until recently lived in a somewhat peaceful relationship with WT3. However recently widgrenk and I have not seen eye to eye on a few things. The main reason this decision was made, was because they took in a refugee of ours, Pleblanc. Not only did they refuse to kick him, but he also received massive amounts of support, making nobling him cost us a lot more troops than it should have. Lastly the issue is that we are becoming a bit cramped for space in the k52, K43 area and as they are the last real tribe around there we must eliminate the last bit of competition. Besides without wars why would we play this game? It sort of is the point.

And of course, what are your predictions?

Of course, yes. I think that most likely WT3 will hold out longer than expected; they have a few good members in there. But in the long run, I don’t think that they can hold up to a beating from a tribe twice there size. Not to mention our secret weapon (I don’t know what that secret weapon is, but the council said I shouldn’t reveal it, so I couldn’t tell you if I did know ;)

What do you see in store for a) yourself b) Shadow c) LIGHT d) FOME e) NOS f) the rest of the world?

I will personally lead *TKP* for the rest of my life on this world. I do not intend on ever quitting; if I get rimmed, the player count here is nowhere near full so I still can keep on leading.

I see the players in shadow being in the last tribe standing.

I think that LIGHT is probably the last stand against Shadow, but I do not think it will be successful. Unless some new leader steps up and gets all the members participating I would assume that, like all tribes that have warred on Shadow, they will soon disband.

FOME, this is a completely different game with them. Their leader is one of the most capable I have ever spoken to except for Ephette. Very well put together tribe and closer to each other than any other tribe I have ever seen. Easily the most interesting tribe I have seen, I consider their tribe good friends with mine. We both share a lot of the same ideas on the world, as well as winning by playing fairly as opposed to ‘forcing’ merges of smaller tribes in the way that Nstlk* was known for.

NOS, in this case I don’t really have an opinion or room to talk. This is one of the few tribes that I do not know the leaders of, though from what I can tell they aren’t managing anything against Shadow and aren’t growing particularly fast either. I would say there future on this world will not go much further than it already has. They may exist a good while longer, but I don’t expect them to do anything that will shake the world so to speak.

The rest of the world? It has always been my belief that you gain more knowledge in this game when you lose as you are going against someone who is better than you. I hope all the members of the Coalition and LIGHT go on to other worlds, where I am sure they will be much more successful.


Why do you think that Shadow has succeeded?

Excellent leadership on the part of Ephette, as well as being properly prepared when the tribe lock ended. They gained most of the original top 50 players. When the lock ended, obviously everyone wanted to get into a good tribe and when you receive an invite from the tribe ranked #1 it seems dumb to reject it. I would argue that any tribe with that many of the top 50 players, even with mediocre leadership would be immensely successful simply because of how experienced the players are.

If all other players declared on Shadow, do you think that it would be enough?

At this point? No I do not.

Do you expect to fight Shadow some day, and if so, under what circumstances?

I definitely expect that we will fight some form of Shadow. Optimally we will not have to fight them when they are at their present size as they could squash us like a bug before we would have a chance to retaliate. As I said, I would rather be the last non-Shadow tribe standing.

How would this war turn out?
Us verses Shadow at this point, Shadow wins no contest, however if Shadow splits as my prediction says then it will be interesting. We may have seemed a fairly neutral tribe and perhaps not considered capable of much, but we aren’t just sitting here. I make it a priority to make sure that I am training my members on the basics and working our way up through circular mails, and teaching the newer members one on one. *TKP* will never go down easy as long as real life does not interfere too much.

If you were leader of Shadow now, what would you do?

I would finish off LIGHT and then probably make the tribe split on purpose. It sounds dumb, but I personally would get bored in a world without wars and warring any of the remaining tribes would not be very entertaining. However I am not Ephette, and I am sure I will never be as good of a leader as she is. I am sure she has a plan worked out, leaders always have a plan (I should know, the thing is, I haven’t actually revealed the majority of my plans or even hinted. Certain things must be secret ;).

Do you think Shadow deserves to win W27?

Yes I do. However I have watched a lot of worlds in the past. No tribe has EVER ‘won’ a world. They get rid of all the real competition, and then in every single case the tribe ends up splitting, otherwise the world would get boring. I would assume that shadow will also split in the future, probably shortly after finishing off LIGHT and the remnants of the Coalition.

From what you remember of W27, what would you say has contributed most to Shadow's dominance?

The tribe lock, which as ATTACK was ranked #1 at the end of it, almost all of the good players joined into the same tribe. This gave such an advantage from the start, even if the world had united to kill them then, they would have put up a heck of a fight.

What is your goal for *TKP* in light of the current situation of W27?

My goal, this is a very difficult question, I cannot rightly say world domination, as that is rather out of reach at the moment. Assuming that my prediction about Shadow splitting at some point in the future, we can then join one side of that war which will take place. In the long run I will be satisfied if the world is closed with *TKP* in second place forever immortalised as the only remaining real tribe smart enough not to join in with the Coalition.

However, best case scenario, Shadow will split before the world is closed and we get one more war that *TKP* can be a deciding factor in. Rather unlikely but being in one of the last wars of a world I would find very thrilling and something I would remember for a long time. I am also sure my tribe would love going down as the tribe that lasted through the Coalition war and participated in the world’s last war.

I don’t have it all worked out, but my real goal as a leader is to do what is best for the other players in the tribe, even if we do not accomplish being the last real non-Shadow tribe, I know we have all learned a lot from this world and will do great things on other worlds based on our experience here.


What would you change about your play if you had your time over again?

I would not have quit for the first month, and I would concentrate more upon my own growth as opposed to that of my tribe. Hopefully I would have been able to get into ATTACK way back then, and be a part of the tribe that is pwning all the others. This is not to say I don’t enjoy leading my tribe, on the contrary this has become my favorite world because of leading this tribe.

What is your favourite part of TW? And what is your least favourite part?

Favorite part is leading a group of players to do great things. And least favorite part is real life kicking in and taking a lot of my good friends and tribemates.

Is there a player which you would like to fight one on one?

I myself spend the majority of my time mailing people; I do very minimal work on my own villages, due to the constant annoyance of real life. I put leading the tribe above my own growing priority-wise, therefore I have not gained nearly as many villages as I would have liked. However contrary to popular opinion, I do actually have experience being a ‘real’ player. My account on W26 is nearing 1.5 million points. There I concentrate more on playing, whereas here I concentrate mostly on leading the tribe. As for a player I would like to play against? Without the pressure of having to keep up a tribe and playing 3 other worlds, I would like to play against my friend Pallysrange. He is probably one of the best players I have ever had the privilege of playing with. Should I get a chance to play completely without mailing and diplomacy I would want it to be against him, or possibly Sir Achilleus, another friend of mine.

What do you think contributes most to the addictive nature of this game?

Personally if you could not have a tribe and diplomacy I would have stopped playing long ago. I find mailing other players more addictive than anything else in this game.

Who is your favourite public forum personality?

Like many others Zarin is my favorite forum personality. The work in the Weekly is unsurpassed by any attempts of the same that I have seen on other worlds. Congratulations to Zarin on the recent one year summary a very, very good read.

After this world, will you return to TW?

I don’t intend on leaving, but should I leave, I will most definitely return on a later world.

Stats

Top Ten Tribes
1 Shadow 86.005.757 93.405.873 58 1.610.446 9509 9.823
2 LIGHT 30.473.301 38.014.677 77 493.697 4093 9.288
3 *TKP* 12.084.693 12.084.693 38 318.018 1409 8.577
4 FOME 7.615.147 7.615.147 21 362.626 939 8.110
5 NOS 5.505.118 5.548.981 48 115.604 725 7.654
6 GR*FM 5.504.208 5.504.208 21 262.105 687 8.012
7 WT3 4.890.247 4.943.627 49 100.890 671 7.368
8 Dawn 2.459.934 2.830.050 89 31.798 544 5.202
9 Theory 2.316.065 2.316.065 32 72.377 317 7.306
10 BIP 1.177.705 1.177.705 13 90.593 160 7.361

Top Ten Players
1 gerick6 Shadow 3.663.667 358 10234
2 Zarin Shadow 3.599.112 353 10196
3 toby7304 Shadow 3.531.331 357 9892
4 Mande1992 Shadow 3.516.753 354 9934
5 mikestuntz Shadow 3.513.033 350 10037
6 ftw97 Shadow 3.396.805 345 9846
7 Carthon II Shadow 3.238.775 336 9639
8 Deciphered Shadow 3.194.795 320 9984
9 filphillip Shadow 3.183.118 342 9307
10 BrobFellshank Shadow 3.168.940 305 10390

Comic

cool-cartoon-1186309.png


[/spoil]​
 
Last edited by a moderator:

DeletedUser

Guest
W27 Weekly: 06th December

Banner.png


[spoil]Zarin – Editor/Interview
sweeney2kaii8 – Comic/Maps

Same Old Shadow, Lame Old LIGHT
It’s the same story as ever folks…

LIGHT

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 122
Side 2: 3
Difference: 119

image.php


[IRON]

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 19
Side 2: 0
Difference: 19

image.php


NOS

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 19
Side 2: 0
Difference: 19

image.php


FURY

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 6
Side 2: 0
Difference: 6

image.php


It was well have been that Shadow were stung by my comments last week, but these last days have seen a significant margin re-emerging on their opponents. We’re coming back to the old numbers, and the old tales of widespread inadequacy among their enemies. If Shadow and LIGHT is going to be the main conflict, as presented by the plethora of conquers of that front, then it looks bleak indeed for those arrayed against Shadow.

Looking elsewhere on the list, it’s not an encouraging site. Names like [IRON], NOS and FURY are ebbing away with each week that passes and one does wonder what has happened to these tribes. A mixture of martial pressure and internal apathy has dismantled these entities and their names mere tokens now.

When we look at Shadow, the façade has been restored after some slightly shaky weeks, their conquers total has been impressive and they have suffered only 3 losses to major enemies. While questions may have lingered about their longevity in their waning form over past weeks, this showing will certainly prove those wrong.​

All Quiet on the Penguin Front
Conquers dwindle in *TKP*/WT3 war

Side 1:
Tribes: *TKP*
Players:

Side 2:
Tribes: WT3
Players:

Timeframe: Last Week

Total conquers:

Side 1: 76
Side 2: 26
Difference: 50

image.php


Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 5
Side 2: 0
Difference: 5

image.php


Points value of total conquers:

Side 1: 537,114
Side 2: 108,431
Difference: 428,683

image.php


Points value of total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 47,187
Side 2: 0
Difference: 47,187

image.php


It’s not often that I am lost for words (unfortunately), but this is one of those times where my hopes for an exciting conflict seem to have come to nothing. It started so brightly, we had activity on both sides at least; we wanted to see what these folks could do. Yet now we settle in for a deluge of apathy. There’s little to comment on here, so we live in hope.​

In Other News…

  • Thanks to stampcoin for making the excellent banner for the Weekly.​

Interview

Zarin
Styv

Why do you call yourself Styv?

It is simple, my heritage is Ukrainian. This is my real name through a translator website.

Why did you come to TW?

I came to TW as a way to have a common hobby with my sons. I try to be a good father, but I am a rather older one, so online gaming is not something I knew (or know) anything about. They were playing on W24 and after reading some of the forum entries, I felt convicted to become part of their TW life and insulate them from some of the more unacceptable online activities or characters. I just wanted to make sure my kids were safe while having fun.

Where did you start?

W27 is my first and only world and my first and only computer game. I joined W33 when it started to check out the Church setting, but after a week or two, quit that one because I simply do not have enough time for two worlds. W27 is it for me.

Why did you decide to join W27?

I joined W27 because it was new and it looked smaller than the other worlds. I was scared silly trying to do anything online, so this one seemed the least traumatic to me. So far, it has gone OK. I have so much still to learn. I am still quite the noob. I am blessed and still "alive" only because of the gracious attitudes of the great warriors in the area and the friendships I have gained. I owe a tremendous debt to all of the warriors that have helped me along. It has definitely NOT been my skills.

What did you think of the tribe lock?

Well, I joined just before Feb 13, so I didn't really understand the tribe lock at all. I guess I thought it was natural since it was all I ever experienced. I do know this; after the lock, I was lost and so were my tribe mates in K67. We were the only 4 RIM, members within 2 or 3 continents. We were very vulnerable and when one of us was rimmed, we had to negotiate leaving RIM,. They simply weren't able to help us.

Do you feel it benefited or hindered you overall?

Overall, I think the lock was beneficial for K67. It created chaos after Feb 13th and we in K67 had to figure out how to fend for ourselves. K67 was barely a continent at the time. My first village was way out on the rim and when you really look at it, it was barely outside the four corners.

None of us had any experience. We had to help each other figure out how to farm, how to build. It was quite a while before any of us knew how to noble and actually pull it off. It didn't matter to anyone what tribe you were in or if you were in a tribe at all. We could all talk to each other. It was a great experience.


Were there any famous alumni in your tribe?

The southeast has had and has many strong towers who showed the rest of us how to play.

Lord Trader has always been considered the greatest nobler and most awesome/feared player. He has always treated me with respect even though I haven't earned it. He has shared his frank opinions and taught me many a lesson. Some were painful. :)

TarynAshley is a great strategist and leader. I am grateful to have her in the area to share her wisdom and skills. I have needed her much more than she will ever know.

Elk2 and I have been together for quite some time now. I see him as the Great Defender. He knows how to strengthen our front lines and knows how to defend us! He helps everyone understand this game. We are a better tribe because of him. He is also a great friend to me and everyone that comes across his path.

Finally, though I have met so many great players in my time, the question of who is the greatest warrior from my tribe, it must be my good friend JamtheIceMan. He left us to join Shadow. It was not only a great honor for him, it was a great honor for us. He was one of those guys early on in K67. He was right across the hedge from me. We kind of learned the game together. He was always better and will always be a better warrior than I, but I can live with that. We keep in touch, less than I wish, but that's OK. I am sure he is busy in Shadow. :)


Do you think those settings will be repeated?

I have no other experience, so it is OK with me. Settings mean nothing to me, the people that play this game, in this world, are what matter. W27 may be mocked here and on other worlds, but this is the GREATEST world as far as I am concerned. We have great tribes, great warriors and great friends. How can any other world compare to that?

What did you do after the tribe lock was lifted?

Got attacked! :-(

And then I learned a little about what defense is all about. CheesyName and Moomix1 played cat and mouse with me for a week and then I decided to make my stand. Put all my troops in to #1 (of 3 under 5k villages). Lost that village but I think I gained a small measure of respect. I was amazed in that my great nemesis, Moomix1, and I got along after that. It was always a hero/nemesis relationship, but as he left he gave us a fond profile announcement. We both acknowledge our roles in the area and had fun poking at each other. He never came over to the light side :(


How did you see the world shaping up, any correct predictions?

From the beginning I thought the world would be just about as is is now. I thought for sure ~AOW~ and T-GR would decide the south. All of the other tribes in this area were pretenders. I did not expect T-GR to simply quit, but they did. I did not think much about the north as it was always at war. Tribes came and went and came and went, etc, etc. I figured it would always be at war up there. It still is.

What did you think of ATTACK back in the day?

Not much. It was a core and northern tribe. We were in the Southeast and had no desire for world domination. ~AOW~ was the tribe I paid attention to.

Why did you create SAM?

Sam was my second founding. I initially created Sanctuary, =S=, after the lock, to help RIM, players in K67 have a true home. RIM, was a northern and southern tribe, but nowhere in the east. Well, things got tough in K67 so I got three smaller tribes to merge. Once merged, I was not in leadership. Unfortunately, the leadership was weak. They would not fight back against the bigger tribes even though we were bigger now. I finally made a stand and attacked those folk, along with JamTheIceman, we took several villages and finally had a real tribe. As the leader without a title, I felt very uncomfortable pleading with the Duke to lead. I also did not like taking on a role that was not mine. For the betterment of the tribe, I left and founded SAM.

How would you compare the tribe to others that you have been in?

SAM was a totally different kind of tribe compare to the others. RIM, had compassionate but distant leadership. They didn't often share with the tribe what was going on, so we in K67 felt pretty lost. ~BS~ had no leadership to speak of. SAM was going to be founded on principles and strategy. Leadership would be dependent on known, documented principles and not lead by fiat. SAM was a great tribe in its time. It was based on a set of Core Principles. One of those was democracy. Its principles are what did it in I think. I stepped down from my Duke position after 4 months due to term limits. I followed our principles and essentially stopped being involved in tribal leadership. I am not sure the next set of leaders, as dedicated and good as they were, were able to keep the tribe together. Sometimes too much of a good thing is not so good. Then again, I may not have made any difference anyway. The tribe came on hard times and had a split personality. I think it was doomed from the start. :(

What role did you serve?

I was the founder, Duke and Tribal Elder. Essentially, I tried to serve the members and give them the stable, courageous leadership they deserved. By courageous I simply mean willing to make decisions. Most of the leadership problems I had seen in the past was when the times got tough, the leaders ducked out instead of "Duked" out. I chose to lead no matter the situation. Not easy, but needed. Some of my decisions were taken well by the tribe. Others: not. For those, we talked it out in the forums and came to consensus. It did not happen too often, but I am glad we chose to act as a tribe and not in a Leader-Serf kind of way. I hope the tribe appreciated that. I think that after I left leadership there was a split because of those that had a traditional view of heavy Dukedom and those that were more democratic.

Were you asked to join the Coalition?

All the time and it is continuous even today. I think it may be that the coalition tribes are fluid along with their leaders. We have said from the start that we are neutral, based on our own terms.

Why do you think that the Coalition failed?

Technically, it hasn't. They are still fighting. If they are failing it is because, in my opinion, they did not choose the ~AOW~ way. I think it is difficult for the coalition because they do not have a core territory similar to Shadow. Fighting from the rim has not been successful. Even though ~AOW~ was a rim tribe, it had a "core territory" of its own. I do think if the coalition focused on building their core, they may grow to be more successful.

What would you change about things, with hindsight?

Well, we have been quite successful. I do think things would be very much different if you could help your friends without reforming new tribes. I am pretty sure Shadow would not be as dominant if they could be attacked from any quarter.

One year on, which event do you think has had the greatest effect on the world?

The ATTACK/~AOW~ merge. It created an unstoppable force.

Why do you think that Shadow has succeeded?

Leadership and experience. Their Leadership, from and outsider looking in, is willing to lead. They are competent and experienced. They have obviously managed their tribe better than anyone, on any world, has. Proof is in the dominance.

If all other players declared on Shadow, do you think that it would be enough?

No.

Why did you create FOME?

As I said, I stepped down from leadership in SAM. Over time, the Lord had been asking me to step out in faith and consider TW a mission field. Now, I am NO missionary. But for one of the few times, I chose to answer His prompting. I told SAM that I was leaving to start a new experiment. A tribe with two recruiting missions. One to grow a great tribe, the other to grow Christian relationships with those that came across my path. I did not expect to have a tribe with more than one member. So, I founded FOME to reach out in love to others. I hope that does not sound arrogant, because if anything, I'm terrified of it. Have I mentioned that I am extremely shy? Well, without God's provision and the wisdom of all the great people he has brought to me in TW, I could not do this. I am so grateful for my friends in FOME and those that give me wisdom from outside my tribe. The greatest part of FOME is not me or my mission. It is that others have also heard the call and are using FOME for their relationship building. It is a great tribe!

What is the plan with FOME?

Our plan is to grow as a regional tribe and as global servants. We are not intent on world domination and it really does not matter to us who dominates or who doesn't. Our first mission is to the real people behind the warriors here on W27. All the players. A wise friend once told me that I do not need a tribe or villages to attain the mission of FOME. That is right! We are here for people, not territory and treasure. We gain both as we succeed, but it is not our main reason for being. We are looking for both great warriors and needy people. We pray the Lord brings both to our borders.

Some have mentioned that FOME is rooted in a Christian foundation above all. What do you have to say to this?

I agree. But we are NOT a Christian tribe. I do believe that is against TW rules. I also challenge, at least for our western friends, isn't everything rooted in a Christian foundation? And for others, is not everything rooted in God's foundation? I do not include the Atheists in that, though I personally think that is a religion too. Anyway, I see a big deal and no big deal in our foundation. It is a big deal in that our co-mission is, for those in our tribe that choose, to spread the Good News. To listen to people's needs and pray for them. To honor others. It is funny, but I started down this line because of the very nature of the game. I try very hard to understand and live a medieval existence in this realm. Chivalry is a big part of that. Chivalry is based on Christian principles, so it make sense that I use Christian principles here. That the players behind the warriors live in the 21st century makes it even more satisfying. It is no big deal because we do not flaunt or even expect it from our members. Those that want to may, those that don't, don't.

If so, why did you decide to do this and how has it affected your play?

First and foremost, it requires us to live up to our principles. We are very keen on character in our tribe. We believe that we defend Honor, Integrity and Dignity. I stress in our tribe that our word is more important than villages. Our Honor is more important than treasure. We try very hard to treat everyone with dignity. We fail at times. In those times, we work on repentance and possibly recompense for those we have wronged. We also accept that we have received God's Mercy even though we do not deserve it. We give mercy to those that ask, considering the circumstances. We give up villages if, when we attack, a player explains his need for mercy. When moved, we relent. When we believe it is an act of deceit, we do not relent. For the most part, most tribal warriors would think that our Christian foundation hampers our play. They are wrong simply because they have the wrong perspective. From our perspective, spreading the Good News is our greatest treasure. Giving and ear to the hurting is our most important diplomatic activity. Praying for needy warriors is our greatest battle. Fighting is fun! Nobling is cool! Defending ourselves against those that wish us harm is paramount. But our true calling, when we are strong enough in spirit to do so, is "nobling for Christ".

What do you think of Shadow?

They are the greatest tribe on this world and by domination criteria, the greatest of any world. Others may have a different opinion, but TWStats don't lie. I know some really great people in Shadow and respect their leadership. I also used to think they were aloof and arrogant (perhaps deserved), haughty in their treatment of us smaller warriors and tribes. I have learned through my discussions with actual Shadow warriors that they are real people, fun and good guys. Just like all the other tribes. I pray that God continues to show me that everyone here may be playing roles, hiding their true selves sometimes, but are basically the same people if I met in the RL would find to be good friends.

That Shadow may choose at any time to squash me like the bug I am is really not all that important. I try to see past that and love the heart of those that bring harm upon me.


How do you think FOME would fare against Shadow?

We would win. We already have. Shadow's time, whether anyone knows it or not, is coming to a close. They can choose to claim victory and disband or simply die of old age. Their choice. Now, if Shadow started attacking FOME, we would fare very badly by tribal wars criteria, but we would still win. Remember, our definition of success is very different than Shadow's. FOME has won because of our consistent character and principles. No noble has ever and will never take that in his plunders. Since that is our greatest treasure, we main rich no matter what.

What do you see in store for a) yourself b) FOME c) Shadow d) LIGHT e) *TKP* f) NOS g) the rest of the world?

I, Styv expect to get rimmed. I expect all of my villages to be plundered and nobled. I have many people, all around me, that would love to have my villages. My tribe will try to protect me, but in a time of war, it is the leader who is marked first. So, I will be rimmed. On this world, I do not know where I will end up, but I know I will be looking out at the vastness of the beyond. I am OK with that. My role here requires no great territory. From one village or one hundred, I am the same. I am here for my tribe and the lost. I will never quit. I can be rimmed a hundred times and I will still be here, keeping to my mission.

FOME: FOME will continue its mission. Warriors have come and gone. We miss those that have left and rejoice with those that have come. As a group of friends, kindred spirits, FOME will be around forever. As a tribe, I do believe it must get stronger to survive. My little motto to everyone is Keep Getting Stronger! If we are content to build barbs and very slow growth, it is inevitable that another tribe will consider us good eating and take us out. I pray for my tribe and seek prayer from others. We are playing this game at a disadvantage, but it is that disadvantage that defines us. My prayer is that we glorify in our disadvantage and succeed regardless.

Shadow's time has come and gone. It only exists in a negative condition. That is, the coalition gives it life. Without the coalition, Shadow would die of inactivity. They are now stretching themselves, trying to find a reason to continue on, but it is not there for the taking. Lately, I sense that they know this. Holding on to a long rope called world domination is exhausting. Warriors are here to fight. Without that, they move on to other worlds or quit out of boredom. I saw that a lot from coalition tribes before. It is starting in Shadow now and will continue until they are vulnerable. Once that happens, like all other tribes, they will have to experience what it is to fight against foes larger than you. It will be good for the remnant to have that humbling experience.

LIGHT is a tribe with great potential. The north has finally been consolidated under one tribe. As they evolve into a true tribe, they will be great indeed - the next Shadow. Their biggest problem, along with all of the coalition tribes is that they somehow think they need to save the world. This world does not need a TW savior. If the many manifestations of the Coalition had never sprung up, Shadow would have already imploded from inactivity. It is the coalition's very existence that fuels whatever passion Shadow has left in its tank. Leave Shadow alone to die the death it deserves! If Light simply decides to end their holy war against the shadows, they will find that their reputation, growth and treasure will surely increase. They do have the ability. I am not sure they have the vision. I pray I am wrong for they are a very strong tribe.

NOS could easily anchor a huge tribe in the east. Since they come from the Joker/TK line, it makes some sense. When TK chose to "save the world against the shadows", they were high on passion and low on experience. Experience won out. TK forced/strongly encouraged SAM to merge into them. We perceived their constant harassing and controlling to be extortive and I did eventually allow my members to join. I chose not to. The "merger" went very badly primarly because, behind our backs, TK was talking badly about our tribe and planning war. What they failed to do was hide that from the new SAM players. All of them left and came back to SAM. TK was in a frenzy to try out their new strength. TK died a pretty quick death for their size. Now, as NOS, they have experience on their side. I do sense that they are more mature and ready to defend themselves. With a LIGHT, GR*FM and FOME alliance, the east could be secured.

I consider *TKP* to be a friend and ally. I greatly respect their Dukes. I am friends with some of their members. I do think they are on the path to failure. They do not have a vision for themselves. I have seen them make two major mistakes. The first is to go the LA-G and RIM, route on territory. They have greatly expanded to many continents. This weakens them as they cannot support their regional outposts. Even if each region is to expand, I do not think those in the north, east and south are going to welcome *TKP* to take them over. You cannot fight on 4 fronts. The second mistake I see them making is their strategic desires. I do not even know if they want to be a tribe. Until they choose to focus on being a great tribe, they will not be. They too have the potential to anchor a great western tribe. Unlike LIGHT and NOS, I do not see that happening. Again, I pray I am wrong.

The rest of the world is quite dynamic. Those tribes that are ranked 15+ are in great shape. I see a good fluidity and they are growing. This world is very much alive. Those that focus on the top 5-10 tribes may not see it as much, but it is there. Life on the rim is always new and exciting. First villages are still being built. Those first nobles are still conquering the barbs next door. First incomings are still scaring the dickens out of people and showing them that this is a war environment. I see many, many potential friends in these places. I do not invite them into the tribe, but I have a lot of fun watching and talking to them. Once the bigger tribes give up their world war, this world will be even more dynamic and exciting. I look forward to it.


Is there a player which you would like to fight one on one?

uhhh, the smallest? :)

Lord Trader is the greatest fighter in the south east, so if I want to get rimmed by anyone, I guess he is the guy. I can commit to him this, should he choose to fight, I would NOT, like his many previous opponents, quit after a few lost villages. I come from the rim, find comfort in the rim and would welcome my trip back to the rim. I don't intend to quit, so being rimmed is simply a respite for me.

BTW, this is not an invitation dear Lord Trader!


What do you think contributes most to the addictive nature of this game?

For me, it is the great people that have come into my life. It's funny, but I can actually be my REAL self here. People either accept me for who I really am or they move on. I can't get that in the RL. Too much PC and facade. It is so freeing to be myself and it is also great that an insecure, shy person can actually be liked by people - because behind every player is that real person.

You seem to co-exist very well with GR*FM, how did this come about, and have you ever considered warring with them?

It started right after I founded SAM. My strategic direction had always been to the south, so I started looking for recruits in that direction. TarynAshley was a player in K66 that looked promising. I started a conversation with her and she consistently, forcefully (to this day) brushed off every attempt for me to recruit her. Hard to get would be putting it very, very mildly. :)

As we kept growing, our "tribes" started to have difficulties with claims. We had to make a decision, work together or fight it out. We chose to work together, at least on claims. Over time, we have continued a mutually beneficial relationship. I find her wise and engaging. She has always been direct and strong - very strong! She means what she says and says what she means. A great leader! NOW, we have not always seen things eye-to-eye. We have argued, disagreed and huffed away from each other. But we always come back together to work things out. I definitely respect and admire her and her tribe. Luckily, she considers me someone worthy enough to at least keep up a conversation with. At least I hope it is because of me :) I am faithful that in the end, no matter which path we each take, our final steps will be together.

I think the chance of GR*FM starting a war with us is much greater that us attacking them. Their tribe is much more aggressive and experienced than ours. They also play this game at top form. That is, their mission is to win in Tribal WARS. They play to win. Should they us attack, though, they would find us a very bitter pill to swallow. I pray for their success attacking other tribes. :)


Do you think Shadow deserves to win W27?

Yes, and they already have. Unfortunately, they don't know it yet and neither does anyone else. If we could all just get together, crown Shadow winner and honor their great achievement, we could move on into our Golden Age. I have a suggestion on this: I propose that every tribe, other than Shadow disband on 23 Dec. Shadow will reign supreme throughout the lands. TWStats will show them as #1 in very K. On 25 Dec, all tribes hail Shadow as The Greatest Tribe of all Time, never to be matched again. On 26 Dec, Shadow disbands and everyone is free to create new tribes. A new beginning. The end of the Great Empire and the beginning of the Golden Age of W27. Just a humble suggestion from a noob.

Why do you think that the world has turned out the way it has, with such a dominant tribe?

Who cares? No tribe will be dominate this time next year. I tire of everyone fixating on how this world is this way or that due to a dominant tribe. It has no bearing on how I play, who I play with, and what I do with my co-mission.

What is your favourite part of TW?

Serving my tribe and building relationships with others.

And your least favourite part?

Attacking smaller tribes and players. I could limit my attacks to bigger players, but that doesn't make much sense either. As for attacking smaller players, FOME gets a lot of requests for mercy. We are willing to give mercy just as we hope to get it ourselves. We do have unwritten rules for giving mercy, based on the honor or dishonor of the player in question. The issue is that we have to attack smaller players so that they do not grow big enough to attack us. Even so, I do not relish the act.

What would you change if you had your time over again?

I would not have left SAM in the way I did. I would have taken more time explaining myself. I do not take full blame, but I think my departure contributed to that great tribe breaking up.

Who is your favourite public forum personality?

LordofBones. Just the name is so cool. And he always had interesting things to say. Funny, biting, just plain fun. Following him, it was that guy who started the topic on nuking someone with 50 points or something. If there was anyone who spiced up the forums, it was that guy. I wish the mod would reopen that thread. I laughed at every reply! :)

What do you think of the decisions that players make, from a moral perspective, in a system such as this, without real life consequence?

A good question, but again, the perspective is prejudiced. Who says that this game has no real life consequence? Everything we do has real life consequences and I expand that by saying everything we do has ETERNAL consequences. This is a game. Many people play and take on roles that do not reflect the way they act in real life, but do reflect how they would act in RL, given the chance. A bully here is a wanna-be bully in RL. An angry warrior here is angry in his heart in RL. And, those that come here from relief of a bad RL, I bet big money they would love to have the same family, friends, and tribe in RL!

So, your question is 180 degrees wrong. Moral decisions made in this world do have serious consequences in RL. In a sense, we either bring our RL morals here, or we take our TW morals there. We are all the same person in both worlds. Our morals cannot be compartmentalized. We are who we are, no matter where we are. If you actually think that we do not carry baggage back and forth, with actual RL consequences over there, then I challenge you to rethink your position. The way I act on this world influences my RL and has eternal consequences. After all, if I hurt someone here with my words, that hurt follows them into the RL. They may do something to themselves or others that have eternal consequences. And my guilt here may follow me, with RL consequences. All due to my immorality here in TW. I will not take that chance and I pray that when I do hurt someone it will not spread. I pray in both worlds for my moral stance in either.


What would say that we can gain from TW?

Friends and family foremost. We learn about other cultures and countries. We do gain some experience in battle strategy and diplomacy. AND, we have some fun!

After this world, will you return to TW?

First, this world is not ending. We are at the end of our birthing time. It will be painful, but coming out the other side will be glorious! This world very soon will be known throughout the worlds as the greatest world. Everyone will want to join and tons of fun will ensue. I have tentatively started a tribe in W43 and W44. I hope for CUP to be an icon in TW. If anyone wants to check it out, please do. We are really, really small right now and can use your help. :)

Thank you very much for allowing me to be a part of your weekly. I know that many of this world's best thinkers and fighters have come before me, as it should be. It is an honor and I am humbled to be included. I just want to reiterate: This is the best world and we have the best players. Why? Because of the real life people that play here! I have always tried to bring my real self to this game. I may play a role, but only within the context of who I really am. I believe everyone else does to. From what I have witnessed here, that means that there are some really special, good and wonderful people out there!

Stats

Top Ten Tribes
1 Shadow 88.292.586 96.028.835 56 1.714.801 9739 9.860
2 LIGHT 31.483.016 39.469.978 78 506.025 4271 9.241
3 *TKP* 11.928.093 11.928.093 38 313.897 1396 8.544
4 FOME 7.143.882 7.143.882 20 357.194 868 8.230
5 GR*FM 6.506.962 6.506.962 22 295.771 830 7.840
6 WT3 4.971.283 4.995.193 43 116.167 665 7.512
7 NOS 2.930.974 2.931.429 42 69.796 399 7.347
8 Theory 2.648.849 2.648.849 36 73.579 371 7.140
9 Dawn 2.591.029 3.034.656 90 33.718 585 5.187
10 Synd01 1.336.807 1.336.807 6 222.801 159 8.408

Top Ten Players
1 gerick6 Shadow 3.800.723 371 10245
2 Zarin Shadow 3.765.887 369 10206
3 mikestuntz Shadow 3.663.251 365 10036
4 toby7304 Shadow 3.630.736 366 9920
5 Mande1992 Shadow 3.587.474 361 9938
6 ftw97 Shadow 3.416.177 347 9845
7 filphillip Shadow 3.365.353 363 9271
8 Deciphered Shadow 3.327.414 333 9992
9 Carthon II Shadow 3.235.337 336 9629
10 BrobFellshank Shadow 3.189.923 308 10357

Comic

cool-cartoon-1214507.png


Maps

I did mention on my anniversary thread how useful contemporary maps are for putting things in context, and they also help you to grasp events happening now too. I give my thanks to sweeney for the suggestion and creation of these.​

Top 5 tribes:
top5tribes.jpg


Top 5 players:
top5players.jpg


My apologies for the slight tardiness of the issue, I hope it was to your liking. Stats were done last night, so are consistent with 'last week'. Other than that, I have changed the formatting on these issues slightly, and it is your challenge to notice what I have changed. I'd also like to thank you all for your continued support and once again, I hope you enjoyed it.​

[/spoil]​
 

DeletedUser

Guest
W27 Weekly: 13th December

Banner.png


[spoil]Zarin – Editor/Interview
sweeney2kaii8 – Maps

A New Chapter for Shadow
*TKP* ‘merges’ with Shadow

I am, in fact, rather reluctant to use the term 'merge', but I suppose that this recruitment does qualify it. Simply put: Shadow has accepted a not insignificant number of players from *TKP*, thoroughly augmenting their ranks and presence in the West and it gains them secure control of K42 and K52.

We see here another opponent crippled by Shadow, but this time in another way. It is another hurdle on the way to world domination swiftly dealt with and has brought Shadow over the 10,000 village mark which is likely to be the only tribe ever to accomplish that feat on this world. It also means that another border is secure, so Shadow can direct its attention to only two main fronts now, further increasing the peril of its enemies.

The ramifications for the war between *TKP* and WT3 are obvious, with the loss of two players from WT3 as well, nothing is likely to happen on this front now, so we can close that chapter in the world. All that is left, is to consult the weekly stats and see what impact has been had.​

LIGHT

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 108
Side 2: 1
Difference: 107

image.php


[IRON]

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 4
Side 2: 0
Difference: 4

image.php


NOS

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 0
Side 2: 2
Difference: 2

image.php


FURY

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 17
Side 2: 0
Difference: 17

image.php


One can see that the first thing which jumps out is NOS, they actually beat Shadow this week! No trickery here folks, this is the first time that NOS have ever accomplished this, and the first time that any tribe has done so since the earliest days of the Coalition war. Before we all get carried away, Shadow has evidently not touched NOS recently and 2 conquers won’t exactly remedy things; even so, it’s a good job so hats off to them.

Elsewhere unfortunately it has been even worse. The new members have made the Shadow total for conquers look much more healthy at 351, a nice average of slightly over 50 each day. LIGHT have suffered terribly, losing over 100 villages to Shadow, with only a solitary consolation village. It is shaping up to be quite a debacle, and it simply cannot continue if LIGHT wish to survive, let alone push back Shadow.

[IRON] and FURY have been almost extinguished as powers in this world, and inactivity is rife. The lack of even total conquers demonstrates this, and all they succeed at doing for the moment is losing villages. It’s another two great names coming to an ignoble end.

This just leaves Shadow who, whilst being embarrassed by NOS, look far stronger with a strengthened membership this week and have produced an excellent total for conquers and an impressive record against LIGHT. If new members see off the issue of inactivity, where are the other obstacles to world domination? We wait of course, but they move closer each week.​

In Other News…
  • There’s forum activity! We are finally seeing more life in this arena, so I would encourage you all to at least have a gander.​

Interview

Zarin
Mande1992

Why do you call yourself Mande1992?

Mande is a user name I started using a while ago for games. M and E, it is the joining of initials that started when my wife and I were married in 1992

How charming. So then, why did you come to TW?

I came to TW to see what is what all about. I know Stampcoin in real life and I was wondering why he enjoyed the game so much. Or at least why it seemd important for him to be online at certain times of the day.

Had you played any worlds before W27?

I started about 3 worlds at the same time, not sure which the others were, W23 and W25 or something like that. I had never played TW before that so I figured I would try each one and see how they went. W27 seemed to be going the best, mostly because there were enough nearby barbs. Stampcoin joined W27 and we ended up really close to each other so I dropped the other 2 and kept playing this one.

What did you think of the tribe lock, must have been strange to start off your experience with that?

It actually was great. On the other worlds the big question was which tribe to join, a noob really has no way of knowing, or proving himself to be able to get into a good tribe. On W27 you were automatically in a tribe and some people knew how to play and shared their knowledge. I can't really remember anyone that was in the tribe but it did help to get me started to see how to learn from others, and to see how people react to each other.

So you would say that it helped new players?

I think so. It gave you 3 months (2 for me as I started late) to show that you were interested in playing the game.

What was your plan for once the tribe lock ended?

I hope I get my history right; I don't tend to remember these things too well. Stampcoin and I started looking around to see what was happening in our area. We didn't really have a world domination plan in place as I didn't really understand the depth of the game at that point. We decided to start ~AOW~ together, and carefully recruited some of the other larger players in the area.

What did you see in store for ~AOW~?

Don't really know. Stampcoin had played before and taught me how to play. He stressed the importance of having a good tribe. Up to this point we were really playing alone within the tribe lock. I think we figured we should try to secure K63 as a rim tribe so we could be safe along the rim. Recruit carefully and see where it went from there.

When did you first come into contact with ATTACK?

Boy, I am going to have to pull out some history books to try to remember all this. Once the new tribes settled down a bit, we actually had a half decent tribe and were isolated a bit from ATTACK by having other tribes between us and them. Eventually we moved a bit closer to each other and then had to start having conversations concerning players that both tribes wanted to noble. Somewhere in there a Skype chat was setup with leaders from Nstlk*, ATTACK and ~AOW~ so we got to know both tribes a little better. Sorry, my brain is better suited to strategies than histories...

Naturally, naturally; this triumvirate would have seemed to have had a lot of promise, what did your tribes plan?

Now that I think about it a little more, things were already tense with Nstlk* and ATTACK by then. I seem to recall that one of the first discussions with the tribe tribes present was Albrew giving Nstlk* an ultimatum of some sort. It seemed that they didn't really trust each other and we didn't really know where we fit in. We were smaller than the two of them and tried not to pick a side... yet.

Interesting, did either tribe approach you privately about working against the third?

Those were tricky times, trying to figure out who was playing the game straight up. I know we had more discussions with Nstlk* about getting people to rally against ATTACK. We were actually considering that seriously for a while but some of the tribe members threatened to not come along.

How do you think that would have turned out?

Not very well; we had already worked alongside some ATTACK members, Carthon for example, and everyone seemed friendly and honest playing. Unfortunately we didn't see the same things coming from Nstlk* players, actually very little communication outside the occasional leadership chat.

So what did you see in terms of options at that time?

Once we had the tribe involved in our discussions about which tribe to support, it was clear that ATTACK was the right choice. A story: ~AOW~ and ATTACK were taking out a player in K63 area, I had talked with this player now and then and he didn't plan to keep playing but he didn't really like ATTACK. I helped him setup his defense to block ATTACK nobles while we had an easier time taking our claims. The reason I say this is because I finally realized that I was playing lowball, I told Ephette about it, she was gracious and we worked things out. I haven't looked back, and I have tried to play an honest game since then.

How was the tribe doing at that point, did you see a truly strong ~AOW~ emerging?

I think so. Of course I didn't know everything about how the game evolved, but we had already launched against a couple of tribes that folded pretty quickly. We were making a name for ourselves and most players worked together well. We had an occasional issue to deal with within the tribe but it was a good group. I don't really know how strong we were but we were nobling a lot of villages and always looking ahead for the next direction to move. Before we merged we were very close to being hemmed in by Nstlk*, ATTACK and a couple smaller tribes to the south.

The decision to join with ATTACK was one that many have described as the most influential moment of the game, what would you say to this and what were the main reasons behind it?

I think we were tribe #3 at that time, so any 2 major tribes joining would be a major change. I don't think the fate of the world was sealed at that point in time, but it was significant I suppose. Several reasons behind it: First, it was the way the tribe wanted go, we were cornered and either had to spread out even further along the rim or attack either Nstlk* or ATTACK. Second, we already were working with many of their members so it would be easier once we merged. Third, was a good way to clean up both tribes, we only took half of our members. Finally, I was ready to quit TW so I was thinking that ~AOW~ members would be in good hands as members of ATTACK.

You were ready to quit TW?

I have quit a couple times ;)

How so?

If you look back at my nobling record, there are a couple of times that I started giving my villages to tribemates. It just seemed like a lot of work for the tribe and I missed playing so I came back and started playing again. There was also this Zarin guy that really didn't want me to quit, lol.

Yeah, they might have put me in charge ;) . So what did you think, when amongst ATTACK?

It took some time to adjust to a new tribe of course but it was good. The new council was made of equal parts ~AOW~ and ATTACK so that was great. If I remember correctly, it didn't take long for Nstlk* to take exception to this and start attacking.

Did you expect the merge when you decided to help ATTACK, or were you merely honoring the alliance?

Once again, if I remember correctly, I think we were simply honoring the alliance. Early discussions were based upon the fact that we were allies, and tribe members agreed that Nstlk* first broke the alliance circle so we had to support ATTACK.

How did you feel that the rest of the world was shaping up to this conflict?

I don't recall really, but I think people still thought that Nstlk* had a chance at that point.

Well, I think they did; Nstlk* took an early lead in the stats. Even after the merge, there were still a lot of undeclared tribes. At what point do you think Shadow, as it was, really took hold of things?

Maybe I should review your summary of W27 year #1, lol. I think there was still a chance that things could change up until the last couple months. I think the formation of the Coalition as it was called could have made a difference. It wouldn't have been a quick takeover, and maybe it could never have been successful in defeating Shadow, but it should have been able to do a lot more than it did.

So had ~AOW~ been a part of it, hypothetically, what would you have done differently?

If ~AOW~ was not part of Shadow, but rather joined the coalition? I think we would have attacked, lol, strange as that sounds. As a tribe we had many players that were not afraid to attack, and we had some great attack planners. I don't know what went on with coalition leader discussions but I would assume that there was rarely agreement on how to proceed. Unfortunately some leaders can't really work together that well.

I meant that, having seen the Coalition perform, where did they slip up?

Teamwork maybe? There were a couple of times I heard that there was an operation planned but only a couple people either claimed targets, or actually sent attacks. Once they even went so far as to send false information about an operation to distract from a real one. Some fake attacks went out but the real one never came together.

Well, Shadow has firmly crushed the original Coalition, what do you think contributes most to Shadow's enduring strength?

Teamwork: Tribemates respect each other and support each other. Leadership: We know that members of the council are willing to do everything they ask of the tribe (and more). Persistance: We don't tend to give up when we lose some troops; plans may change, but we continue to move forward. Relationships: The skype chats and forums can be great fun, we've got some crazies, lol. Don't worry, they know it already ;) I could add Patience (this is a game and not everyone can spend as much time online), Maturity (people mess up, we deal with it and move on), etc...

What do you see for the future of Shadow?

Shadow will carry on nobling anyone in their way. As people have mentioned, the lack of competition and therefore excitement could be the biggest challenge to keep people playing. I thought Styv's ideas last week were quite interesting, for W27 to admit defeat and then shuffle the world up over Christmas holidays.

Somehow I do not think Shadow would be so willing. How would you find it, fighting friends?

I don't think that would work for me...

True that, but who knows what will happen? What do you think of Shadow's opponents?

I think some in Shadow would like to have a real opponent yet. Shadow now has so many big (good) players that I don't think anyone could withstand a tribal attack. That might sound conceited but the discrepancy in tribe sizes is just too much. Maybe they should all disband, admit they have been defeated, then the world can be closed to the history books and we can do it again on another world!

I think it would be different somehow; Shadow has lacked the real opponents as you say. Do you think that they could hack it on another world, or are they getting rusty without strong opponents?

To be honest, it would take some serious adjustments to survive on another world and I would not say that Shadow would do as well as it has here.

Shadow has accepted a lot of *TKP* members, would you care to elucidate upon that?

That was done after I left, but *TKP* leader has always been an honest player so it is probably a good move. We had talked about adding some new members. It is clear to me that Shadow did not need members to win this world, the intention was simply to win it quicker. Maybe I sound conceited again but I say this only because of what I have experienced living on the front lines, and the simple math of how many players are left in the different tribes.

You say that but you and one or two others had left; I do think that, like many had suggested, activity can be a real danger. Do you think that there is any chance for Shadow's opponents; if they all declared upon Shadow now perhaps?

I suppose there is always a chance, but I would have to see it to believe it.

What do you see in store for a) yourself b) Shadow c) LIGHT d) FOME e) GR*FM e)*TKP* e) the rest of the world?

I will answer those in reverse order...

g) the rest of the world - sorry but if you are not in a major tribe by now, then what other future can there be but being rimmed (or invited into a major tribe)

f) *TKP* - obsolete I believe, Shadow has accepted most of their members

d + e) I hear some rumors so I will leave this be...

c) LIGHT - is being slowly rimmed, there are still a lot of villages left in the tribe, but many are inactive, and barbs are being nobled to keep the village count up :(

b) Shadow will finish this world, unfortunately some people have to leave, but I think there are enough left to finish this.

a) myself - I left this one for last... I gave away my account over a week ago. As mentioned earlier, I have tried to quit a couple of times but this time I will stick with it. I will miss my tribemates but some things have to be done.


Did you miss the more competitive nature of things once you came into Shadow, was it a reason for quitting?

It wasn't joining Shadow that killed the competition. It was just that in the last couple months, players that talked big just left went we started to attack: GrimLock, LordKhal, SnipeAlott... just some examples of possibly good players that didn't seem to care anymore...

Yes, but would you say that the demise of competition in the form of strong enemies was a cause for your waning interest in the game?

No, I am keen to finish the world, but I really have given too much of my life to TW. I have 6 kids, a full time job, plus a second part time one, and endless things to do so I really shouldn't be spending anymore time with TW. If it wasn't for the friends I made in the tribe I would have quit a long time ago.

I suppose that brings me onto your favourite things in the game, I assume you cite the friendships highly?

I do enjoy scouting for opportunites and jumping on them before your opponent realizes what is happening. But yeah, the friends have been great. One tribemate actually travelled through my hometown this year but unfortunately I had to travel that week otherwise we would have met each other! I was very disappointed.

Funny how these thing happen ;) . What about the other side, your least favourite parts?

The least favorite would have to be how it interferes with RL. It actually worked out well early in the game as we had a newboarn and I was up many times at night anyway lol. Fortunately I haven't had to do many co-ordinated attacks lately so I can schedule things a bit better. I have also had to deal with foul language, insults and threats against my family and personal wellbeing. Some people really take this stuff seriously.

We all do in our own ways, you can't put in that much time and say that you do not care deeply. On balance, has it been worth it, or has it been an addiction that you would have been better off without?

Having 300 villages doesn't really mean anything to anyone. I have made some friends, but I probably could have done that with less time spent. I hope I don't insult anyone with those words :(

This is true, people come for one reason and stick around for another. What have you learned at least?

Addictions are hard to beat... and that respect for other players will get you a long ways. Does that sound too obvious?

Not at all, there are life lessons here too kids. So what next for you, would you consider returning?

Maybe if TW is still around when I retire, lol. I think learning an instrument is next, maybe if I spend a year doing that now I will have another thing accomplished :)

Got to keep the mind active somehow, good luck with it. It was a pleasure as always, take it easy.

Thanks Zarin

Thoughts for the Week
A few words on the vicissitudes of the week and TW in general

It’s been a while since I committed my pen to verbiage or erudition, but it is that time again when I muse about TW. And indeed, we shall keep this week’s opus rigidly on the theme of TW as we look at that most dichotomising issue of the attack break.

For those unaware, the attack break simply means that one cannot damage enemy villages for a set period of time, and that any attacks which land within the window will simply have ‘visited’ the village, gaining nothing. Obviously, over the holiday periods, players may well not have the time to spend on TW dealing with their incomings, and it offers a break to many players. On the other hand, there are those who are infuriated that their targets escape attacks for these periods, allowing them to rebuild and reorder themselves, making it harder for the attacker. Some say that the game should stop for nothing, or even that it should be frozen somehow.

I know that many of you have blindly accepted the attack break as a welcome thing. You look forward to it, but I know most of you will still be on here, you still love to take a look around your villages, build those troops and store the packets as you do every day. And then of course you must wish your tribe well on the day, mail your friends with good wishes for the season and by the time you are past the deluge of seasonal ‘goodwill’ you have been here as long as ever. For the player who has not been lucky enough to receive attacks, you are simply prevented from nobling for a couple of days. It is not often that people are not on each day, even during the breaks, because tribes are likes families too in a way, and most of us are more addicted than we care to admit.

Of course, there are those times when it is beneficial; for those of us under attack at the time, the attack break is a welcome nepenthe, even if we are still on rebuilding walls and shuffling troops. It does at least keep us sane and our families from looking across disapprovingly. This is of course the official line, and the one that most of us consider, for those of us who don’t want to worry, but the reality is that we again are on here just as much.

It leaves the flip side to this, the perturbed attacker who yearns forlornly for your villages whilst being bombarded with reports for his troops ‘just visiting’. They are the loser in all of this, how can you keep up pressure when the defender gets these breaks so close together? You might as well eliminate this season from the attacking calendar, but is it not then the attacker’s fault for picking the wrong time to organise an operation? But then again, is it simply an operation that ran on too long, or an ongoing war? Would it not be more preferable for them to have the server completely frozen and to simply resume it after a few days, if such a thing were even possible?

On the surface, it seems that the attack break perfectly reasonable, and that I am just an awful person who cares for this game more than Christmas. Whilst the aforementioned may well be true, if one were to not accept these things so blindly, one might consider that this represents rather an interesting issue.

I talk of course about morality and ethics; I couldn’t resist could I? Anyway, this is an international server, not everyone here is going to be celebrating Christmas, and New Year is not really a celebration, but rather an excuse for hedonism and pointless nostalgia. Indeed, many here stand to lose out over the break because they cannot noble, but do not reap the benefits and it comes down to the rather interesting issue putting a majority at a disadvantage in the name of helping those in need. It almost sounds like a Christmas message, but was that what was going through your head; I know there was no vote this year, but cast your mind back to when there was, why did you vote how you did?

There is no reason why having a break should come out on top unless people are prepared to put aside such trivialities as the game in the name of Christmas and saying that for once in a while, there are more important things in life. It’s one of those funny things really, even the most committed players will turn round and declaim that actually, a break is good for everybody and I think there's a message there. You see, I am not here to argue a random point, just to put out there what the break is all about, and let you see it from other sides; it’s TW’s way of saying that there are more important things at times, no matter how addicted we are. Every year brings another set of circumstances for one’s game, and another chance to see whether the break is good or bad, but we all appreciate that maybe we should turn off our computers once in a while and enjoy what really matters. TW is the same whether you are wearing a paper hat or not, but it's not every day that you can be with your families to share in Christmas. That's the message that the break demonstrates, and we would do well to heed it. I guess that we should be grateful and enjoy the time away, so take it easy I suppose.​

Stats

Top Ten Tribes
1 Shadow 90.482.595 106.982.281 74 1.445.707 10924 9.793
2 LIGHT 31.259.233 38.933.390 78 499.146 4200 9.270
3 FOME 7.363.041 7.363.041 21 350.621 904 8.145
4 GR*FM 6.748.670 6.748.670 21 321.365 850 7.940
5 Theory 3.862.446 3.862.446 39 99.037 545 7.087
6 *TKP* 3.771.444 3.771.444 19 198.497 467 8.076
7 NOS 3.004.345 3.004.345 39 77.034 411 7.310
8 Dawn 2.776.719 3.257.581 89 36.602 617 5.280
9 WT3 2.315.744 2.315.744 35 66.164 345 6.712
10 B*O*B 1.434.170 1.434.170 40 35.854 251 5.714

Top Ten Players
1 gerick6 Shadow 3.992.511 390 10237
2 Zarin Shadow 3.878.835 380 10207
3 mikestuntz Shadow 3.776.603 376 10044
4 toby7304 Shadow 3.729.135 376 9918
5 Mande1992 Shadow 3.617.961 364 9939
6 filphillip Shadow 3.453.270 375 9209
7 Deciphered Shadow 3.447.826 344 10023
8 ftw97 Shadow 3.416.529 347 9846
9 Carthon II Shadow 3.354.784 346 9696
10 BrobFellshank Shadow 3.321.255 326 10188

Unfortunately there are no maps or comics this week, but I can promise that the Weekly will be going on every week over the festive period, and I shall have more time over the period to make a more in depth publication.​

[/spoil]​
 

DeletedUser

Guest
W27 Weekly: 20th December

Banner.png


[spoil]Zarin – Editor/Interview
sweeney2kaii8 – Maps

An apology to me on the tardiness of this work, I have been rather busy and put this out of my mind. It will also be a shorter issue, as I have decided to reorganise everything. As such, I am taking all the cool stuff from this issue and putting it in the next one, as that will be my bumper Christmas edition.​

Requiem of Souls
WT3 and Theory merge

It is always pleasurable that news continues to surprise, and this was one that I think few will have seen coming. It looks like a very complete merge of WT3 into Theory. It would seem that the loss of WT3’s leaders to Shadow has caused problems for them and made this merge a very viable option.

It puts -RoS- into the top 5, a solid boost to Theory in that regard, and they do have a not insignificant presence in the North West. However, this is an area where Shadow have been expanding heavily, and we should not expect WT3 refugees to be allowed an easy ride. Picking a conflict seems to have been already undertaken with the reports of LIGHT using Theory and now –RoS- to help against Sweeney. It may be a new power in the North, but there’s nothing new about the membership, and it won’t have Shadow worried. It’s a laudable name, but we wait to see how well the tribe actually works.​

Shadow Stronger Than Ever
The best weekly total for Shadow yet just adds to their enemies’ misery.

LIGHT
Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 146
Side 2: 8
Difference: 138

image.php


[IRON]

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 0
Side 2: 0
Difference: 0

image.php


NOS

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 10
Side 2: 2
Difference: 8

image.php


FURY

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 18
Side 2: 0
Difference: 18

image.php


It has been another excellent week for Shadow. An impressive total of 466 villages has left any opponents well in the dust, indeed many major tribes put together. What has inspired it is difficult to tell, perhaps a push to finish before the break, or the new *TKP* blood and more active membership therefore. Whatever the case, their enemies have suffered.

It has been a while since a number as high as 146 was touted against a single opponent, but Shadow have outdone themselves this week. Admittedly LIGHT got 8 in reply, but at the risk of floccinaucinihilipilification, Shadow should not be worried at all. They were most likely takebacks, rather than the bounty of any initiative and when you consider that LIGHT’s village count is deteriorating, it seems rather unpropitious.

Regarding the rest, [IRON] were forgotten, no doubt with good reason and I think that I shall make good my decision to exclude them from future stats. NOS continue to remain respectable with only slight losses compared to others and some hopeful games. Whilst one cannot claim that NOS are getting the better of Shadow, they are certainly not being humiliated and it refreshing. As we come to FURY, there’s little to tell; another set of losses looms for next week if their past form is anything to go by, and the stats serve only to demonstrate the degree to which Shadow focuses upon them.

While the attack break will do much to mitigate Shadow over the next week, their current resurgence in form does bring excellent promise for their new year.​

In Other News…
  • Thanks to all those who voted in the awards topic, and I encourage others to do the same, it is just a bit of fun.​

Thoughts for the Week
A few words on the vicissitudes of the week and TW in general

Well folks, we are approaching Christmas, and I thought I would do a slightly festive edition. I say slightly because I am as incorrigible as the next editor, but I decided that instead of casting my cynical musings upon the community (that’s next week), I felt that I should turn my mind to a few interesting little asides about Christmas that you probably don’t know. From some interesting facts, to some questions you never thought to ask, it’s here. Any offence caused is by no means intentional; it is written merely to offer food for thought over the festive period. In my usual style, the first question is the same…

Why do we call it Christmas?

It’s actually quite a simple one, no prizes for the ‘Christ’ part, and the ‘mas’ part is quite obviously just ‘mass’ too. Strictly speaking therefore Christmas is taken from the service of Christ Mass (Old English: Christes Maesse).

So why is it abbreviated to Xmas?

Well, the pretentious classicist in me wishes to point out that this first letter is not in fact an ‘X’, but rather the Greek letter ‘Chi’. Over the years, the funny looks I have received from pronouncing it as such however, have forced me to abandon the term all together, but I digress.

Anyway, ‘Chi’ is obviously the first letter of the Greek word ‘Christos’ (no Greek characters supported) which is simply Christ. It means exactly the same thing as Christmas.

There is some debate over the etiquette of its usage. The general consensus is that it is pronounced with a Latin ‘x’ sound and that it is a colloquial word. The problems seem to arise when it is used on cards, and whether this should be strictly allowed.

Yule? Noel?

Yule is rather a strange one. Its etymology is a little uncertain and points to a Germanic influence. It is thought to be derived from the Old English: ‘geol’, and its cognate, ‘giuli’, was the Saxon name for the two month season corresponding roughly to December and January which narrowed, in the wake of Christian influence to be synonymous with the 12 days of Christmastide. Yule itself should perhaps strictly be used to refer to the period as a whole.

Noel is one that some may also be familiar with, though it is in fact simply the French word without the accent. Its etymology points to Old French: ‘nael’, which in turn is from the Latin ‘natalis’ which means birth.

If anyone is wondering about ‘crimbo’, I can find nothing on that other than it being a slang term.

Why the 25th?

The 25th of December is not known to be Jesus’ actual birthday and why we have that specific date is the subject of much debate. It is debate beyond the scope of this piece, so I shall simply elucidate upon the various theories for this date having been chosen.

It is argued that this date is chosen simply because it is nine months after the ‘Annunciation’ – the conception of Jesus, and is thus a sensible date for his birth as this would be his presumed nativity assuming natural human gestation

A popular alternative is for the date to coincide with Pagan festivals as a means of simply taking existing imagery and dates and transforming them with a Christian meaning to make Christianity more pliable. The veracity of much of this is debate for scholars, and there is some evidence for this. There is also confusion about which festival it could relate to, though its proximity in date to the Winter Solstice does not seem insignificant.

Wikipedia summarises nicely: ‘For many centuries, Christian writers accepted that Christmas was the actual date on which Jesus was born. However, in the early eighteenth century, scholars began proposing alternative explanations. Isaac Newton argued that the date of Christmas was selected to correspond with the winter solstice, which in ancient times was marked on December 25. In 1743, German Protestant Paul Ernst Jablonski argued Christmas was placed on December 25 to correspond with the Roman solar holiday Dies Natalis Solis Invicti and was therefore a "paganization" that debased the true church.In 1889, Louis Duchesne suggested that the date of Christmas was calculated as nine months after the Annunciation (March 25), the traditional date of the Incarnation.

Father Christmas, Santa Claus and St. Nicolas

It should first be noted that these first two are not the same person, but have simply been merged in history. Father Christmas, and his many literal translations into other languages, is simply a character associated with Christmas spirit and cheer, but was not in fact a gift giver.

Gift giving itself in this form can be attributed to St Nicolas, who was Nicolas of Myra, a Christian bishop, associated with several miracles and one who did become a saint. He had a reputation for gift giving, in secret (some sources suggest into shoes), and this is the model that has been used for Father Christmas and Santa Claus. Interestingly, his own festival, on the 6th December is concerned with gift giving in some places whilst utterly ignored in others. Children from some countries put out a shoe on the night before to have it filled with gifts under the pretext that they have been good as is his tradition.

Santa Claus himself is the American reinvention of the Dutch Sinterklaas (meaning St. Nicolas), but Sinterklaas is associated with the 6th, not the 25th. In many Western countries, Santa Claus is the well known red figure who is concerned with gift giving. To be honest, it’s all a little confusing, and as tradition varies from country to country, one cannot be sure. Santa Claus and St Nicolas are technically the same person, but not celebrated as such.

We can be clear that the image we associate with Santa is relatively recent one. Although first depicted in liturgical attire, the modern, secular image is associated with advertisement, in particular, Coca-Cola, who are responsible for popularising the red attire. The sleigh seems only reasonable as a means of transport, him being from the North Pole, or some such snowy environment and it’s more child friendly compared to a possibly more ergonomic solution

Christmas Traditions

Well you’ve be doing these things for years, but have you ever questioned why?

Gift Giving

A very murky one here. Some suggest that it is directly related the Magi giving gifts to Jesus and a replication of that tradition. Others have suggested that it is representative of the gift of Jesus himself. Others still posit that it relates to the tradition of St Nicolas and his giving of gifts or even that it is related to gift giving among Romans at this time of year and was simply adopted as a Christian idea. Whatever the case, it does teach us the pleasure of giving.

The lack of evidence is obvious and the Church will claim these traditions as having a biblical origin, while cynics will claim that these traditions were simply stolen and rehashed by them. For a tradition now so central to the idea of Christmas, it is strange that there is so much debate about its origins.

Trees

It has been suggested that this has a Pagan origin, where trees would be bought into homes and decorated during the Saturnalia (a Roman festival in late December) and that this tradition was simply given a Christian veneer. It is also true that various groups associate this time with fertility and that any number of traditions involving he celebration of nature could be implicated.

There is a Christian alternative which states that St Boniface burned a tree in a village in Northern Germany to disprove the power of the Norse God Thor or alternatively that he cut down a tree to prevent the sacrifice of a child and a fir tree grew in its place. Therefore, either way a tree became a symbol of Christianity. There is also historical mention of Christmas trees first used in Germany for guildhalls and several folk tales surrounding their inception there. Whatever the case, there does seem to be strong Germanic origin, and any Christian ideas behind this seem rather flimsy upon reading of Jeremiah 10 from the bible.

Decoration

The origins of decoration are a little clearer, perhaps because there is no really discernible origin at all. It seems that decorations have a simply celebratory purpose, though various items are supposed to have various significance. Much of the decoration we see these days is unfortunately the work of businesses attempting to wrangle yet more money from the holiday, rather than for any specific point.

Stockings

We have a definitive answer here for a change, a Dutch origin here as these relate to Sinterklaas placing gifts in children’s shoes. The larger stocking or pillow case is a more modern idea attributed to Santa Claus and I would probably guess an indictment of modern greed, wanting more gifts.

Crackers

Another definitive answer as it seems these were invented by Thomas Smith, a London baker as a promotional tactic to sell bon-bons. Initially they came with messages, but this was expanded to include an explosive element. Over time, the constitution of the cracker changed, sweets were exchanged for novelty gifts, and jokes and paper hats were added later.

Boxing Day

One that some may not be familiar with, but this is the day after Christmas (26th) which is known in some places as Boxing Day. It relates simply to the custom of giving gifts in boxes after Christmas to the poor and is Anglo-Saxon tradition.

On this day

And if you are tired of celebrating Christmas, below is a selection of events you may to observe in lieu of it. I am indebted to wikipedia for the following list:

274 – Roman Emperor Aurelian dedicates a temple to Sol Invictus on the supposed day of the winter solstice and day of rebirth of the Sun.
800 – Coronation of Charlemagne as Holy Roman Emperor, in Rome.
1000 – The foundation of the Kingdom of Hungary: Hungary is established as a Christian kingdom by Stephen I of Hungary.
1066 – William the Conqueror is crowned as king of England, at Westminster Abbey, London.
1100 – Baldwin of Boulogne is crowned as the first King of Jerusalem in the Church of the Nativity.
1130 – Count Roger II of Sicily is crowned as the first King of Sicily.
1223 – St. Francis of Assisi assembles the first Nativity scene.
1261 – John IV Lascaris of the restored Eastern Roman Empire is deposed and blinded by orders of his co-ruler Michael VIII Palaeologus.
1553 – Battle of Tucapel: Mapuche rebels under Lautaro defeats the Spanish conquistadors and executes the governor of Chile, Pedro de Valdivia.
1599 – The city of Natal, Brazil is founded.
1643 – Christmas Island founded and named by Captain William Mynors of the East India Ship Company vessel, the Royal Mary.
1776 – George Washington and his army cross the Delaware River to attack the Kingdom of Great Britain's Hessian mercenaries in Trenton, New Jersey.
1818 – The first performance of "Silent Night" takes place in the church of St. Nikolaus in Oberndorf, Austria.
1837 – Battle of Lake Okeechobee: United States forces defeat Seminole Native Americans.
1868 – U.S. President Andrew Johnson grants unconditional pardon to all Civil War Confederate soldiers.
1914 – World War I: Known as the Christmas truce, German and British troops on the Western Front temporarily cease fire.
1926 – Emperor Taishō of Japan dies. His son, Prince Hirohito succeeds him as Emperor Shōwa.
1932 – A magnitude 7.6 earthquake in Gansu, China kills ~70,000 people.
1941 – Admiral Chester W Nimitz arrives at Pearl Harbor to assume command of the U.S. Pacific Fleet
1941 – World War II: Battle of Hong Kong ends, beginning the Japanese Occupation of Hong Kong.
1947 – The Constitution of the Republic of China goes into effect.
1950 – The Stone of Scone, traditional coronation stone of British monarchs, is taken from Westminster Abbey by Scottish nationalist students. It later turns up in Scotland on April 11,1951.
1963 – Turkish Cypriot Bayrak Radio begins transmitting in Cyprus after Turkish Cypriots are forcibly excluded from Cyprus Broadcasting Corporation.
1965 – The Yemeni Nasserite Unionist People's Organisation is founded in Taiz
1968 – Apollo program: Apollo 8 performs the very first successful Trans Earth Injection (TEI) maneouver, sending the crew and spacecraft on a trajectory back to Earth from Lunar orbit.
1968 – 42 Dalits are burned alive in Kilavenmani village, Tamil Nadu, India, a retaliation for a campaign for higher wages by Dalit labourers.
1973 – The ARPANET crashes when a programming bug causes all ARPANET traffic to be routed through the server at Harvard University, causing the server to freeze.
1974 – Cyclone Tracy devastates Darwin, Northern Territory Australia.
1974 – Marshall Fields drives a vehicle through the gates of the White House, resulting in a four-hour standoff.
1977 – Prime Minister of Israel Menachem Begin meets in Egypt with President of Egypt, Anwar Sadat.
1989 – Nicolae Ceauşescu, former communist dictator of Romania and his wife Elena are condemned to death and executed under a wide range of charges.
1990 – The first successful trial run of the system which would become the World Wide Web.
1991 – Mikhail Gorbachev resigns as president of the Soviet Union (the union itself is dissolved the next day). Ukraine's referendum is finalized and Ukraine officially leaves the Soviet Union.
2003 – The ill-fated Beagle 2 probe, released from the Mars Express Spacecraft on December 19, disappears shortly before its scheduled landing.
2004 – Cassini orbiter releases Huygens probe which successfully landed on Saturn's moon Titan on January 14, 2005.

What is perhaps most interesting about Christmas, to my mind at least is the nature of its celebration. It is the most carelessly observed and tradition for tradition’s sake seems to be the modus operandi for most. It is perhaps worth considering what you are actually celebrating before you do so, even if that is not a popular approach.

I shall close by commenting that the above piece was both one of the most interesting and frustrating things I have ever researched. Every source seems to have a different take on most traditions, and with so many countries doing so many different things, it’s a bit of a minefield. The consensus, with just about every tradition, is that there is a Christian explanation, numerous Pagan ones and plenty of people cynical enough to blame one on the other. I could sit here for hours putting every origin, but I have tried to pick the most prevalent and have been as balanced as possible.​

Stats

Top Ten Tribes
1 Shadow 93.632.539 110.494.736 73 1.513.627 11269 9.805
2 LIGHT 31.044.320 37.150.681 75 495.342 3995 9.299
3 FOME 7.535.587 7.535.587 21 358.837 918 8.209
4 GR*FM 7.083.819 7.083.819 21 337.325 870 8.142
5 -RoS- 6.061.626 6.334.365 67 94.543 894 7.085
6 *TKP* 3.856.380 3.856.380 18 214.243 462 8.347
7 NOS 3.193.709 3.193.709 40 79.843 436 7.325
8 Dawn 3.152.548 3.690.844 89 41.470 652 5.661
9 ASS 1.972.770 2.003.662 68 29.466 339 5.911
10 BIP 1.761.305 1.761.305 27 65.234 236 7.463

Top Ten Players
1 gerick6 Shadow 4.225.660 412 10256
2 Zarin Shadow 4.081.748 399 10230
3 mikestuntz Shadow 3.913.915 389 10061
4 toby7304 Shadow 3.883.859 389 9984
5 ftw97 Shadow 3.643.124 370 9846
6 Mande1992 Shadow 3.633.145 366 9927
7 Deciphered Shadow 3.599.973 359 10028
8 filphillip Shadow 3.588.570 386 9297
9 BrobFellshank Shadow 3.501.269 344 10178
10 Carthon II Shadow 3.389.290 349 9711

Maps

Top Tribes
toptribes.jpg


Top Players
101.jpg


I wish you all a very, very Merry Christmas. I shall be doing a Weekly next Sunday and as it is the Christmas issue, I promise a surfeit of cheer for all. Take it easy folks, and enjoy the time off.​

[/spoil]​
 

DeletedUser

Guest
W27 Weekly: 27th December

Banner.png


[spoil]Zarin – Editor/Interview
sweeney2kaii8 – Maps
Submissions: Silverwolf008


So it is that the last issue of the year is upon us. I should like to thank all those who have supported it; I cannot believe that I have been at it so long. I owe particular thanks to those who have submitted articles, maps, comics and even written in my stead. To all of you I am indebted.

It has had its ups and downs; from late postings, to my own disagreements in how it should be written, to the general apathy of the community. Admittedly it has frustrated and maddened at times, but it is also incredibly satisfying to write and I hope that the readership has found something worth reading for.

I thought that we would end the year on a high note as it were. We have the news for it, the interview, and my own brand of nostalgia thrown into the mix. I hope you enjoy the final issue of the year and I look forward to writing the next 52 and beyond.​

One Last Throw
GR*FM declares upon Shadow

Yet another war graces Shadow, yet another stands against their dominion on this world. As much as it pains me to say it, we shall put the talk of dishonour, of deals and ultimata aside as the pursuit of PnP and turn to some analysis. We finally have a reasonable war on our hands. It may be a horrendous mismatch with regards to points, but GR*FM have shown themselves to be tenacious enough to stand up to Shadow, albeit a little late. We have some PnP finally, some conquers from both sides, and a sense of a good fight.

One supposes that following the demise of FURY, that front has been very quiet indeed, and there will no doubt be some very contented Shadow players. On the other side, GR*FM have not had a serious conflict in their history which means two things: they lack experience and that they have most of their villages full of troops. It does mean that GR*FM have an advantage in terms of useful resources in the area for the time being. What they don’t have is a sea of blue villages from which to request a multitude of support, nor indeed do they have the depth in their membership to be able to find enough sitters if they get into trouble.

With such a disparity in size, GR*FM simply cannot afford a protracted war where Shadow have the ability to bring a mass of fresh troops constantly to the front while they will struggle to recycle what they have. Without LIGHT providing any discernible threats, Shadow can afford a luxurious amount of support for that front which leaves GR*FM in a difficult position indeed.

Unless these early attacks can evolve into a larger offensive, they will allow Shadow to shut them out, and then grind them into submission utterly. Their position allows no prospect of retreat, and the front is unfortunately large with almost any village a feasible target from the frontline. The timing too is an interesting choice when considering this issue, seemingly allowing Shadow the luxury of the attack break to replenish the front, utterly surrendering their only advantage. On the other hand, it could enable them to prevent Shadow from organising a structured counter-offensive and prevent them from re-taking some of the villages taken from them. Once the break is done, the front is likely to be fully prepared and then we shall see the true measure of these two.

It leaves FOME as the only wildcard and their ambition the only catalyst to induce anything more than complete annihilation. Shadow watches them carefully no doubt. Shadow have shown themselves to be composed enough to deal with actions such as these, where new fronts open on the spur of the moment and they will not be afraid in light of the first wave. We wait to see the retaliation.

So how does it leave the rest of the world? Well the rest of the world is most LIGHT and they have been quiet with respect to this new development. We may finally see some initiative, even a new Coalition! Unfortunately, it comes too late, regardless of whether LIGHT augment this development; Shadow are simply too large to feel threatened.

I think we finally come to the ‘casus belli’ as it were. One would hope that GR*FM do not seriously expect to win, this conflict is as asymmetrical as they come. Instead one considers this to be a final act of defiance, something to be remembered for and it will be remembered I am sure. Stats are not worthwhile at the moment, so we simply wish both sides good luck, and plead for some reasonable PnP.​

Christmas Cheer Consoles Contenders
Enemies relieved by Christmas break, but Shadow still dominant

Oh joy, the Christmas break stats. Obviously it should be noted that half the week was lost to an attack break, so stats here are going to be dull and probably uncomplimentary to any side. Nevertheless, they are thus.​

LIGHT

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 64
Side 2: 1
Difference: 63

image.php


NOS

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 4
Side 2: 0
Difference: 4

image.php


FURY

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 4
Side 2: 0
Difference: 4

image.php


It seems that only attack breaks can stand in the way of the Shadow war machine. A brief regard of the totals for the week indicates that, despite losing 3 days of play, Shadow still maintains a thorough lead.

What more is there to say? As we close up for the year, Shadow are ahead as ever, and factoring in the time lost, it is another excellent week for Shadow. Their enemies are saved utter humiliation by managing a single conquer and any hope on that front will lead to disappointment. NOS and FURY escape much of Shadow’s attention, but it is not as if they are at all threatening. Yet again, the writing is on the wall.​

In Other News…
  • RoS became WT2, and then a new tribe called PURGE was formed minus one or two members. Who knows what is going on there?​

  • hudshot, who has something to do with the above announced that he would be leaving. We wish him well.​

Interview

Zarin
Ephette

Why do you call yourself Ephette?

I used to play the MMORPG: ‘Everquest’ and ‘Everquest II’. The name of my warrior was Ephette - Effete : feeble and incapable, I loved the irony of my warrior, who should be the fighter of the group, not being up to the task. I saw that people were using all sorts of weird and wonderful names in this game, so revived my warrior for the task.

So where and how did your first TW experience start?

I was looking for another online game to play, Everquest no longer held a great appeal due to the changes ingame. A work colleague of my husband introduced him to TW. I watched him play it for about a week and decided to have a go as well. I started on W2, just before the world was locked. Joined the RUM Pirates (don't ask) who later joined the TW family, there were at the time 3 very large families on the world. Quit the world a few months later and started W6 and 12, went on from there.

You played W12, what do you know of DNY who are in a similar position to Shadow?

Some of the best players who will ever play TW. Or used to be, a lot of the most amazing guys in-game quit for various reasons. I know that every world that starts throws about the names of the best players that they have, but the way DNY's leadership masterminded their journey to the top was nothing short of genius.

Would you care to perhaps elucidate, you did no doubt learn from them?

http://forum.tribalwars.net/showthread.php?t=97359 - This may answer part of that question.

[spoil]If it was judged by ability in all facets of the game I would have to agree with burns about his top 3 there in the form of TW, OA and DNY as the best tribes individually in TW history.

If you go through the DNY players and look at the categories of:

Defensive Capabilities

You see the likes of Pawen who is a fantastic defender, and held of countless waves of DNY attacks totaling her 20 mill ODD and still managed to survive comfortably and grow. That isn't easy. Add the likes of jo.ro, Brutus, Sir M. Mr Blonde pyle1234, PE and the other former Oots members who did the same. I may not get along with all of them or even like them but credit where credit is due and that has my respect. Then combine them with bob dover, tbolling, faaaark, Eddy, Tcz and Prey Slayer and I swear thats like banging your head against a brick wall. YOu just cant beat that defensive line up at all.

As a tribe as a whole, the defense and support amongst the members is phenomenal. There is no leaving any member behind and that is a key point that you just cant leave out. The tribe functions as one and its an impenetrable fortress in a sense.

Offensive Capabilities.

With some of the best coordination and attack plans the offensive capabilities is endless. Pawen as the war coordinator is a great step as her attack plans were great. Slightly unthought out in my opinion due to locations but the idealogy and the planning and set up was fantastic. The groups themselves are well balanced and equally strong. Its no wonder that when Oots died, that VIRUS members went inactive. You faced the onslaught of DNY which is just hideously frightening.

With the awesome attacking skills and timing from the likes of Sir M, Pawen, jekoh, tbolling, Rednecks, Emp Tai, baddersben, bob again Pyle and then add the Might of probally the most devastating attacker in World 12 in the form of Chultok, that is why DNY will not be stopperd by anyone or anything other than inactivity.

Team Work

Fantastic coordination and bonds between the members just makes DNY stick together like glue. An old saying "One for all and All for One" comes to mind when I consider the tenacity of the DNY members. Perfectly meld together in capabilities, skill levels and friendships.

Leadership

Best leadership in a tribe I have ever and will ever see in my opinion. The diplomatic skills of Dadcanaidu is phenomonal, leadership decisions made by their council is to the tee perfect and Emp Tai holds the ship together. Awesome.




I could probably break more categories out but thats enough said right there.

DNY = The Win.
[/spoil]

Not my post btw, that was a copy and paste from that section.

Many thanks. So then, why did you come to W27?

W12 had come to an end for me, I was looking for a world whose settings would suit my lifestyle. I prefer a slower world because then, if you don't manage to get online for several hrs, it’s not such a waste of resources etc. The settings really appealed to me. There were too many worlds whose cores immediately got swamped by pre-mades. A world with a tribal lock and no support outside tribe immediately put everyone on the same footing. There are too many players who get to where they are because they have been carried by their tribe. Put them on their own, and then you can see what they are really made of.

So you felt that the tribe lock was a positive thing?

Yes and no. yes, it was a fantastic idea, but it went on for too long. 2 months would have been better, too many folks lost interest before lock was lifted.

So if it were to be repeated, what would you change? Or indeed, would you even join another world with a tribe lock?

Yes I would like to have another tribal locked world. A few changes I would like to see implemented would be:
- tribe lock brought down to 2 months
- an ability for tribes to revote on their leadership (after dukes were appointed, too many dukes lost interest so the tribe were not able to do anything about it).
- people joining the world later to be given a higher points village, so they were on par with others around them points wise.


Do you think that it was good for newer players, or simply enabled stronger ones to pick on neighbours who could get no support?

A little of both. People the world over - at least at the start of worlds - tend to start farming people whose points are not growing as fast as them. New players who kept up their points found themselves in a more favourable position, than a traditional world where player x and his 5 mates from another world would of all been working together to clear him.

I suppose we should move on to your path. Did you always intend to build such a strong tribe with the goal of world domination in mind, and do you think that the tribe lock contributed to the success of ATTACK/Shadow?

I came to this world to prove something - to myself as well as to other people. In W12 I was a baron in a tribe full of dukes who were not prepared to make hardcore decisions. I had to persuade them to start every war that we were involved in. I vowed that I would never again get caught up in a tribe where the dukes were not prepared to make the decisions that would ensure that a tribe became the best it could be. I had seen the best tribes, some of the best players in action. I had seen the things I liked, and I wanted to see if I could guide a tribe into achieving that same success. I wanted to see if people would follow my guide because the decisions I made were the right ones (How arrogant does that sound?) I wanted to be something in-game that I am not in real life. Sorry went slightly off your question with that.

For the second part of the question: yes definitely; a lot of people made short term goals. I made long term plans, and started to put them in action. A lot of people I spoke to were looking at gaining K domination, I was looking at world domination. I made contact with people in particular areas. Have a look back at the early just after tribe lock released maps, our tribe covered a number of areas. K domination limits a tribe; I didn't want to set boundaries, because the long term plan was that there would be none.


Did you always retain a conviction in dominating the world, or were there times when you did not think it was possible?

There were times when a little doubt set in – there’s still a human person sitting behind the computer screen after all, but I didn't, I hope, allow those doubts to be shown to the tribe.

How quickly into the game did you get things in motion with regards to contacting people?

The first "obstacle" for want of a better word, was getting the leadership position. For those who weren't here at the start of the world, when we joined this world we were put by the game into a random tribe. Tribe numbers were pretty evenly balanced out due to some genius game mechanics put into place :) When a tribe had 100 members, they had to vote for a tribe leader. Imagine the situation. You're thrown into a tribe, where no one knows anyone else, and you have to persuade 99 strangers that you're the best one for the job. You couldn't prove your great nobling skills because the game had not advanced to that stage. I couldn't prove my previous gaming history because I started W27 under a different name. I had my first lucky break at this point in the game. I was in our locked tribe with a fantastic player called RobtheGreat. Rob would have made an incredible duke, but instead he chose to throw his support behind me. There were a few noobs running for duke as well, but I gained the majority vote, and then started on the next step.

When I had the duke position secured, I started scouring the neighbourhood, and further afield, adding names and sending out a few feelers to see how readily people would join an unknown tribe after the lock.

Judging of players itself was a 3-fold step. TW stats, progress ingame and intuition. Don't laugh at the latter, never ever underestimate intuition. When that gut feeling tells you that things are going to go horribly, horribly wrong, then too many times it turns out to be right. I made contact with people dotted around various areas. I cheated a little at this stage because I sort of name dropped a little, without really naming names, about players who would be joining us. The greatest bait for most people joining a tribe is to know that there are other good players joining it. My second lucky break at this stage was being contacted by another incredible player, Ojibweman. He brought some players from his area into the tribe, and came in as the co-duke. The credit for the initial building up and gaining a stronghold in that area goes to him, I was very, very sorry to see him go.


So, what were ATTACK's first steps after the lock?

We had our 100 member tribe limit - yes I was one of those annoying people mailing everyone to vote for 100 members. We chose a new tribe name. And we started to work together as a tribe.

Well, seeing as many will want me to ask: why 100 members?

We needed the tribe space due to the amount of people who had shown interest in joining us. If a 60 member limit had gone in - that was the second most popular option if memory serves me right, then we would of had to do a "family" tribe - how I hate those, though whether we would of had 2 separate names so as not to make it obvious that we were connected was something we fortunately never did have to decide on.

So your idea, for your tribe, was obviously very popular, or at least well sold?

I'd like to think it was well sold :p

How did you feel that the others tribes were faring in the first few days, the likes of Nstlk*, PM and LA-G etc?

We were keeping a close eye on LA-G and Feb 13 - dominance in the world was evenly spread between the 3 tribes, we all had the same idea, we also knew that an early war would have to be very carefully timed. PM were never really an issue as we were contacted less than a week later by a member of their tribe, who wanted to bring some members of PM into our tribe.

You talk of albrew of course, what do you think that he brought to the tribe?

Not as much as was anticipated. Albrew and I never saw eye to eye on things. Just as a quick backtrack through the history books, Oji and myself were dukes, Albrew was coming to the tribe on the condition that he came in as a baron. Not too long after he was promoted to duke. Oji and I discussed the situation at length and decided that we could do this, because if there were any decisions that were not a majority, then we could still push things through as a majority. Shortly after this time Oji announced he would be retiring from the game due to rl time constraints. This was a very dark time for me personally, loosing Oji and having a fairly poor working relationship with Albrew that rapidly deteriorated.

Ok, so PM collapsed, what were your diplomatic moves towards the rest, whom were you wary of and whom did you count amongst friends?

I'm relying on memory here for some of this, so apologies if I get any of it wrong. We did not have any allies at this point in the game, as there was no need for them. We were keeping one eye on LA-G to our West, and one eye on Feb 13 who were right in the middle of our North and South sectors. PM we had very slight question mark over, though within a week their tribe was no more. Other tribes were not perceived as a threat at this stage in the game.

I may be wrong on this one too, but I do not think at this point that we had any naps either. I know we set K55 tribe as a nap at some point, but I think this was a few months down the line.


How was recruitment to the tribe and the membership as a whole shaping up?

I wanted to give a place to all the people who I had contacted, or had contacted me, but as the dominant placement of the tribe became more obvious, more people started to ask about joining, and soon after we have the maximum number of people we had to start looking at cutting down on numbers. We also got many, many requests for tribes to become our academy tribe, all of which were turned down.

You had no qualms about early mass recruiting?

In this world: no. Why? Because it would not of been something permanent. We needed the initial placements to get people in the tribe, and then we could start assessing peoples abilities. Its hard to form a true judgement of someone till they're in the same tribe, then you can see what they are really like.

And we weren't mass recruiting, there were no random invites, the people had all been chosen )


What I meant was: you took in every player who contacted you, you possibly did not vet players when it was sensible and simply bought in everybody you could

No I have to disagree with that, we did not bring in every person who asked us, it would have been impossible.

And how do you vet a player who’s stuck in a tribe they don't want to be in, with an absent leader, and no tribe mates around them for miles.


You can see how well they are growing can you not? It seems to me that you may well have invited a lot of useless players to inflate numbers.

Growth in a world this early can be part luck part skill. What would inflating our numbers achieve ? We did incorporate a smaller tribe, yes. This was due to an agreement that had been made earlier ingame. So what’s worse, keep your word and have some extra temporary members, or give yourself a reputation from the start for having no integrity?

Oh, I don't think it was ever a question of integrity, but rather one of poor management and noob tactics that other tribes disliked.

Other tribes will always dislike things about a tribe that they feel threatened by. And if we did have such poor management, and by that conclusion the tribes around us had better management and better tactics, than why was it our tribe that won every war we fought in?

I think you are allowing ends to justify means there, you may well have won because you mass-recruited, but that does not detract from the stigma of mass-recruitment itself.

As far as members go, we have:
#9 BAN 97
#1 ATTACK 86
#16 ~Fo.D~ 81
#3 LA-G 79
#12 RIM, 78
#15 Autumn 76
#5 Nstlk* 62
#2 Feb.13 59
#7 K55 59
#14 -W- 47
#19 ~S*K~ 47
#17 [Cage] 44
#8 ~AOW~ 37
#20 WK? 35
#4 YGI? 24
#13 J1g$@w 21
#18 *Epic 20
#6 RB 18
#10 T-GR 16
#11 PM 10


Tribe lock opened 13th Feb. 9 days later these were the numbers of players in the top tribes. If people wish to say we mass recruited they are welcome to do so. Does the end justify the means? In real life: possibly not. However here we are playing a game. And we can all live for our 5 minutes of glory, and tell everyone how right back when dinosaurs ruled the world we were the number one tribe for 2 months, or we can look back at W27 and know that we ruled it for the majority of our time on this world.

This is very true, so let's discuss your first war with LA-G. I suppose the first question is one of why.

I guess you want the real, honest, truthful answer. What was going on in my mind anyway. The central K's were held by 3 tribes. Us, LA-G and Feb 13. Either 2 tribes were going to gang up on the third. There was a strong possibility that it would be those 2 vs us. Or 2 tribes would go to war and then the third would jump in on one side or the other. So it came down to this. Which tribe would sit on the sidelines and watch the longest before hopping in? The general reasons for the war are the ones that can be found the world over: expansion – target them before they grow any bigger. And to show the world what we are made of.

And how did the war go, did ATTACK exceed expectations, or were LA-G simply shocking?

I'll need to go back in history a little to fully answer that question. We had picked out the tribe we were going to war; set the crucial targets; were waiting for the planned day to post a declaration and launch. Before launch day came, LA-G suffered some very serious internal problems. Their leadership was blown apart. There was a very interesting post from Tacops about it on the 22nd of Feb. We declared as had been the plan on the 23rd, but by this stage a fair number of people had already left the tribe.

(http://forum.tribalwars.net/showthread.php?t=125784)

Stats for "last week" on the 27th Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 0
Side 2: 67
Difference: 67


How different do you think things would have been without the internal problems?

We had confidence in our members. We had the forums set for clear postings about needing support, for scoutings of enemy villages etc. This was our first chance in this new world to show what we were made of. We went into this war fully aware of the risks - which did turn out to be true. Feb 13 did declare on us while we were at war with LA-G. (Feb 28th I think it was) Why they waited a week I do not know. Perhaps to see which way the war was going to go. They said they had been planning on declaring against us for awhile, but due to the way the initial war went, we did feel it was more an opportunistic move on their part.

Well, despite your preparations, that war did not go so well early on, would you say that Feb.13 proved what you were made of?

Yes the war with Feb 13 (and the cleanup of LA-G) was the start of the making of our tribe. We suffered initial losses, which were very much expected. And this was the message that we repeatedly sent to the tribe. That the losses were ok, they were no more than we had been expecting. To sidetrack a little on this, I think sometimes this is what so many people can forget. They lose a village or 2 and it’s the end of the world for them. Why? If you're taking losses, take a moment out. And then re-strategise. If option A is not working, give option B a go. We expected losses. We took them, but then we stood firm, and hit back hard.

Did you ever expect other tribes to declare upon you at this time?

There were always rumours, and posts that ended up on the forums showing that tribes had shared forums and were plotting to take us out. We were keeping a very wary eye on the North, tribes like YGI? could have really given us a headache up there. The smaller tribes who were plotting were not considered a serious risk.

Did Feb.13 fall more easily than you expected, when you hit back?

Yes, surprisingly. They had taken such a lead on us, at one point very early in the war they were 53 - 11. However, they were concentrating on the North, which was our most vulnerable area, as it was cut off from the rest of the tribe. I think poor tactics and a lack of commitment from some of their membership led to a change in the war. A week later we were on a better footing.

ATTACK is now winning 24 hour and 48 hours stats but is still down by a lot in the weekly stats.

How did that northern island of players come about?

RobtheGreat, original tribe member from the very start and one time baron of the tribe was in the North, where the game randomly placed him at the start. We picked up a few folks around him so he wasn't isolated up there. We also then made contact with Lord of Bones, who was going to be starting his own tribe, and instead joined us and brought a few people with him.

Why did ATTACK not pursue the remnants of Feb.13?

Feb 13 disbanded, their members formed some new tribes; others joined some existing tribes. Although we had won by default, we were not in a position to be starting on several new tribes immediately. We had to regroup and rebuild troops. The war till this point had been very fast and intensive. Heavy losses had been taken. Launching straight into a mass war on other tribes would have been asking for disaster.

How did the peace develop between yourselves and the Feb.13 remnants, why were they not back at you as soon as Nstlk* declared?

There was an uneasy peace between the remnants. We were in a more favourable position, because, due to the settings on the world, you can't support people outside your tribe. Therefore if any of them wanted to start another war, they would not have had as many people as they had before. There were attempts being made for a couple of tribes to join together, but we were also working behind the scenes to see what deals we could secure for increasing our membership.

How was the rest of the world shaping up to your mind?

YGI? had merged into Nstlk*, they had created an academy tribe as well. ~AOW~ in the SW would soon join us in a merge. The SE was an interesting area because there was still the likes of T-GR; their leader ended up quitting the world and several smaller tribes ended up forming. The central area of the world was still a mish-mash of various tribes. There was almost a stagnation period round this side of the world as everyone stopped to watch what would happen in the new war.

How were things going diplomatically with Nstlk*?

There were a lot of discussions behind the scenes going on between ourselves, Nstlk* and ~AOW~. The big question mark was hanging over AOW; if things turned sour which side would they join? Ourselves and Nstlk* had an East/ West split with ~AOW~ to our South. To be perfectly honest, I don't remember all the reasons why things started to go wrong between the tribes – a lot of discussion was taking place on skype, but as I no longer have these people on my contacts lists I can't being up the conversations.

How confident were you that ~AOW~ could be relied upon?

As to which side they would join: I had some inside info about someone in ~AOW~ who was related to someone in this tribe. Due to their influential positions in both tribes, there wasn't really all that much of a choice. I did find out about this info quite late in the whole alliance business, or I'm sure things would have happened a lot more quickly. I was actually eyeing up AOW as a target before this information came to light :)

Well, keeping that thread going, how do you think that would have gone?

We would have trounced you guys :p

So you say...and this would be before Nstlk* got to you, so possibly better that you didn't go for that?

Not all of our tribe were involved in the Nstlk* war, in fact we kept getting requests from some members for us to please pick a war on their side of the world for a change, so I'm sure we could have got some long distanc nukes and nobles into the equation.

It's certainly an interesting hypothetical one, but I don't think it would have ended well for ~AOW~ either, in the end. Anyway, did you always intend to merge with them?

No, it was a very late decision that had been made. There was friction stirring between ~AOW~ and the tribes in the SE, in fact until I find out the info that changed the way I saw them, I was wanting to encourage a war in the South so that there could be no joining sides against us. However fate dictated that other events were to unfold.

You were trying to have them war T-GR?

It would have been an interesting scenario to watch.

Was there always going to be a war with Nstlk*, was an NAP until the end of the world or merge discussed?

My memories of long term goals discussed are a little hazy on that one.

So the war itself, did it go as you expected?

No definitely not. While we always expect to see people leaving the game due to rl pressures, or having had enough of the game, it was quite shocking to see the number of good players who left Nstlk*.

Would you say therefore that you won more on the loss of their best players, than through your own skill?

I cannot answer without looking through stats, and working out gains in comparison to when people left the tribe / were known to be inactive.

That's a yes then...

I did not say that. However you are welcome to interpret that reply however you wish, as are all your readers.

Very well then, let's talk about Shadow. How did the tribe appear to you, in its infancy?

Although Shadow was to all intents and purposes a new tribe, we saved ourselves a lot of work by inviting into the existing ATTACK, the people that the ~AOW~ leadership wanted in. Therefore forums did not have to be reset. Leadership was for the most part kept as it had been, so this was more a time of the new Shadow members getting used to some new forums, as our tribes had already been working together prior to the merge.

Why the name Shadow too?

We held a tribe competition and asked people to choose names and then we voted on it.

How did you expect the rest of the world to react to the merge?

I'm not sure how much of the world first realised what we had done. The world by this stage was plagued with inactivity everywhere, and the public forums have their dedicated followers, but a lot of folks don't seem to use them, so many would not have even noticed the change on the map thread. The more northerly tribes probably felt it did not affect them too much due to the distance. Nstlk* probably saw it coming. And in some ways it sealed the fate of the SE side of the world.

Do you think that this time was the last when Shadow could have been stopped, if other tribes had declared at this point?

When we look back on the world’s history, there are many occasions when we could have been stopped. Yet time after time, tribes stood back to watch and see what was happening before being willing to commit. And yes, if the rest of the world had banded together and joined Nstlk*’s assault on us, then today’s map may have looked a little different than it does today.

Would you care to pick a side in that hypothetical conflict?

For a winner? I couldn't possibly say anyone but Shadow :)

Naturally, naturally. So as the Nstlk* war waned in its intensity, we saw the Coalition form; what were your initial thoughts?

Here we go again, I mean, what was the point, if you don't fight in one tribe does changing the name and adding a few more people really make that much difference? Again they got tactics wrong. Lots of people in lots of tribes who cannot support each other. Why did the fighters not all join one tribe, and work together as a tribe? How does anyone know if Player X in allied tribe Y is really sending attacks? And how many people really trusted the other members of the coalition? There was no true coordination, there were too many folks not willing to get involved. For a last ditch effort it was a very sad one.

Hence then, how would you have done it differently?

If I were in charge of the coalition, I would have banded everyone together in one tribe - 100 places available gives you a good few places to get the people you need together. I won't say what else I would do just in case any members of LIGHT are reading this :)

Were you confident of victory even at the beginning?

Confident of victory? Absolutely; we had a lot of new players to the game in this tribe, but we learned a lot and we learned quickly. And fighting is after all what the game is about. What’s more exciting, having mass warfare on your neighbours across the road or nobling your 40th barbarian village? Most people, I do think, prefer a good fight. Not all the time though, even the die-hards need a break now and then :)

What did you think of REF?

I had to take a moment there to think who they were - does that say what little impact they had on this world?

Indeed it does, do you think that the formation of them destroyed Nstlk*, or was it a necessary move that was poorly managed?

My question would be: what were they trying to achieve? What purpose did the tribe serve? All they did was take away people who might have been willing to fight, because after the tribe formed, we hardly heard another squeak from them, and it left Nstlk* in a very poor position.

And how about [IRON], they did at least attack, what did you think of them?

Very poorly managed. There were too many people including the leadership trying to cut deals for themselves, at the cost of their tribe.

Would you care to expand upon that?

Not really as I no longer have the mails, so I can't back it up.

[IRON] did at least do some work against Shadow, what do you think has changed with the transition into LIGHT?

What did they hope to achieve, they took bad leadership in with them, people who had no real intentions of fighting? The tribe members themselves will know how much support and coordination went into their "new and improved" tribe.

As it stands then, you no longer rate LIGHT as an enemy?

They are an enemy to the extent that we will continue to noble their villages. As far as a priority - no, as stats show our noblings have gone downwards slightly. We're not fighting a war any longer; we're having a clean up operation.

Out of all of your enemies, do you think any presented a worthy challenge?

Feb 13 immediately come to mind. Opportunists who if they had kept at it would have given us a run for our money. Why they lost steam I don't truly know, I know there were internal factors involved, in a way it was a sad way for things to go. Nstlk* never really lived up to the hype, again through inactivity. I do believe there was a lot of account sitting going on; it’s a very, very quick way to destroy a tribe’s morale.

What do you think are the main challenges facing Shadow now?

Loss of tribe members due to rl time constraints, or boredom within the game. To keep on top of this we have recently recruited some new members into the tribe, as long as we can keep the smaller folks coming in, we can also stop morale becoming too much of an issue as well.

Do you think these things are a realistic possibility?

People leaving the game? People always leave the game. A look through any tribe on any world confirms this. It is not just this tribe who is affected by members leaving, but every tribe in every world.

I was getting more at the fact that, with Shadow lacking strong opponents, could Shadow face a significant problem in boredom?

Many people have said they will be here till the end so no, it will not be a problem.

Do you think that Shadow deserves to win W27?

Absolutely, we have fought war after war after war. We have worked together as a tribe to achieve our successes. Now we deserve to reap the benefits.

But do you feel that you have been truly tested?

Were we pushed to our limits? No. Did we have more to give if it was needed? Yes I am sure we did.

What factor has been most integral to the success of ATTACK/Shadow?

If you want a one word answer to that, it will have to be Teamwork.

If you had your time over again, what would you do differently? Do you have any regrets?

If I had my time over I'd hopefully not start playing this game because it’s far too addictive :) As far as W27 goes, with the gift of hindsight, I'm sure we would have dealt with our recruitment slightly differently - not as far as numbers go, but players we let in. But there will never be any regrets for the wars we became involved in.

Do you think that Shadow will finish W27 faster than any other world will be finished?

I would like to think it would be, but it would be anyone’s guess. The early worlds do have numbers dropping week by week. They also have the added advantage that no one else can join their worlds. Give us 6 months lets see how much more we have cleared up then )

Would you care to suggest a timeframe for the end of this world?

Hopefully no more than a year.

What do you see in store for a) yourself b) Shadow c) LIGHT d) FOME e) GR*FM f) *TKP* g) the rest of the world?

Me - will finish on this world. Shadow - will win W27. LIGHT - will all get rimmed / quit. d and e – let’s wait and see. F - not many of them left so will probably end up nobled. g - all rimmed.

If you could bring back one player who has since left, who would it be and why?

Ojibweman. Extremely sensible player; he had the drive and fortitude and vision needed for this game.

Does being famous, within TW, appeal to you at all?

Being known on one world for a tribe’s achievements is one thing, to carry it over to another world is a little sad. How many people are running round on other worlds saying look at me, I was in the number one tribe in W ... Rather let our current deeds speak for themselves, than try to cling to a past that we may never be able to replicate. If I do play a future world, it will probably not be under the name of Ephette. I'd prefer to start somewhere else as an unknown.

So what is winning worth to you?

Logic would say it would be something to be proud of, but then what do we compare it to? This is after all a computer game where we waste away our valuable hours. Perhaps it’s more of a sense of achievement. Something we as a team achieve. After all is it not the camaraderie, the friendship, the trust we have built up in each other, that keeps us coming back every day to spend some more of our time here.

So the people are the reason you continue to play, but not the reason you came?

The only person I knew when I started this world was my husband, so no the people here are not why I came to this world as I did not know any of them. I play for both, to keep in touch with the people I have met, and for the enjoyment of the game.

What do you think makes a good TW leader and what makes a bad one?

What makes a good leader - being prepared to listen, we're not always right though tribe members may not quote me on that :p . Being able to adjust plans as necessary, circumstances do change; plan A may not always be the right one a week down the line, so you need to be adaptable. Keep up with events on the world - you can't run a successful tribe without knowing what all the other tribes are doing. I know this will sound like a contradiction but be prepared to stick to your guns, if you have the conviction that something is right. Get a solid team of people in leadership behind you, and lead by example. Get to know your tribe members, get to know peoples strengths and weaknesses. Don't try and control everything, people have to stand on their own two feet as well. Try and be as fair minded as possible when there are difficult issues to deal with and if necessary, let someone else who isn't involved mediate.

What makes a bad one - someone who ignores the above.


If you had one piece of advice to any budding duke/duchess, what would it be?

One piece of advice: always, always remember the tribe is not yours. The tribe belongs to the members - without them there is no tribe; without them you would not be a leader.

From the point of view of a leader: what, in your opinion, are the best qualities in a tribe member, and what are the worst traits?

Best qualities in a tribe member - Working as a team member. Loyalty to the tribe and to each other. Being willing to put aside personal differences for the sake of the tribe. Working together towards a common goal. Respecting fellow players - friend and foe alike.

Worst traits - Selfish players, not willing to help others but demanding help when they are in trouble. Needless spamming but never to be seen when missions are in progress. Having no respect for others (leaders and other players).


Does the amount of devastation you cause, the amount of players and tribes you have crushed ever bother you in any way?

Not particularly. This is a game. If you cannot handle loosing your villages, don't play. Majority of folks I know have lost villages / been rimmed at some point. Yes its annoying, knowing that village you spent all your time on now belongs to someone else, but, its a game. Restart, move on. If you're under attack don't turn into a whinger and start mailing every single person around you about how someone is taking your villages, if you just want to build things go play ‘Sim City’.

Why do you think that the world has turned out so small?

The settings quite simply. We did not get enough people who initially joined, to enable a rime tribe to have a decent chance in this world. Rim tribes on other worlds have succeeded in making a name for themselves. In this world the rim was not far enough away.

If you could fight one person one on one, who would it be and why?

To fight one on one implies an ability to fight, I'm just here the social scene :p

What do you think of attack breaks?

Best idea yet.

Very witty; so what is your favourite aspect of the game? And what is your least favourite aspect of the game?

Taking a tiny little village and building it up, yes I know how sad that sounds, but you are talking to the woman who used to spend endless hours playing Sim City.

As for my least favourite aspect; hmmm the silly people posting on the external forums.


So tell me, how is it that a 'Sim Cityer', who likes mass recruting and can't fight ends up leading what could be, relatively, the most successful tribe in ‘.net’ history?

I'm going to ignore the labels that you have given to me; folks are welcome to check my ODA ranking to see if I do occasionally send out attacks - I'm rank 21 at the moment. I'm an organiser; I like to see things done properly. I like to keep checks on things - don't ask how many times a day I check the members list to make sure no one’s being acc sat by someone they should not be, and that they are not showing yellow. I like to make little lists to see how things are going. I love watching numbers either go up or down. And I have seen things in other worlds happen that I thought, if this were my tribe I would never have allowed that. I see how things happen and look for a way to improve them.

If Shadow were to simply disappear from the map, what do you think would happen on W27?

Firstly there'd be an awful lot of barb nobling going on. Alot of barb nobling, in fact i think we'd see at least 6 months of barb nobling before anyone actually thought about going to war. By this stage an uber pre-made from an earlier world would of realised what a treasure chest this world could be, and would of quietly started playing in the 4 corners of the world. Then one day when no-one expects is they would form one tribe and we would see global domination.

What will you do after W27, are you planning to return to the game having hopefully accomplished its highest accolade?

I think W27 will be my last world. Well until I can't bear to be away from TW anymore, then I may have to sneak onto another world.

And some more in light of recent events:

Considering recent events, do you wish to revise your answer to what you see in store for GR*FM?

I believe I will. TarynAshley has involved her tribe in a war they cannot possibly hope to win.

What would say to her accusations about your lack of honour?

I was rather astounded that she had to sink to such tactics, blatant lies, in order to give her tribe a reason to fight. Our tribes history speaks clearly for itself. This is also the first time in the history of our tribe that we have actually sent a proposal of this fashion to any tribe on this world.

What do you think of the decision that she had made

I think she has made a very poor choice. I know that as leaders sometimes we do have to make some tough decisions, and sometimes they will seem strange choices, but, when you have to make a tough decision like that, you must do it with the backing, or at least the majority backing of the rest of the leadership. When the decision a leader makes is because of something personal, and they abuse their position of trust that their tribe has placed them in, doing the opposite that not only they originally agreed to do, but give their leadership no choice in the matter either, then we have to ask if the person leading the tribe had no business doing it in the first place.

What about FOME then?

FOME's members have the absolute belief that they have a higher calling, their purposes for playing this game are much beyond the mere nobling of villages, so I respect their purpose for being here.

Thoughts for the Week
A few words on the vicissitudes of the week and TW in general

I have two offering for you this week. One Is courtesy of Silverwolf and the other of me.​

Again with the whole “Backstab-thing”

Trickery and treachery are the practices of fools that have not the wits to be honest.” (Benjamin Franklin).

I suppose we in Shadow should be very, very used to being stabbed in the back. It’s kind of becoming a recurring theme of our reign at the top of the proverbial World 27 food chain.

We’ve seen tribes such as Feb. 13th and Nstlk* use such underhanded tactics in the past like launching before declaring and pretending to be friends and then suddenly changing their minds.

So it should be absolutely no shock whatsoever to see GR*FM try it’s handed at the well tried and failed tactic of stabbing Shadow in the back. I’d say I’m disappointed but frankly I’m not sure whether to laugh.

Upon examining the tribe membership list one is not struck by any thoughts that this tribe is filled with players who will pose a threat to Shadow.

Their number one player and Duchess TarynAshley appears upon examination of her conquers to be merely a point whore who has spent her time preying on the small, weak and of course those pesky abandoned villages. It should be noted that she also has Shadow conquers to her name and full credit to her even if they were obtained via underhanded means.

In fact upon examination of the other two players of a “respectable” size in GR*FM one is struck by the fact that they seem to have just taken it easy, killing off that annoying group of villages that are owned by Barbarians.

Players from number 4 down to 21 can easily be described as players of absolutely no consequence except in terms of Defence and Offence troops to lose to Shadow.

One has to wonder: what on earth was GR*FM’s leadership thinking? Not much I think may be the answer. Then again maybe boredom has gripped the hearts of GR*FM and this is merely some means of entertainment?

Although I cannot think that it would be very entertaining to lose in such a profound way. What GR*FM seek to gain escapes me. They are (to my knowledge) not allied with LIGHT although it would bring me great amusement to learn that such an alliance existed.

I suppose GR*FM are doing this following some misguided thought that this is just speeding up the inevitable; and that Shadow were in reality plotting to destroy them under the guise of friendship.

So, here we are war is upon Shadow again. Maybe GR*FM’s close geographical positioning of their villages and players will help them.

Who am I kidding? They’re stuffed.​

By Silverwolf008

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

The Tribe Lock

Another year over hmm? One wonders where all that time has gone, how it has been spent, whether indeed we are one year richer, or one year poorer. It puts one in a nostalgic mood, the type that causes one to reflect upon past events. Indeed, one I have not spoken much about, but is perhaps crucial in understanding this world is the tribe lock itself. I spoke about it a little in my anniversary thread, and some parts may sound familiar, but I should like to go into greater depth.

I would hope that the entire community is familiar with the concept, so I shall pass over the explanation, but rather we must consider the event that leaves our world in the shape it did, what would have happened had it not been initiated, and therefore what if W27 were any other world.

It must first be said that the tribe lock was a new thing to ‘.net’. It had the same appeal as anything else new and different and immediately set this world apart. The theory of forcing a player into a randomly assigned tribe was an interesting one. The discussions on the settings of the world lie mostly forgotten, but let us consider why such a modus operandi could be successful.

One of the things that the tribe lock was designed to guard against was pre-made tribes in a two-fold scheme. Obviously those players seeking to establish themselves as a tribe immediately were not able to. Admittedly this point is somewhat moot, because an uncodified tribe could still have existed. However, the settings also dictated that tribe members could only support their own side, detracting from the ability of a de facto tribe, and there was also the small matter of random placement of players scrambling attempts to band together.

Essentially therefore, the spectre of pre-made tribes was eliminated. It was an idea intended to make a world how it should be, as even a playing field as possible. Aside from this, one cannot see huge benefit in the lock; it did allow some players to mix with more experienced ones whom they would not have had the chance to were it not for the tribe lock. It also tested leadership skills in many ways, players had to persuade 99 other complete strangers of their credentials. Not that being the leader amounted to much; it was more of a bureaucratic necessity than an imbuement of any actual authority.

What was most interesting however was the proposed liberation from the lock 3 months down the line. Here we had an opportunity for leaders to no longer be burdened with the multitude of riff-raff that so infested early tribes, but rather to be able to select their members based upon the merits of 3 months’ growth. Essentially, the world only started for real and each player had to maintain a deposit of 3 months of play in order to actual reach the world proper. It proposed the effect of ‘starting’ the world already aware of who was good and who was not.

Overall, it paints a rather tidy picture. We have a new experiment, a world free of pre-made tribes or old friends ganging up with each other in the early game. It offered less experienced players the opportunity to mix some of the more experienced and provided a test of leadership ability. It also seemed to endow a real start to the world 3 months in, when it was clear who was staying and worthwhile in a tribe.

On the surface, with a bit of positive thought behind it, the lock is an excellent idea. It is not difficult to see why some might join, though I think the intentions for the world and the reasons why people came are not the same. Despite its credentials, the endemic reason for joining seems to be a simple one: to give it a go. Many players simply saw these new interesting settings and decided that it would be worth a look. Well, I say that, some players neglected to even read the settings and then wondered what was going on. If you were new to TW, this could well have been quite surreal, considering what you had heard.

It is plausible to divide those who joined into some rough groups: those who were not aware of the settings; those who were curious as to the workings of such a scheme; those who felt that it would be advantageous and indeed a good experience. Like the majority, I was mostly in the group who were here for the ride, though possibly I could see it as being beneficial. It was a nice speed too; what was the worst that could happen? I sensed that a lack of tribes and pre-made PAs would leave each player squarely on their own, turning many neighbourhoods into veritable deathmathces for supremacy and a diplomatic and social scene that went beyond the usual people skills. You really could trust no one.

Looking at those first few days, it was clear that the world would be like no other. We had a deluge of complaint and disenchantment which induced a lot of players to quit and probably scared off a lot of the newest players to TW. Admittedly, there were some players who were finding the settings to be a refreshing change or who were at least lucky enough to have found their feet in the lottery of the start, while others were left hamstrung. It is not unreasonable to posit that the lock polarised much opinion; you either thought it was ridiculous, or you liked it. I do not feel that anyone had overly strong feelings towards it, but some were interpreting the state of affairs as unworkable and against the concepts of the game. On the other hand, it did have the effect of thrusting a player into a Darwinian environment where independence was the only means, forcing players to be less reliant upon others and requesting a consummate political and social game from them too. It is obvious at least that it forced players into new relationships and broadened the social scope for the game, even if it was not realised.

It was also the reason for many players leaving the world early, dissatisfied with this supposedly wonderful system, and accounts for the general lack of growth as its early expansion became inhibited after it had been so heavily criticised and from that point on, it simply did not attract the necessary amount of players and its growth slowed considerably. The lack of local tribal structure also left many players vulnerable to their neighbours and the eventual result was a stunted world, which never filled to anything like its capacity

However, it did at least seem that the game was thrust to a greater degree into the hands of the players themselves. No tribes, no ‘assured’ allies, random positions; something of a deathmatch scenario which would determine who the fittest players were. It did build skills, it did take players’ games in new directions and it was a unique experience. It also brought together players from different sides of W27 and laid the foundations for enduring relationships as well as excuses for mercy. These goals were ostensibly accomplished, but not it seems, without the mass exodus of a significant number of players.

The settings were probably always going to divide players and it did indeed leave something of a dichotomy in the world. On the one hand, you have your veterans, who have fought off all comers to keep control of their little areas, bound together by de facto alliances and the masses of small players struggling along beside their neighbours, kept safe by excessive numbers of PAs or else mutual fear. As the 3 month period began to come to an end, plans were already afoot by shrewd dukes and duchesses as to whom they were to invite armed with the knowledge of who was worthy and who was not.

Perhaps I should pause here and consider what the world would be like if tribe lock has been kept. What if we had a world where the lock was permanent? Admittedly it might be a bit of a lottery, but it could certainly raise some interesting scenarios. Some changes could be made here and there, but what if we simply forced players to fight it out like that? Personal alliances would be rather less prolific than they were and it would be a case of simply trying to work towards your allies, hoping that they are decent players. On balance perhaps it would be a little crazy, but interesting nonetheless.

Bit I digress. As the lock came to an end, the most astute leaders had their plans afoot, as if they have been allowed a glimpse 3 months into the future from the start of any other world to pick the players whom they knew to be worthwhile. This is key to understanding why the early tribes developed I think. ATTACK more than anyone were looking to pick up the best and brightest in my continents, in something that was almost global, and the lock allowed them to do that.

So were those 3 months well spent? Well the first question is perhaps one that I can answer for anyone else. It was certainly an interesting experience, and I think every player learned something if they stuck it out, much more so than if they had joined a local tribe in another world. It encouraged an independence that was valuable and shaped the world today. People would not be here if it had been an utterly terrible experience, so there was definitely substance.

Was it a useful experiment? Any experiment is useful, particularly one that has not been done before. The only real way to discern how this would turn out was to actually put it into practice and the results speak for themselves. Whether it will be taken forward and similar settings proposed, I do not know.

How would it have turned out on a normal world? This is probably the most interesting question. Certainly the scope for ATTACK’s ambition was accommodated by the lock, and such a think is unlikely to have existed without the lock. I think we’d probably see some of those pre-mades that were either split up or simply neglected to join having a say in things. It’s impossible to know, but interesting to flirt with.

Now if you had to ask me whether I would do a similar world, then I probably would, just for the nostalgia. However, they would probably consider changes. I think a shorter lock would be beneficial, as it still accomplishes its objectives, but helps to retain more players who were dissatisfied. The leadership selection probably needs a revision too and players who knew what they were getting themselves in for would nice.

All in all, it was an interesting run; that cannot be denied. For better or worse, we are in the situations we are because of the lock and I think many took something from it. It may be unpopular but it holds a unique place in our experience.​

Stats

Top Ten Tribes
1 Shadow 94.450.775 111.563.741 73 1.528.270 11356 9.824
2 LIGHT 31.308.579 36.712.893 73 502.916 3919 9.368
3 FOME 7.677.575 7.677.575 20 383.879 926 8.291
4 GR*FM 7.303.019 7.303.019 21 347.763 878 8.318
5 *TKP* 6.831.934 6.831.934 33 207.028 834 8.192
6 Dawn 3.315.689 3.855.698 89 43.322 654 5.896
7 NOS 3.292.212 3.292.212 38 86.637 440 7.482
8 ASS 1.971.266 2.001.126 63 31.764 315 6.353
9 Purge 1.938.060 1.938.060 21 92.289 307 6.313
10 BIP 1.796.362 1.796.362 26 69.091 235 7.644

Top Ten Players
1 gerick6 Shadow 4.234.386 412 10278
2 Zarin Shadow 4.140.473 405 10223
3 mikestuntz Shadow 3.927.110 390 10070
4 toby7304 Shadow 3.899.113 391 9972
5 Mande1992 Shadow 3.753.303 379 9903
6 filphillip Shadow 3.670.297 394 9315
7 ftw97 Shadow 3.651.682 371 9843
8 Deciphered Shadow 3.643.492 363 10037
9 BrobFellshank Shadow 3.533.627 347 10183
10 sstarkey Shadow 3.424.510 347 9869

Maps

Top Tribes
mapphp101.png


Top Players
mapphp111.png


Comic

cool-cartoon-1285046.png


cool-cartoon-1285165.png


Was finally able to post this thing up, forums have been down for me for quite some time - that’s life I do suppose. Although it would endow me the scope to discuss more on GR*FM and now FOME, I felt that would not be technically correct, so those will be saved until next week.​
[/spoil]​
 
Last edited by a moderator:

DeletedUser

Guest
W27 Weekly: 03th January

Banner.png


[spoil]Zarin – Editor/Interview
sweeney2kaii8 – Maps/Comics
Submissions: Silverwolf008

I thought that I would begin by wishing everyone a very happy New Year. 2009 has been something of a decider for this world and 2010 sets the stage for what could either be Shadow’s endgame or merely the most destructive chapter in its history. Time will tell…​

Fighters Or Merely Eleemosynary?
FOME declares upon Shadow…and joins with GR*FM

It was not only a simple matter of time before FOME declared upon Shadow, but a necessity too. Finally the world no longer waits to be usurped in turn by the behemoth of Shadow and ‘strength through peace’ is somehow extended to include war.

But their victory was already won allegedly, it had already been declared, though this author wonders whether moral value and computer games have ever gone in hand in hand. Certainly they have been the most unique tribe to grace this world and will not be forgotten for that. Indeed FOME had always been something of an enigma to many. A supposed sanctuary to players it was; its players can no doubt put it better than me. But it was an unremarkable history up until this point; until that is, it involved itself in the fate of this world.

One doesn’t really expect Shadow to have overlooked FOME’s potential in the war and their position and presumed natural alliance with GR*FM made war the most likely corollary. It’s no doubt fair to say that this war was expected and no doubt simply assumed by Shadow players once GR*FM had ‘declared’. And yet, before they were even able to make a name for themselves further, most unfortunate circumstances meant that Styv would no longer be able to lead the tribe and thus they took the decision to merge into GR*FM.

What effects will it have? Well for starters it’s going to affect the stats as FOME have fared worse than GR*FM…well if their members stayed in the tribe, but that’s life. FOME will now be the easier of the two pickings and thus we could well see Shadow move through them to pick off the more vulnerable GR*FM villages at the back of that cluster.

On the other hand, it gives GR*FM more clout and a more belligerent and aggressive leader to FOME which will be necessary in the war. Certainly if these players can work together, and they have been neighbours for so long, it could be a strong move and a worthwhile one.

Thus we say goodbye to FOME and wish Styv well, hoping that he will recover. And of course we wish the very best of luck to the new GR*FM in this conflict. Oh and I hope you got the acronym in the headline, otherwise it is just going to look peculiar…​

Freedom From Shadow
GR*FM leading the fight against Shadow

We all knew that it would be a savage first week when GR*FM declared. A Shadow front unprepared and an opponent deluged with resources. It was never going to be pretty for them. And yet, despite the promising start from GR*FM; Shadow have turned things around within a short time, helped in no small amount by the attack break for the New Year.​

GR*FM – (last week)

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 38
Side 2: 38
Difference: 0

image.php


GR*FM – (since beginning)

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 41
Side 2: 44
Difference: 3

image.php


LIGHT

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 75
Side 2: 3
Difference: 72

image.php


NOS

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 2
Side 2: 0
Difference: 2

image.php


FURY

Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 0
Side 2: 0
Difference: 0

image.php


We expected a classic first week from GR*FM and we did indeed get one. With the courtesy of the stats since the beginning of the war we can see them having edged their way in front, but that Shadow has already brought things to parity in the last week. That says one thing: Shadow is mobilising.

The initial assault was brutal and early stats found Shadow trailing for the likes of which they had not seen for quite some time. The element of surprise was probably worth those early villages, but obviously it could not carry GR*FM through. The respite of the attack break surrendered that early initiative and allowed Shadow crucial time to organise and then counter.

If we look at the last 48 hours, Shadow is 14-0 ahead. Obviously one does not want to call this early, but it seems that Shadow, now prepared, is going about its usual business and the initiative of GR*FM has simply not carried through after the break. They are here to go out with a bang and to fight a defensive war from now on. Sapping resources in a war of attrition is certainly the new fashion among Shadow’s enemies, but its effectiveness remains to be seen. 2009 was good for GR*FM in the war, but 2010 is shaping up to be a different prospect entirely.

On the LIGHTer side of things it is another atrocious week for LIGHT. No initiative is being sought in the new year and Shadow continues to reap the benefits. They are spared some statistical embarrassment by the break…but not much.

NOS have surely been forgotten on that side of the world in lieu of GR*FM and their suffering is mostly vicarious for the moment. Is it not obvious that the veterans on that side of the world will need feeding after they have devoured GR*FM?

FURY surprised me this week, not in their lack of conquer but by how small they have become. They currently have less than 10K points; when did that happen? It’s a bit of a shame, these guys had spirit and were industrious when they wanted to be; I suppose it is another chapter to close and another enemy for Shadow to lay aside, relegated to but words in its history.​

A Message To Purge
Bella declares upon Purge

As if all the wars that Shadow was fighting were not enough, we have another. Even better, we have almost equal sides, a declaration and the prospect of some PnP. What we don’t have is much action; the excitement of the ‘w’ word has abated and we settle in expecting to mull over some stats, but this author is not really seeing them:​

Side 1:
Tribes: Bella
Players:

Side 2:
Tribes: Purge
Players:

Timeframe: Last week

Total conquers:

Side 1: 19
Side 2: 31
Difference: 12

image.php


Total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 1
Side 2: 1
Difference: 0

image.php


Points value of total conquers:

Side 1: 61,729
Side 2: 176,740
Difference: 115,011

image.php


Points value of total conquers against opposite side:

Side 1: 10,268
Side 2: 6,798
Difference: 3,470

image.php


So predictions, predictions…it is a little early to call I think, but the positioning of the tribes and their relatives sizes mean that it could go either way. However, what seems most likely to me is a relative stalemate. Beyond losing isolated villages - those of Purge in K23 and those of Bella in K43 and K42 – it does not look like much will be forthcoming unless we see a determined assault from either side. I think a reservation of judgement and some PnP is the best bet here.

I have composed a map. Purge are in red in K32 and that’s Bella in green in K33 and K32. Enjoy…​

mapphp.png


Thoughts for the Week
A few words on the vicissitudes of the week and TW in general

Shadow Waves “Bye-Bye” To Yet Another Opponent

This week Shadow said goodbye to FOME as GR*FM allowed FOME’s members to join their tribe, in a thoroughly unsurprising and tactically sound move by the members of the two South-Eastern Tribes.

Styv also notified much of W27 of his intention to quit due to ill health and this was substantiated by Elk2 his co-duke. This writer (and I’m sure the Weekly itself) wishes Styv all the best and hopefully a return to full health.

This move by GR*FM and FOME seems to this scribe to be a sensible move and should prolong the war in the South-East. However the now new and possibly improved GR*FM is yet to be tested by the full might of Shadow and now that the attack break is over it will be interesting to see how and where the pieces on the proverbial chessboard will move now.

GR*FM certainly now boasts a stronger line-up with TarynAshley, Elk2, Nordlinder, slim01, Styv (it remains to be seen what will happen with his account) and sboh making a strong top-order. The rest of the tribe will struggle to have much impact on the war in general except in the areas of defence troops and short range noblings/nukings.

It is unfortunate that GR*FM have been landed with Nordlinder, the long-lost Duke of TK who lead them into war against Shadow with the Coalition. I don’t think anyone here needs to be told how bad a decision that was, but if anyone does just look up “TK” in the tribe ranking list.

One thing is very clear to this scribe and that is that because FOME has merged into GR*FM their policy of “strength through peace” is now being abandoned. Although I’m sure that policy is an admirable concept it is clearly redundant in this war game, primarily because it is just that: a war game.

It will also be interesting to see if the clearly more war-like members of GR*FM will be able to work cohesively with the peaceful members of FOME. Such a challenge will be left to GR*FM’s General’s TarynAshley and sboh.

Shadow will undoubtedly have moved large amounts of Defence to their villages in the South and progress for both sides may well be difficult due to stacking. The Shadow War Machine has often shown itself immune to such things so I’m sure we shall all watch with great anticipation as the battle begins a-new now the break has ended.​

By Silverwolf008​

Stats

Top Ten Tribes
1 Shadow 96.057.080 113.655.459 73 1.556.924 11547 9.843
2 LIGHT 31.814.540 37.018.954 73 507.109 3949 9.374
3 GR*FM 13.588.592 13.588.592 36 377.461 1621 8.383
4 *TKP* 6.556.222 6.556.222 35 187.321 810 8.094
5 Dawn 3.803.721 4.383.728 87 50.388 707 6.200
6 NOS 3.515.736 3.515.736 38 92.519 459 7.660
7 Purge 2.425.984 2.425.984 26 93.307 373 6.504
8 Bella 2.267.528 2.277.023 47 48.447 343 6.639
9 BIP 1.624.919 1.624.919 26 62.497 205 7.926
10 -DC- 1.616.225 1.616.225 40 40.406 259 6.240

Top Ten Players
1 gerick6 Shadow 4.237.504 412 10285
2 Zarin Shadow 4.225.537 413 10231
3 ftw97 Shadow 3.990.331 404 9877
4 mikestuntz Shadow 3.927.423 390 10070
5 Mande1992 Shadow 3.849.178 389 9895
6 Deciphered Shadow 3.751.343 367 10222
7 filphillip Shadow 3.734.172 400 9335
8 toby7304 Shadow 3.729.880 371 10054
9 sstarkey Shadow 3.580.507 361 9918
10 BrobFellshank Shadow 3.563.930 350 10183

Maps

Top Tribes
toptribesfornow.jpg


Top Players
topplayersdoitnow.jpg


Comic

cool-cartoon-1291802.png


cool-cartoon-1291792.png


[/spoil]​
 
Last edited by a moderator:
Top